[{"data":1,"prerenderedAt":3144},["ShallowReactive",2],{"search-sections":3,"/release-notes/helix/2-71":3105},[4,10,14,19,23,29,34,39,44,49,54,59,64,69,74,79,84,89,94,99,104,109,114,118,122,126,131,136,141,146,150,155,159,164,169,173,177,181,186,190,194,199,204,208,212,217,222,226,230,235,240,245,250,255,259,263,267,271,276,281,285,289,293,298,303,307,311,315,319,323,327,332,336,340,345,350,354,358,362,367,371,375,379,384,388,392,396,401,405,410,415,419,423,427,432,437,442,447,452,457,461,465,470,474,478,483,488,493,498,504,509,514,519,524,529,534,539,544,549,554,559,564,569,574,579,584,589,594,599,604,609,614,619,624,629,634,639,644,649,654,659,664,668,673,677,681,686,691,696,700,704,709,713,717,721,726,731,734,738,741,746,751,756,761,765,770,775,780,785,790,794,799,804,809,814,819,824,829,834,839,844,849,854,859,864,869,874,878,883,888,893,898,903,908,913,917,922,927,931,936,941,945,950,955,959,964,968,971,976,981,986,991,996,1001,1006,1011,1016,1021,1026,1031,1035,1039,1043,1047,1051,1055,1060,1064,1069,1074,1079,1084,1089,1092,1097,1102,1107,1112,1117,1120,1125,1130,1135,1140,1145,1150,1155,1160,1165,1170,1175,1179,1183,1187,1191,1195,1199,1204,1209,1214,1218,1223,1228,1232,1237,1242,1247,1252,1257,1262,1267,1272,1277,1282,1287,1292,1297,1302,1307,1312,1317,1322,1327,1332,1337,1342,1347,1352,1357,1362,1367,1372,1377,1382,1387,1392,1396,1401,1406,1411,1415,1419,1424,1429,1434,1437,1442,1447,1452,1457,1462,1465,1470,1475,1480,1485,1490,1495,1500,1503,1508,1513,1518,1522,1527,1532,1536,1541,1545,1550,1555,1560,1564,1568,1572,1576,1581,1586,1591,1595,1599,1604,1609,1614,1619,1624,1628,1633,1638,1643,1648,1653,1657,1662,1666,1670,1675,1679,1683,1687,1691,1695,1699,1703,1708,1712,1716,1721,1725,1730,1735,1739,1743,1746,1749,1752,1755,1758,1761,1765,1768,1772,1776,1780,1784,1788,1792,1796,1801,1806,1811,1815,1819,1824,1828,1833,1838,1843,1848,1853,1858,1863,1868,1873,1878,1883,1888,1893,1898,1903,1908,1912,1917,1922,1927,1932,1937,1942,1946,1951,1955,1960,1965,1970,1975,1980,1985,1990,1995,2000,2005,2010,2015,2020,2025,2030,2035,2040,2043,2047,2052,2057,2062,2067,2072,2077,2082,2086,2091,2096,2101,2106,2111,2116,2121,2126,2131,2136,2141,2146,2151,2156,2161,2165,2170,2175,2180,2185,2190,2195,2200,2205,2210,2215,2220,2223,2228,2233,2238,2242,2247,2251,2255,2259,2263,2267,2271,2275,2279,2283,2288,2293,2298,2303,2308,2313,2317,2321,2326,2331,2336,2341,2346,2351,2356,2361,2366,2371,2376,2381,2386,2391,2395,2399,2404,2408,2413,2418,2423,2428,2433,2438,2443,2448,2453,2458,2462,2467,2472,2477,2482,2486,2490,2494,2499,2504,2508,2513,2518,2521,2526,2531,2536,2541,2546,2551,2556,2561,2565,2570,2575,2580,2585,2590,2593,2597,2602,2607,2612,2617,2622,2627,2632,2637,2642,2647,2650,2653,2658,2663,2668,2673,2678,2683,2688,2693,2698,2703,2708,2713,2718,2723,2728,2733,2738,2743,2747,2750,2754,2757,2760,2763,2766,2769,2772,2775,2778,2781,2784,2787,2790,2793,2798,2801,2806,2810,2814,2819,2823,2827,2832,2836,2839,2844,2849,2854,2859,2864,2869,2874,2879,2882,2887,2892,2897,2902,2907,2911,2915,2920,2924,2929,2934,2939,2943,2947,2951,2955,2959,2963,2967,2972,2976,2981,2986,2990,2995,3000,3003,3008,3013,3018,3022,3026,3030,3034,3037,3042,3046,3050,3053,3057,3061,3065,3069,3073,3077,3082,3086,3090,3095,3100],{"id":5,"title":6,"titles":7,"content":8,"level":9},"/contact","Contact",[],"This is the unofficial universal guide for the Line 6 Helix, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL, and HX Effects. Use this guide to learn about all of the features of your Line 6 device. You will also find links to the official manuals as well as additional resources.",1,{"id":11,"title":6,"titles":12,"content":13,"level":9},"/contact#contact",[],"Helix Help is not associated with Line 6 or any other company or products mentioned on this site. All products are the property of their respective owners. All support related issues should be directed to their proper source.This site is strictly for educational purposes only. The information on Helix Help has been modified to fit the needs of this unofficial guide.This site contains affiliate links, meaning I may receive a small commission at no additional cost to you if you purchase through my links.For official documentation, visit Line 6 support.",{"id":15,"title":16,"titles":17,"content":18,"level":9},"/privacy","Privacy Policy",[],"This page is used to inform website visitors regarding our policies with the collection, use, and disclosure of Personal Information if anyone decided to use our Service, the Helix Help website.",{"id":20,"title":16,"titles":21,"content":22,"level":9},"/privacy#privacy-policy",[],"This page is used to inform website visitors regarding our policies with the collection, use, and disclosure of Personal Information if anyone decided to use our Service, the Helix Help website. If you choose to use our Service, then you agree to the collection and use of information in relation with this policy. The Personal Information that we collect are used for providing and improving the Service. We will not use or share your information with anyone except as described in this Privacy Policy.",{"id":24,"title":25,"titles":26,"content":27,"level":28},"/privacy#information-collection-and-use","Information Collection and Use",[16],"For a better experience while using our Service, we may require you to provide us with certain personally identifiable information, including but not limited to your name, phone number, and postal address. The information that we collect will be used to contact or identify you.",2,{"id":30,"title":31,"titles":32,"content":33,"level":28},"/privacy#log-data","Log Data",[16],"We want to inform you that whenever you visit our Service, we collect information that your browser sends to us that is called Log Data. This Log Data may include information such as your computer's Internet Protocol (\"IP\") address, browser version, pages of our Service that you visit, the time and date of your visit, the time spent on those pages, and other statistics.",{"id":35,"title":36,"titles":37,"content":38,"level":28},"/privacy#cookies","Cookies",[16],"Cookies are files with small amount of data that is commonly used an anonymous unique identifier. These are sent to your browser from the website that you visit and are stored on your computer's hard drive. Our website uses these \"cookies\" to collection information and to improve our Service. You have the option to either accept or refuse these cookies, and know when a cookie is being sent to your computer. If you choose to refuse our cookies, you may not be able to use some portions of our Service.",{"id":40,"title":41,"titles":42,"content":43,"level":28},"/privacy#service-providers","Service Providers",[16],"We may employ third-party companies and individuals due to the following reasons: To facilitate our Service;To provide the Service on our behalf;To perform Service-related services; orTo assist us in analyzing how our Service is used.We want to inform our Service users that these third parties have access to your Personal Information. The reason is to perform the tasks assigned to them on our behalf. However, they are obligated not to disclose or use the information for any other purpose.",{"id":45,"title":46,"titles":47,"content":48,"level":28},"/privacy#security","Security",[16],"We value your trust in providing us your Personal Information, thus we are striving to use commercially acceptable means of protecting it. But remember that no method of transmission over the internet, or method of electronic storage is 100% secure and reliable, and we cannot guarantee its absolute security.",{"id":50,"title":51,"titles":52,"content":53,"level":28},"/privacy#links-to-other-sites","Links to Other Sites",[16],"Our Service may contain links to other sites. If you click on a third-party link, you will be directed to that site. Note that these external sites are not operated by us. Therefore, we strongly advise you to review the Privacy Policy of these websites. We have no control over, and assume no responsibility for the content, privacy policies, or practices of any third-party sites or services. Furthermore, our Service may contain affiliate links, meaning we may receive a small commission at no additional cost to you if you purchase through these links.",{"id":55,"title":56,"titles":57,"content":58,"level":28},"/privacy#childrens-privacy","Children's Privacy",[16],"Our Services do not address anyone under the age of 13. We do not knowingly collect personal identifiable information from children under 13. In the case we discover that a child under 13 has provided us with personal information, we immediately delete this from our servers. If you are a parent or guardian and you are aware that your child has provided us with personal information, please contact us so that we will be able to do necessary actions.",{"id":60,"title":61,"titles":62,"content":63,"level":28},"/privacy#changes-to-this-privacy-policy","Changes to This Privacy Policy",[16],"We may update our Privacy Policy from time to time. Thus, we advise you to review this page periodically for any changes. We will notify you of any changes by posting the new Privacy Policy on this page. These changes are effective immediately, after they are posted on this page.",{"id":65,"title":66,"titles":67,"content":68,"level":28},"/privacy#contact-us","Contact Us",[16],"If you have any questions or suggestions about our Privacy Policy, do not hesitate to contact us.",{"id":70,"title":71,"titles":72,"content":73,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-06-5","Release Notes 1.06.5 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 2/16/16",{"id":75,"title":76,"titles":77,"content":78,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-06-5#release-notes-1065-helix","Release Notes 1.06.5 - Helix",[],"Released 2/16/16 Helix v1.06.5 is a firmware update that includes new fixes and stability improvements, and optimizations. It is highly recommended that all Helix Rack users perform this update! It is also recommended that you back up your current presets by using the Helix application to create a preset bundle, allowing you to install new presets as part of the update process. The easiest way to perform the update process is by installing the latest version of Line 6 Updater. Once you've connected Helix to your computer via its USB port (hubs are not supported), Line 6 Updater will recognize the unit and take you through the update process. Both the Helix application and Line 6 Updater may be downloaded here: https://line6.com/software/",{"id":80,"title":81,"titles":82,"content":83,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-06-5#bug-fixes","Bug Fixes",[76],"In extremely rare cases, Helix can hang after a factory update. 1.06.5 adds a \"safe boot mode\" to allow for a subsequent firmware update. To enter safe boot mode, press and hold footswitches 6 and 12 (far right switches on both rows) while turning on HelixIn some cases, changing a cab model within an Amp+Cab block after opening Pedal Edit mode may reset controller assignments — FIXEDHelix would not filter out MIDI program change messages with a channel different from its MIDI Base channel — FIXEDHeadphone volume would be louder when Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Headphone monitor was set to \"Multi\" — FIXEDThe Command Center > Action Panel's \"Copy All Commands\" button would be grayed out unless a footswitch/instant command containing a message was first selected — FIXEDThe US Double Nrm and US Double Vib model's Sag parameter was biased too high — FIXED IMPORTANT!This procedure will completely overwrite all existing presets and setlists, as well as clear all user IRs and reset all global settings! Back up your presets and IRs before proceeding!Turn off Helix.While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. 3. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.",{"id":85,"title":86,"titles":87,"content":88,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-06-5#known-issues","Known Issues",[76],"Minor pops and clicks may be present when Helix is streaming audio from a Mac® running OS X 10.11 (El Capitan)Minor pops and clicks may be present when Helix is streaming audio from an iOS® device running iOS 9.1 or 9.2 with Apple® Camera KitImporting a Helix bundle while streaming audio over USB may cause the Helix application to disconnect",{"id":90,"title":91,"titles":92,"content":93,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-10","Release Notes 1.10 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 3/29/16",{"id":95,"title":96,"titles":97,"content":98,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-10#release-notes-1100-helix","Release Notes 1.10.0 - Helix",[],"Released 3/29/16 Helix v1.10.0 is a firmware update that includes support for the 1.10 Helix editor application, fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs. If you're running Helix FW 1.06 or 1.06.5, your current Helix application version should be 1.04.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix application and download and install the NEW Helixapplication (1.10.0), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.08).Using the new Line 6 Updater (1.08), update Helix Rack to the newest firmware (1.10.0).Reset Helix's global settings by pressing and holding footswitches 5 and 6 (top row) while booting.Using the new Helix application (1.10.0), restore all user presets and IRs.",{"id":100,"title":101,"titles":102,"content":103,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-10#new-features","New Features",[96],"Compatibility with the new version of Helix editor application",{"id":105,"title":106,"titles":107,"content":108,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-12","Release Notes 1.12 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 5/11/16",{"id":110,"title":111,"titles":112,"content":113,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/1-12#release-notes-1120-helix","Release Notes 1.12.0 - Helix",[],"Released 5/11/16 Helix 1.12.0 is a free update that includes new fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs. If you're running Helix FW 1.06 or 1.06.5, your current Helix application version should be 1.04. If you're running Helix FW 1.10, your current Helix application version should be 1.11.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix application and download and install the NEW Helix editor (1.12.0), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.09).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the new Line 6 Updater (1.09), update Helix (or Helix Rack) to the newest firmware (1.12.0). If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, after Helix Rack has been updated, connect and power on Helix Control, and it will update automatically.Using the latest Helix editor (1.12), restore all user presets and IRs.",{"id":115,"title":101,"titles":116,"content":117,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-12#new-features",[111],"Compatibility with the full version of the Helix editor (1.12)",{"id":119,"title":81,"titles":120,"content":121,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-12#bug-fixes",[111],"A USB port driver issue within OS X El Capitan precluded certain computers (namely MacBook Pros and iMacs from mid-2012) from allowing communication between Helix and the Helix Editor. Note: You must update OS X to El Capitan 10.11.4 – FIXEDHelix could not correctly respond to incoming MIDI CC #64 (Tap Tempo) – FIXEDHelix could sometimes not correctly respond to incoming MIDI PC messages after exporting and then reimporting the same setlist – FIXEDThe Tuner screen's Output parameter would not remember its value across power cycles – FIXEDChanging Input or Output types from the Controller Assign screen could sometimes automatically engage the Learn Controller button – FIXEDInput > Multi and Input > Variax Tone parameter could sometimes maintain its value across presets, even when set to ‘Per Preset'Helix Rack's TAP/TUNER button was unresponsive while in Pedal Edit mode – FIXEDExpression pedals with inverted polarity could cause Helix Rack to freeze when connected to Helix Control – FIXEDIf two footswitches' assignments are quick-swapped while in the Controller Assign screen, the most recent assignment could be removed – FIXEDThe Looper block's icon could incorrectly reflect its state after saving a preset – FIXEDGeneral stability improvementsMany other minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":123,"title":86,"titles":124,"content":125,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/1-12#known-issues",[111],"After a Factory Reset, Global Settings > Ins/Outs > XLR Outputs level appears as Line level but is actually Mic level until you move the knob to \"Mic\" and back to \"Line\"On rare occasions, if Helix is disconnected from the computer within 10 seconds of shutting down the Helix editor, MIDI transmission may become inactive. Always wait 10 seconds after quitting the Helix editor before disconnecting. If you forget, power cycling Helix solves the issue.If you send MIDI CC #59 to Helix, it toggles the control between your bypass-assigned blocks for this switch, but the EXP 1 – EXP 2 Toe Switch strip label does not change states as it does when toggled via the on-board pedal.",{"id":127,"title":128,"titles":129,"content":130,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2","Release Notes 2.0 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 7/6/16",{"id":132,"title":133,"titles":134,"content":135,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2#release-notes-20-helix","Release Notes 2.0 - Helix",[],"Released 7/6/16 HELIX V2.00 IS A FIRMWARE UPDATE THAT INCLUDES NEW MODELS, FEATURES, FIXES, STABILITY IMPROVEMENTS, AND OPTIMIZATIONS. IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED THAT ALL HELIX USERS PERFORM THIS UPDATE! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). If you're running Helix FW 1.12, your current Helix application version should be 1.12.NOTE: You may want to back up individual Setlists so you can restore them to empty setlists without affecting the new 2.0 factory presets.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the NEW Helix editor application (2.00), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.09).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.09), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.00). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.Turn off Helix/Helix Rack.HELIX FLOOR: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix.HELIX RACK: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go. YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.0 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY.Using the NEW Helix editor application (2.00), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":137,"title":138,"titles":139,"content":140,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2#new-amp-models","New Amp Models",[133],"Cali IV Rhythm 1, based on* the Rhythm I channel of the MESA/Boogie® Mk IVCali IV Rhythm 2, based on* the Rhythm II channel of the MESA/Boogie® Mk IVCali IV Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the MESA/Boogie® Mk IVLine 6 2204 Mod, Line 6 Original based on* a hot-rodded Marshall® JCM 800Line 6 Fatality, Line 6 Original",{"id":142,"title":143,"titles":144,"content":145,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2#new-effects-models","New Effects Models",[133],"Distortion > Wringer Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* Garbage's special BOSS® FZ-2EQ > Cali Q Graphic (Mono, Stereo), based on* the MESA/Boogie® Mk IV's 5-band EQModulation > Harmonic Tremolo (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalDelay > Vintage Digital (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original",{"id":147,"title":101,"titles":148,"content":149,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2#new-features",[133],"Snapshots—Select one of eight snapshots to instantly recall all block on/off states, up to 64 parameter values, certain Command Center values, and tempo. Any Delay, Reverb, or FX Loop block with its Trails parameter turned on will spill across snapshots seamlessly. To select a snapshot, press BANK UP and BANK DOWN simultaneously and then one of the middle eight footswitches. For Helix Rack owners who haven't yet snagged Helix Control (and you should), press PRESETS and turn Knob 5 (Select Snapshot). For more information, check out the new Helix 2.0 Owner's Manual, available here: https://line6.com/support/manuals/#effectsSnapshot Parameter Assign—To adjust a parameter AND set it to automatically update per snapshot, press and turn the knob. To adjust a parameter WITHOUT it automatically updating per snapshot, just turn the knob like you normally would. If you accidentally press and turn and didn't mean to, hold BYPASS and press the knob to instantly unassign snapshot controlCopy/Paste Snapshots—While touch-holding the footswitch for the snapshot you want to copy, briefly touch and release the footswitch for the snapshot you want to overwrite. For Helix Rack owners who haven't yet snagged Helix Control (and again, you SHOULD), select the snapshot you want to copy, press PRESETS, and then ACTION. Press Knob 1 (Copy Snapshot). Select the snapshot you want to overwrite, press ACTION, and then Knob 2 (Paste Snapshot)Swap Snapshots—Touch and hold two snapshot footswitches and a dialog appears, asking if you want to swap their locationRename Snapshots—Press PRESETS and then Knob 6 (Rename Snapshot) to rename the snapshot to something meaningful, such as \"VERSE 1\", \"BIG SOLO\" or \"D. IGLOO.\" Snapshot names are limited to 10 charactersGlobal Settings > Preferences > Snapshot Edits—Determines whether or not any edits made to a snapshot are remembered when returning to that snapshot. \"Recall\" automatically recalls any edits made to the snapshot; \"Discard\" forgets any edits made and returns the snapshot to its state when the preset was last saved. You must save the preset to store changes to snapshots regardless. The home screen's camera icon turns red when set to \"Discard.\" Shortcut: Hold BYPASS and press SAVE to toggle this settingGlobal Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Tempo Select—In addition to Global and Per Preset (still the default), Helix's tempo can now be set per snapshot. Shortcut: Touch TAP to briefly view and set this parameterGlobal Settings > Footswitches > Preset Mode Switches—You can now determine whether each row in Preset footswitch mode (upper or lower) selects Presets, Snapshots, or Stomps. The default setting remains the same, but is now called \"8 Presets\"Global Settings > Footswitches > Snapshot Mode Footswitches—A new Global Settings > Footswitches parameter lets you set Snapshot mode footswitches as Auto Return (automatically returns to Preset or Stomp footswitch mode after selection) or Manual Return (stays in Snapshot footswitch mode until you press FS6  CANCEL)Global Settings > Footswitches > Up/Down Switches—FS1 and FS7 now have three options: Bank Up/Down, Preset Up/Down, and Snapshot Up/Down, available from the Global Settings > Footswitches menu. Shortcut: Press and hold FS1 and FS7 for one second to cycle through Bank Up/Down, Preset Up/Down, and Snapshot Up/DownGlobal Settings > Ins/Outs > USB In 1/2 Trim—Added the ability to attenuate the level of incoming USB 1/2 signals, so Mac/PC/iOS applications with no (or difficult-to-access) app-level volume control can be more easily blended with Helix's processingGlobal Settings > Ins/Outs > Digital Out Level—Added the ability to adjust the digital (S/PDIF and AES/EBU) output levelGlobal Settings > EXP Pedals > EXP 1/2/3 Polarity—Added the ability to individually switch the polarity of EXP 1, 2, and 3, providing support for a wider variety of third-party expression pedalsGlobal Settings > EXP Pedals > EXP 1/2/3 Pedal Position—Global Settings > Footswitches > EXP Pedal Position has been split into separate parameters for each expression pedal. For example, EXP 1's wah position can be recalled per preset, EXP 2's volume position can act globally, and EXP 3's reverb depth control can be recalled per snapshotControllers to Variax Parameters—Controllers (including Snapshots) can now control/recall Variax parameters, so you can do cool stuff like toggle between two guitar models with a footswitch, control Variax's tone knob with an expression pedal, assign a momentary footswitch to drop D, recall completely different tunings with each snapshot, and more. There's nothing special to do; just assign a controller to Variax parameters like you would any other parameterPer Preset Guitar In Impedance—Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Guitar In Impedance has been moved to the Input > Multi and Input > Guitar In block and is now recalled per preset. It appears at Knob 4 as \"Guitar In-Z.\" Now that it's on the Home page, you can assign a footswitch or snapshot to it and determine how your guitar's pickups are loaded in real time. The default has been changed to \"Auto.\"Enhanced Tuner Display—The tuner display now shows an additional –3-cent to +3-cent row of bars, providing more granularity when the note played is close to being in tune. Accuracy remains the sameMIDI Recall Indicator—Press PRESETS to open the Setlist menu. Dark text appears above Knob 2 and displays the necessary MIDI messages required to remotely recall the current setlist, preset, and snapshot so you don't have to go digging through the manual",{"id":151,"title":152,"titles":153,"content":154,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2#other-improvements","Other Improvements",[133],"Shortcut: Hold BYPASS and press a parameter knob to quickly remove any controller assignment (including the Snapshots controller. The value appears without brackets, indicating no controller is assigned to itShortcut: In Pedal Edit mode, press and hold FS10 (VALUE–) and FS11 (VALUE+) to quickly scroll through values. Now Helix Rack/Control users can quickly adjust parameters with their feet when no expression pedal is connectedShortcut: In Pedal Edit mode, press and hold a Time (or Speed) parameter switch to toggle between ms (or Hz) and note values, just like pressing the knobHelix's pitch detect algorithms have been optimized and now track slightly fasterParameters in the Global Settings menu have been reorganized to better reflect their category. For example, Tap Tempo Pitch has been moved to a new Preferences submenu and the Info submenu has been removed, as the current FW version now appears at the top of the Global Settings screenOn the Save, Name, and Customize screens, Knob 3 (Clear) has been replaced with Insert, which inserts a space and shifts all following characters to the right. You can still clear a character by pressing the joystick, which now cycles through A, a, 0, and  SPACEThe Footswitch Assign page has been renamed \"Bypass Assign\" to better describe current and potential future functionalityTouch-hold any assigned stomp footswitch and the Customize button now also appears above Knob 5. The Customize button is grayed out if the footswitch has nothing yet assigned to itOn the Customize screens, Knob 4 now always displays a Remove button, regardless of whether a custom label has been assigned (solid button) or not (grayed out button)When touching two stomp mode switches to swap their locations, the inspector text now tells you which two footswitches will be swappedRecall snapshots remotely via an incoming MIDI CC message. A CC69 message with value 0 recalls Snapshot 1, value 1 recalls Snapshot 2, value 2 recalls Snapshot 3, and so forthFootswitches in Looper mode now transmit corresponding MIDI CCsAdditions to and improvements made to the existing factory preset bundleRe-leveled presetsThe Helix Owner's Manual has been updated to 2.0: https://line6.com/support/manuals/#effects",{"id":156,"title":81,"titles":157,"content":158,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2#bug-fixes",[133],"Parameters could respond sluggishly when receiving lots of fast incoming MIDI CC data * FIXEDSome MIDI keyboards (including those by Roland and M-Audio) send active sensing messages every 300ms, which could sometimes affect Helix's MIDI input to the computer, causing intermittent dropouts * FIXEDCertain cab model defaults with 121 Ribbon mic could display as 421 Dynamic * FIXEDRapidly moving EXP 1/2/3 while importing/exporting presets could result in data lockout * FIXEDCommand Center > Copy/Paste All Commands would not copy customized labels * FIXEDLearn Controller would not work with FS1 or FS7 while in 10 Switches Stomp mode * FIXEDHelix wouldn't remember tuner output routing across power cycles * FIXEDAfter a factory reset, Global Settings > Ins/Outs > XLR Out Level would be set to Mic level until toggled, regardless of its displayed value * FIXEDCertain delay models' Time parameter could only go down to 20ms, even if the display reflected a lower value * FIXEDThe TAP footswitch's LED would reflect Global tempo instead of Per Preset tempo * FIXEDGeneral stability improvementsOther minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":160,"title":161,"titles":162,"content":163,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-10","Release Notes 2.10 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 11/22/16",{"id":165,"title":166,"titles":167,"content":168,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#release-notes-210-helix","Release Notes 2.10 - Helix",[],"Released 11/22/16 Helix v2.10.0 is a firmware update that includes new models, features, fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. It is highly recommended that all Helix users perform this update! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 1.12, your current Helix application version should be 1.12.NOTE: You may want to back up individual Setlists so you can restore them to empty setlists without affecting the new 2.10 factory presets.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the NEW Helix editor application (2.10), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.10).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.10), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.10). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.10 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW:To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix/Helix Rack.HELIX FLOOR ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.HELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the NEW Helix editor application (2.10), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":170,"title":138,"titles":171,"content":172,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#new-amp-models",[166],"Archetype Clean, based on* the clean channel of the Paul Reed Smith® Archon®Archetype Lead, based on* the lead channel of the Paul Reed Smith® Archon®Line 6 Litigator, new Line 6 Original inspired by boutique mid-gain amps",{"id":174,"title":143,"titles":175,"content":176,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#new-effects-models",[166],"Distortion > Stupor OD (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® SD-1 OverdriveDelay > Pitch Echo (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original",{"id":178,"title":101,"titles":179,"content":180,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#new-features",[166],"Auto Enable/Bypass blocks from EXP 1/2/3 and Variax Volume/Tone Knobs—Processing blocks (such as Wah, Pitch Wham, etc.) can now be enabled/bypassed by simply moving EXP 1, EXP 2, EXP 3, or Variax's Volume or Tone knob. Press MENU and then Knob 1 (Bypass Assign). Turn Knob 1 (Switch) to select the desired switch. When selecting a continuous controller as a switch, Knob 2 (Position) and Knob 3 (Wait) appear.Bypass Assign > Position—Position determines the location in the Exp Pedal or Variax knob's travel where the block is engaged. For example, if set to 1%, the block will turn off as soon as the pedal is moved to the heel position. If set to 99%, the block will only turn on when the pedal is moved to the toe position. To swap the on/off state regardless of position, press the BYPASS button.Bypass Assign > Wait—Wait determines how long it takes after the Exp Pedal or Variax Knob is moved below the Position location before the block turns off. For example, you may not want the Wah to turn off instantly every time you hit the heel position during your big funk solo. Also, does your song really need a big funk solo?Block Bypass via MIDI—Individual processing blocks can now be enabled/bypassed via incoming MIDI CC messages. Press MENU and then Knob 1 (Bypass Assign). Turn Knob 4 (MIDI In) to choose the desired MIDI CC. Incoming CC values 0-63 will turn the block off; values 64-127 will turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected.Learn Bypass Assign—As with Controller Assign, you can also now quickly learn a source for bypassing the selected block instead of assigning it manually. On the Bypass Assign screen, press Knob 6 (Learn) and then engage the desired footswitch, expression pedal, Variax knob, or MIDI CC. Helix will show the switch above Knob 1 (Switch) or if it's a MIDI CC message, above Knob 4 (MIDI In).Clear All Bypass Assignments—You can now clear all bypass assignments at once. From the Bypass Assign screen, press ACTION and then Knob 1 (Clear All Assignments). Press Knob 6 (OK) to confirm.Snapshot footswitch LED color—You can now choose a color for each snapshot footswitch. Press the PRESETS knob and then Knob 6 (Rename Snapshot). Turn knob 5 (LED Color) to select the desired color. \"Auto Color\" is the default red. NOTE: There is currently no way to set snapshot footswitch color from the Helix application.Split > Y Balance parameters—The old Split > Y block sends both left and right signals to Paths A and B equally. 2.10 adds individual balance (pan) control of the signals sent to Path A and B. By default, they're set to \"Center\", which behaves exactly like the old Split > Y block.Support for MIDIpants",{"id":182,"title":183,"titles":184,"content":185,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#improvementschanges","Improvements/Changes",[166],"Added a Headroom parameter to Delay > Vintage DigitalSnapshots now recall the currently active expression controller (EXP 1 or EXP 2) for the built-in treadleSplit > Y can now be bypassed; when bypassed, the block sends both left and right signals to both paths equally (like the old Split Y block)Looper Mode switch LEDs now display a dim/lit state to better reflect their current statesNon-selected Pedal Edit Mode parameter switch LEDs now display a dim stateAdded forward slash / to list of characters for naming presets, setlists, snapshots, and Stomp mode custom labelsBypass Assign > Knob 1 (Footswitch) has been relabeled \"Switch\" to better reflect all valuesTap Tempo no longer affects a preset's dirty state (\"E\" icon)Minor updates to the Factory Preset bundleIf a user fails to read and follow the update instructions, Helix will cause their car radio to only play polka death metal every Thursday from 1-3pm PST",{"id":187,"title":81,"titles":188,"content":189,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#bug-fixes",[166],"Errant graphics could appear when selecting an IR block from the Controller Assign page * FIXEDWhen assigning a command to EXP 3 on the Command Center page, the turquoise indicator could occasional fail to appear * FIXEDWhen sending/receiving Looper MIDI CC messages through external devices, MIDI feedback could occur * FIXEDGeneral stability improvementsOther minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":191,"title":86,"titles":192,"content":193,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-10#known-issues",[166],"In very rare cases, corrupted presets containing a Volume/Pan > Volume Pedal block can cause volume to drop to 0%. In such cases, completely clear the Volume Pedal block and add again. If the same preset exhibits this behavior again, please contact Line 6 Customer Service and be ready to email us the raw preset so we can analyze itBypass Assign > Wait defaults to 300ms from the hardware and 100ms when selected within the Helix edit applicationCopying and pasting a block assigned to auto enable/bypass from the Helix editor may result in a \"Cannot paste block\" error message while the Helix hardware confirms the block was indeed pasted correctly. Workaround: Save the preset to re-sync the application.",{"id":195,"title":196,"titles":197,"content":198,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-11","Release Notes 2.11 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 12/15/16",{"id":200,"title":201,"titles":202,"content":203,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-11#release-notes-211-helix","Release Notes 2.11 - Helix",[],"Released 12/15/16 Helix v2.11.0 is a firmware update that includes fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. It is highly recommended that all Helix users perform this update! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 1.12, your current Helix application version should be 1.12.NOTE: You may want to back up individual Setlists so you can restore them to empty setlists without affecting the 2.11 factory presets.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the NEW Helix editor application (2.11), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.10).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.10), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.11). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.11 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW:TO RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, TURN OFF HELIX/HELIX RACK.HELIX FLOOR ONLY: WHILE HOLDING FOOTSWITCHES 9 AND 10 (MIDDLE TWO SWITCHES ON THE BOTTOM ROW), TURN ON HELIX. WAIT FOR THE MESSAGE \"WILL RESET GLOBALS ANDRESTORE STOCK PRESETS, SETLISTS AND IRS…\" TO APPEAR AND LET GO.HELIX RACK ONLY: WHILE HOLDING KNOBS 5 AND 6 BELOW THE SCREEN, TURN ON HELIX RACK. WAIT FOR THE MESSAGE \"WILL RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE STOCK PRESETS, SETLISTS AND IRS…\" TO APPEAR AND LET GO.Using the NEW Helix editor application (2.11), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":205,"title":81,"titles":206,"content":207,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-11#bug-fixes",[201],"– After importing a pre-2.10 preset that contains snapshots, EXP 2 could disappear from the expression pedal's scribble strip LCD – FIXED\n– After importing a pre-2.10 preset with IR 127 or 128 loaded, corruption could occur – FIXED\n– Bypass Assign > Wait defaults to 300ms from the hardware and 100ms when selected within the Helix edit application – FIXED\n– General stability improvements\n– Other minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":209,"title":86,"titles":210,"content":211,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-11#known-issues",[201],"– In very rare cases, corrupted presets containing a Volume/Pan > Volume Pedal block can cause volume to drop to 0%. In such cases, completely clear the Volume Pedal block and add again. If the same preset exhibits this behavior again, please contact Line 6 Customer Service and be ready to email us the raw preset so we can analyze it\n– Copying and pasting a block assigned to auto enable/bypass from the Helix editor may result in a \"Cannot paste block\" error message while the Helix hardware confirms the block was indeed pasted correctly. Workaround: Save the preset to re-sync the application.\n– EXP TOE cannot be bypass assigned using the LEARN option in Bypass Assign menu",{"id":213,"title":214,"titles":215,"content":216,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-12","Release Notes 2.12 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 1/9/17",{"id":218,"title":219,"titles":220,"content":221,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-12#release-notes-212-helix","Release Notes 2.12 - Helix",[],"Released 1/9/17 HELIX V2.12.0 IS A FIRMWARE UPDATE THAT INCLUDES FIXES, STABILITY IMPROVEMENTS, AND OPTIMIZATIONS. IT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED THAT ALL HELIX USERS PERFORM THIS UPDATE! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 2.01, your current Helix application version should be 2.01.\nNOTE: You may want to back up individual Setlists so you can restore them to empty setlists without affecting the 2.12 factory presets.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the latest Helix editor application (2.11), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.10).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.10), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.12). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.12 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW:To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix/Helix Rack.\nHELIX FLOOR ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.\nHELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the latest Helix editor application (2.11), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":223,"title":81,"titles":224,"content":225,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-12#bug-fixes",[219],"In rare cases, engaging one particular footswitch on one particular factory preset could result in full scale noise * FIXEDIn rare cases within certain presets, when Variax parameters are set per preset, the Variax Volume parameter could be inadvertently recalled at 0.0 - FIXEDGeneral stability improvementsOther minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":227,"title":86,"titles":228,"content":229,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-12#known-issues",[219],"In very rare cases, corrupted presets containing a Volume/Pan > Volume Pedal block can cause volume to drop to 0%. In such cases, completely clear the Volume Pedal block and add again. If the same preset exhibits this behavior again, please contact Line 6 Customer Service and be ready to email us the raw preset so we can analyze it",{"id":231,"title":232,"titles":233,"content":234,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-20","Release Notes 2.20 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 3/30/17",{"id":236,"title":237,"titles":238,"content":239,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#release-notes-220-helix","Release Notes 2.20 - Helix",[],"Released 3/30/17 Helix v2.20.0 is a firmware update that includes new amps, cabs, effects, features, fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. It is highly recommended that all Helix users perform this update! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 1.12, your current Helix application version should be 1.12.\nNOTE: You may want to back up individual Setlists so you can restore them to empty setlists without affecting the new 2.20 factory presets.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the LATEST Helix editor application (2.20), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.11).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.11), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.20). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.\nYOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.20 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW:To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix/Helix Rack.\nHELIX FLOOR ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.HELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the NEW Helix editor application (2.20), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":241,"title":242,"titles":243,"content":244,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#new-amps","New Amps",[237],"Line 6 Badonk, all new Line 6 original inspired by the original high gain Big Bottom modelWoody Blue, based on* the Acoustic® 360 bass ampDel Sol 300, based on* the Sunn® Coliseum 300 bass ampBusy One Ch1, based on* channel 1 of the Pearce BC-1 bass preampBusy One Ch2, based on* channel 2 of the Pearce BC-1 bass preampBusy One Jump, based on* channel 1 and 2 (jumped) of the Pearce BC-1 bass preamp",{"id":246,"title":247,"titles":248,"content":249,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#new-hybrid-cabs","New Hybrid Cabs",[237],"1×12 Cali IV, based on* the MESA/Boogie® Mk IV 12\" cab1×12 Cali EXT, based on* the MESA/Boogie® 12\" extension cab (EVM12L speaker)2×12 Match H30, based on* the Matchless® DC-30 cab (12\" G12H30 speaker)2×12 Match G25, based on* the Matchless® DC-30 cab (12\" Greenback 25 speaker)1×12 Del Sol, based on* the Sunn® Coliseum 300 bass cab (12\" speaker)1×18 Del Sol, based on* the Sunn® Coliseum 300 bass cab (18\" speaker)1×18 Woody Blue, based on* the Acoustic® 360 18\" bass cab",{"id":251,"title":252,"titles":253,"content":254,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#new-effects","New Effects",[237],"Distortion > Obsidian 7000 (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Darkglass Electronics® Microtubes B7K Ultra bass preamp/overdrive/EQDistortion > Clawthorn Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Wounded Paw Battering Ram bass overdriveDynamics > 3-Band Comp (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original multiband compressorDynamics > Autoswell (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalModulation > PlastiChorus (Mono, Stereo), based on* the modded Arion SCH-Z chorusDelay > Vintage Swell (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalDelay > Adriatic Swell (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalPitch/Synth > 3 Note Generator (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalPitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original NOTE: As 3 Note Generator and 4 OSC Generator make sound without any instrument connected, their blocks are turned off by default. Press BYPASS to turn them on.",{"id":256,"title":101,"titles":257,"content":258,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#new-features",[237],"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Receive MIDI Clock—Helix can now synchronize its time-based effects (such as delay and modulation) to incoming MIDI clock from external DAW software, drum machines, keyboard workstations, or other modelers. Select \"Off\" (Helix ignores MIDI clock), \"MIDI\" (Helix responds to clock received at its MIDI IN jack), \"USB\" (Helix responds to clock received via USB), or \"Auto\" (Helix uses its internal tempo generator until receiving clock from either MIDI or USB)Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Send MIDI Clock—Helix can now transmit MIDI clock to synchronize the tempo of external pedals, rack gear, and software. Select \"Off\" (Helix does not transmit clock), \"MIDI\" (Helix transmits clock from only the MIDI OUT jack), \"USB\" (Helix transmits clock only via USB), or \"MIDI+USB\" (Helix transmits clock from both MIDI and USB)Variax Workbench HD Support—Variax can now communicate directly with Variax Workbench HD software (Mac/PC) through Helix via USB. IMPORTANT! Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > MIDI over USB must be set to \"On.\"In addition, you MUST update Variax Workbench HD to version 2.13Windows users MUST also download the Helix USB driver, version 1.85IMPORTANT! Variax Workbench uses MIDI channel 16. When connecting to Variax Workbench via Helix's USB port, do not assign Helix or any of Helix's Command Center messages to MIDI channel 16 or Omni (which includes channel 16).Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > MIDI PC Send/Receive has been split into two separate parameters—MIDI PC Receive and MIDI PC Send—and moved to Page 2. In addition, you may choose whether Helix sends or receives MIDI PC (program change) messages to/from MIDI, USB, both, or neitherClear Bypass Assignment—Individual blocks' bypass assignments can now be cleared. From the Bypass Assign screen, select the block whose bypass assignment(s) you wish to clear. Press ACTION and then Knob 1 (Clear Assignments).Line 6 Allure Pack IRs—Line 6 has created a pack of five user impulse responses for use with Helix or any other modeler or software that supports them. Download the free Allure Pack here: www.line6.com/allure",{"id":260,"title":183,"titles":261,"content":262,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#improvementschanges",[237],"Optimized GUI engine speeds up navigation and model selectionReceive MIDI Clock and Send MIDI Clock have also been added to the Tempo panel shortcut. At any time, touch TAP to open the Tempo panel.When slaved to external MIDI clock, TAP's scribble strip text grays out and its switch LED ring flashes blueReverb > Plate, Room, Chamber, Hall, Echo, Tile, Cave, Ducking, and Octo have all been optimized to be less DSP-intensivePitch > Pitch Wham, Twin Harmony, Simple Pitch, Dual Pitch, and 3 OSC Synth have all been optimized to be less DSP-intensiveNon-selected Pedal Edit parameter switches now reflect dim block colorInactive Looper function switches now appear as dim whiteAdditions to and improvements made to the existing factory preset bundle",{"id":264,"title":81,"titles":265,"content":266,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#bug-fixes",[237],"In very rare cases, corrupted presets containing a Volume/Pan > Volume Pedal block can cause volume to drop to 0% – FIXEDCertain Roland keyboards constantly spit out active sensing MIDI messages (with no way to disable them), which could affect Helix's MIDI transmission – FIXEDThe Channel Volume taper for the Archetype amp model was incorrect – FIXEDMany other minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":268,"title":86,"titles":269,"content":270,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-20#known-issues",[237],"If a Variax guitar is connected to Helix, MIDI channel 16 should never be used, as channel 16 is how Variax Workbench communicates with the guitar. This is by design. On a related note, Variax Workbench should never be used while MIDI tracks are armed or playing back in your DAWIn rare cases, Helix may freeze when very rapidly changing presets while receiving MIDI clockHelix's blue TAP LED flashes but tempo is not actually synced unless an audio device is selected in Ableton LiveSubtle stepping may be heard when adjusting the main VOLUME knob while audio is presentIf a user fails to read and follow the update instructions, Helix will engage Snapshot 2 in preset 8 Templates > 32D every day at 4:30 AM",{"id":272,"title":273,"titles":274,"content":275,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-21","Release Notes 2.21 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 4/27/17",{"id":277,"title":278,"titles":279,"content":280,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-21#release-notes-221-helix","Release Notes 2.21 - Helix",[],"Released 4/27/17 Helix v2.21.0 is a firmware update that includes new fixes, stability improvements, and optimizations. It is highly recommended that all Helix users perform this update! Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 2.00, your current Helix application version should be 2.00.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the LATEST Helix editor application (2.20), available here: https://line6.com/software/ This also installs the newest version of Line 6 Updater (1.11).If you're using Helix Rack with Helix Control, turn off Helix Control.Using the latest Line 6 Updater (1.11), update Helix/Helix Rack to the newest firmware (2.21). At the end of the update process, Helix/Helix Rack will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.If you're using Helix Control with Helix Rack, connect and power on Helix Control. The inspector will ask if you want to update its firmware. Press Knob 6 (OK). Wait for the update to finish.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX 2.21 WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW:To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix/Helix Rack/Helix LT.HELIX FLOOR AND LT ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.HELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the NEW Helix editor application (2.20), restore the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":282,"title":183,"titles":283,"content":284,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-21#improvementschanges",[278],"Additional optimizations to the GUI engine",{"id":286,"title":81,"titles":287,"content":288,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-21#bug-fixes",[278],"Pitch/Synth > 3 Note Generator and 4 OSC Generator's behind-the-scenes Trails parameter was disabled, making it appear as if the Decay parameter was broken * FIXEDDistortion > Stereo > Clawthorn drive appeared slightly right of center * FIXEDEngaging/bypassing a block from a Stomp switch was slower than normal * FIXEDTurning the large Volume knob resulted in audible stepping while audio was active * FIXEDIn rare cases, changing cab mic models while Helix is synced to incoming MIDI clock could result in brief UI lockup * FIXEDIn rare cases, Helix could freeze when navigating the model list while receiving many tempo changes via MIDI clock * FIXEDIn rare cases, pressing a Stomp mode footswitch could transmit a single MIDI Clock pulse * FIXEDIn rare cases, Helix could freeze when accessing Global Settings while receiving MIDI Clock via USB * FIXEDIn rare cases, multiple bypass assigned footswitches with custom names can have bypass states swapped upon preset import * FIXEDIn rare cases, Helix can become unresponsive after copying specific block types onto another * FIXEDHelix Rack/Control only: If an expression pedal is connected to Helix Control with its position set to heel down, its Global Settings > Pedals > Polarity is set to \"Inverted\", and its Global Settings > Pedal > Pedal Position is set to \"Global\", an audible blip can occur on preset load * FIXEDOther bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":290,"title":86,"titles":291,"content":292,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-21#known-issues",[278],"If a Variax guitar is connected to Helix, MIDI channel 16 should never be used, as channel 16 is how Variax Workbench communicates with the guitar. This is by design. On a related note, Variax Workbench should never be used while MIDI tracks are armed or playing back in your DAWIf Helix is set to a preset with a Pitch/Synth > Generator block on before beginning the firmware update process, a short burst of audio may be heard after presets are rebuiltIf a user fails to read and follow the update instructions, Helix will add nine additional steps to the update process, one of which involves a shot of cheap mezcal",{"id":294,"title":295,"titles":296,"content":297,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-30","Release Notes 2.30 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 11/21/17",{"id":299,"title":300,"titles":301,"content":302,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#release-notes-230-helix","Release Notes 2.30 - Helix",[],"Released 11/21/17 STEP ONE: Check to see what firmware your Helix Floor/Rack/LT is running: Press MENU, press Knob 6 (Global Settings), and look in the upper right corner of the main display.Firmware Version 2.20.0 OR HIGHER?—follow the GREEN steps belowFirmware Version 2.12.2 OR LOWER?—follow the BLUE steps belowUpdating a Helix Floor/Rack/LT Running 2.20.0 or HIGHER:Download the all new HX Edit application here (this will also install the latest version of Line 6 Updater):Mac OS X: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7877Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7878Connect Helix to your computer and launch HX Edit. From the File pull-down menu, select \"Create Backup…\" Follow the prompts to create a full-state backup of your Helix (Global Settings, IRs, setlists, and presets).Close HX Edit, open Line 6 Updater, and follow the prompts to update your Helix's firmware. Helix will begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.Close Line 6 Updater, reopen HX Edit, and from the File pull-down menu, select \"Restore From Backup…\" Follow the prompts to restore Helix to its previous state.Updating Helix Floor/Rack/LT Running 2.12.2 or LOWER:Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 2.12, your current Helix application version should be 2.12.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the LATEST HX Edit application, available here (this will also install the latest version of Line 6 Updater):Mac OS X: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7877Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7878Open Line 6 Updater and update Helix to the newest firmware. At the end of the update process, Helix will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW!To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix.HELIX FLOOR OR LT ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.HELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the NEW HX Edit application, reload the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":304,"title":242,"titles":305,"content":306,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#new-amps",[300],"Voltage Queen, based on* the Victoria® Electro KingDerailed Ingrid, based on* the Trainwreck Circuits® ExpressBrit Trem Nrm, based on* the normal channel of the Marshall® Plexi Tremolo 50Brit Trem Brt, based on* the bright channel of the Marshall® Plexi Tremolo 50Brit Trem Jump, based on* the normal and bright channel (jumped) of the Marshall® Plexi Tremolo 50Cartographer, based on* the Ben Adrian CartographerAgua 51, based on* the Aguilar® DB751 bass amp",{"id":308,"title":252,"titles":309,"content":310,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#new-effects",[300],"Distortion > Kinky Boost (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Xotic® EP BoosterDistortion > Thrifter Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalDynamics > Kinky Comp (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Xotic® SP CompressorModulation > Bleat Chop Trem (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Lightfoot Labs© GoatkeeperModulation > Double Take (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original doublerDelay > Cosmos Echo (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Roland® RE-201 Space EchoVolume/Pan > Stereo Width (Stereo), Line 6 Original utility to collapse stereo paths",{"id":312,"title":101,"titles":313,"content":314,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#new-features",[300],"Helix FW: Support for HX Edit—Helix, Helix Rack/Control, and Helix LT now work with the new HX Edit application (Mac/PC)HX Edit: Full State Backup and Restore—The all new HX Edit application can perform a full state backup and restore of your Helix, Helix Rack/Control, and Helix LT presets, IRs, and global settings. IMPORTANT! You MUST back up a Helix running firmware 2.20 or higher and MUST restore to a Helix running 2.30 or higher! From the File pulldown menu, select \"Create Backup…\" Click Create Backup to confirm. To restore from a backup, from the File pulldown menu, select \"Restore From Backup…\" From the Backup File pulldown, select the desired backup and click Restore Backup. You may choose to restore any combination of 8 setlists, IRs (including the index order), and/or Global SettingsHelix Native+HX Edit: Show/Hide PRESETS/IMPULSES List—Click the icon to the left of the preset name to show or hide the PRESETS/IMPULSES listHelix Native: Plug-in Window Resizing—Click and drag the lower right-hand corner of Helix Native to resize the window and view more or fewer parameters and model list itemsHelix FW: Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Duplicate PC Send—Before 2.30, Helix would purposely omit MIDI PC messages with an identical value as the previous PC message. You may now choose to send duplicate PC messagesHelix FW: LFO reset—Stepping on TAP once now resets any LFO-based effects, such as tremolos and rotary speakersHelix FW: Support for Variax Shuriken banks—When a Variax Shuriken is connected, Helix's Input > Multi and Input > Variax blocks will reflect the proper factory bank names. These bank names are retained until a James Tyler Variax or Variax Standard is connected",{"id":316,"title":183,"titles":317,"content":318,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#improvementschanges",[300],"The Distortion > Obsidian 7000 model has been tweaked to sound and feel even more like the original",{"id":320,"title":81,"titles":321,"content":322,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#bug-fixes",[300],"Helix Native: In the rare case that all paths are full, it is possible to drag more blocks into them, which may result in the error \"Failed to move item. (Unknown. )\" -FIXEDHelix Native: On rare occasions, a warning dialog may appear during AU Validation scan of other AudioUnit plug-ins -FIXEDHelix Native: After updating from OS X 10.12 Sierra to OS X 10.13 High Sierra, Helix Native may not load properly in GarageBand -FIXEDHelix Native: After importing an IR file in a certain instance of Helix Native, the same file may not automatically appear in subsequent instances -FIXEDHelix FW: Turning the Cali IV Rhythm 1 model's Master knob down can occasionally cause an increase in output volume -FIXEDHelix FW: When UK 846 and Teardrop 310 wah models' Level and Mix parameters are set to 0, ~3dB of gain can be added -FIXEDHelix FW: Pitch blocks' Interval parameters may not be properly restored after exporting and then importing a preset -FIXEDHelix FW: MIDI clock could become unstable for a brief time after adjusting certain parameters on the Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo page - FIXEDHelix FW: In the Command Center, if an Ext Amp message is assigned to a footswitch, Ext Amp messages assigned to Instant commands may not restore properly -FIXEDMany other minor bug fixes and optimizationsGeneral stability improvements",{"id":324,"title":86,"titles":325,"content":326,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-30#known-issues",[300],"HX FW: In rare cases, MIDI note commands set to momentary can switch to \"latching\"HX FW: If its Mid and Bass parameters are set to 0.0, the Cali IV Lead Amp/Amp+Cab model sometimes exhibits a decrease in gainHX FW: If snapshot names have been cleared, preset names can sometimes appear blank when switching from Snapshot footswitch mode to Preset footswitch modeHX Edit: In rare cases, moving a block from Path A to Path B can result in the Split block being created in the wrong positionHX Edit: In rare cases, importing an IR file into the current \"Empty\" slot of an Impulse Response block can cause audio output to mute Workaround: Drag impulse response files directly into the IMPULSES listHelix Native: Recalling an effect or instrument rack in Ableton Live with Helix Native instantiated can mute the track. Workaround: Uninstantiate and re-instantiate the plug-inHelix Native: In rare cases, clearing Helix Native's preset library while the DAW is under high CPU loads can cause the plug-in to become unresponsive. Workaround: Close the Helix Native plug-in window and reopenHelix Native: EXP pedal assignments may not automatically be assignedHelix Native: The copy/paste clipboard may be cleared after closing and reopening Helix Native",{"id":328,"title":329,"titles":330,"content":331,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-50","Release Notes 2.50 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 2/7/18",{"id":333,"title":334,"titles":335,"content":331,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#release-notes-250-helix","Release Notes 2.50 - Helix",[],{"id":337,"title":138,"titles":338,"content":339,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#new-amp-models",[334],"Cali Texas Ch2, based on* the drive channel of the MESA/Boogie® Lonestar Ch1 coming later this springPlacater Dirty, based on* the BE/HBE channel of the Friedman BE-100 Clean channel coming later this spring",{"id":341,"title":342,"titles":343,"content":344,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#new-hx-effects-models","New HX Effects Models",[334],"Delay > Multi Pass (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original bandpass-filtered multitap delayReverb > Glitz (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Ganymede (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Searchlights (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Plateaux (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Double Tank (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original",{"id":346,"title":347,"titles":348,"content":349,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#new-legacy-effects-models","New Legacy Effects Models",[334],"Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT now include a library of effects from M13, M9, M5, DL4, DM4, FM4, and MM4. These appear in a new \"Legacy\" subcategory in the model list. Distortion > Tube DriveDistortion > ScreamerDistortion > OverdriveDistortion > Classic DistDistortion > Heavy DistDistortion > ColordriveDistortion > Buzz SawDistortion > Facial FuzzDistortion > Jumbo FuzzDistortion > Fuzz PiDistortion > Jet FuzzDistortion > Line 6 DriveDistortion > Line 6 DistortionDistortion > Sub Oct FuzzDistortion > Octave FuzzDynamics > Tube CompDynamics > Red CompDynamics > Blue CompDynamics > Blue Comp TrebDynamics > Vetta CompDynamics > Vetta JuiceDynamics > Boost CompModulation > Pattern TremoloModulation > PannerModulation > Bias TremoloModulation > Opto TremoloModulation > Script PhaseModulation > Panned PhaserModulation > BarberpoleModulation > Dual PhaserModulation > U-VibeModulation > PhaserModulation > Pitch VibratoModulation > DimensionModulation > Analog ChorusModulation > Tri ChorusModulation > Analog FlangerModulation > Jet FlangerModulation > AC FlangerModulation > 80A FlangerModulation > Frequency ShiftModulation > Ring ModulatorModulation > Rotary DrumModulation > Rotary Drm/HornDelay > Ping PongDelay > DynamicDelay > StereoDelay > DigitalDelay > Dig w/ ModDelay > ReverseDelay > Lo ResDelay > Tube EchoDelay > Tape EchoDelay > Sweep EchoDelay > Echo PlatterDelay > Analog EchoDelay > Analog w/ ModDelay > Auto-Volume EchoDelay > Multi-HeadPitch/Synth > Bass OctaverPitch/Synth > Smart HarmonyPitch/Synth > Octi SynthPitch/Synth > Synth O MaticPitch/Synth > Attack SynthPitch/Synth > Synth StringPitch/Synth > GrowlerFilter > Voice BoxFilter > V TronFilter > Q FilterFilter > SeekerFilter > Obi WahFilter > Tron UpFilter > Tron DownFilter > ThrobberFilter > Slow FilterFilter > Spin CycleFilter > Comet Trails",{"id":351,"title":183,"titles":352,"content":353,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#improvementschanges",[334],"12 of Helix's 17 reverbs originally appeared in M-Class processors and Verbzilla. As such, they've been moved into the new \"Legacy\" subcategory within the Reverb categoryHelix's tempo no longer responds to pressing TAP at tempi lower than 40.0 BPM (Beats Per Minute). This is to ensure that multiple fast tap entries are recognized properly, as previously, they could be seen as one really slow tap entry. You may still manually select a tempo all the way down to 20.0 BPM and your presets can still be saved with tempi down to 20.0 BPM—just touch TAP and turn Knob 6 (BPM)",{"id":355,"title":81,"titles":356,"content":357,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#bug-fixes",[334],"In some cases, when Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Duplicate PC Send was set to \"Off,\" duplicate PC messages could still be sent—FIXEDIn rare cases, MIDI note commands set to momentary could switch to \"latching\"—FIXEDIf its Mid and Bass parameters are set to 0.0, the Cali IV Lead Amp/Amp+Cab model could sometimes exhibit a decrease in gain—FIXEDIf snapshot names have been cleared, preset names could sometimes appear blank when switching from Snapshot footswitch mode to Preset footswitch mode—FIXEDHelix LT: After restoring Global Settings from HX Edit, the EXP 1/2 LEDs could become responsive—FIXEDQuickly switching between snapshots could cause Command Center > CC Toggle messages to send incorrect MIDI CC data—FIXEDOther bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":359,"title":86,"titles":360,"content":361,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-50#known-issues",[334],"Shuriken bank names only appear after connecting a Shuriken Variax guitar to Helix and opening Variax Workbench HD softwareWhen using two 1024 IR's in a preset, moving the upper IR block before or after a pre/post split block can change the sonic character of the IR blockIn rare cases, pitch artifacts may be heard on selected delay blocks when the Time parameter is set to Note Sync values higher than 1/2 Triplet",{"id":363,"title":364,"titles":365,"content":366,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-53","Release Notes 2.53 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 3/1/18",{"id":368,"title":369,"titles":370,"content":366,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-53#release-notes-253-helix","Release Notes 2.53 - Helix",[],{"id":372,"title":81,"titles":373,"content":374,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-53#bug-fixes",[369],"External Amp commands could not be transmitted when changing snapshots – FIXEDIn rare cases, Helix Rack could freeze when updating Helix Control – FIXEDIn some cases, an External Amp command (Tip only) could change the internal expression pedal from EXP 1 to EXP 2 (or vice versa) on Helix LT – FIXEDIn some cases, attempting to swap footswitch assignments when one switch was unassigned could cause Helix to freeze – FIXEDOther bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":376,"title":86,"titles":377,"content":378,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-53#known-issues",[369],"In rare cases, a crash can occur when creating an Input or Output in HX Edit (moving split/join to B path) while having a None block selectedIn rare cases, PC messages are sent after Instant Commands on preset load, resulting in perceived delayed response by the device receiving MIDIShuriken Variax bank names will not appear in firmware until Helix is connected to a Mac/PC and Workbench HD is launchedIn rare cases, pitch artifacts may be heard on selected delay blocks when the Time parameter is set to Note Sync values higher than 1/2 Triplet",{"id":380,"title":381,"titles":382,"content":383,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-54","Release Notes 2.54 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 3/22/18",{"id":385,"title":386,"titles":387,"content":383,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-54#release-notes-254-helix","Release Notes 2.54 - Helix",[],{"id":389,"title":81,"titles":390,"content":391,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-54#bug-fixes",[386],"Pop noise can occur when exiting Tuner in four cable method setup with FX loop block engaged and audio playing upon entering and exiting Tuner -FIXEDOnce every 74 minutes or so, the AES/EBU or S/PDIF digital signal could drop out for several seconds -FIXEDOther bug fixes and improvements",{"id":393,"title":86,"titles":394,"content":395,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-54#known-issues",[386],"No CC Toggle MIDI data is sent when changing between different Snapshots that feature CC Toggle command assignments in Lit stateIn rare cases, a crash can occur when creating an Input or Output in HX Edit (moving split/join to B path) while having a None block selectedIn rare cases, PC messages are sent after Instant Commands on preset load, resulting in perceived delayed response by the device receiving MIDIShuriken Variax bank names will not appear in firmware until Helix is connected to a Mac/PC and Workbench HD is launchedIn rare cases, pitch artifacts may be heard on selected delay blocks when the Time parameter is set to Note Sync values higher than 1/2 Triplet",{"id":397,"title":398,"titles":399,"content":400,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-60","Release Notes 2.60 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 7/2/18",{"id":402,"title":403,"titles":404,"content":400,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#release-notes-260-helix","Release Notes 2.60 - Helix",[],{"id":406,"title":407,"titles":408,"content":409,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#new-amp-models-2helix-helix-rackcontrol-helix-lt-only","New Amp Models (2—Helix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only)",[403],"Cali Texas Ch1, based on* the clean channel of the MESA/Boogie® LonestarPlacater Clean, based on* the clean channel of the Friedman BE-100",{"id":411,"title":412,"titles":413,"content":414,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#new-effects-models-4","New Effects Models (4)",[403],"Distortion > Deranged Master (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Dallas Rangemaster Treble Booster—WARNING! Like the real thing, this model can take your head off! Works best before a distorted ampDistortion > Deez One Vintage (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS© DS-1 distortion pedal (classic Made-in-Japan version)Distortion > Deez One Mod (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS© DS-1 distortion pedal (Keeley mod version)Looper > 1 Switch Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 original (doesn't leave Stomp mode) All product names are trademarks of their respective owners, which are in no way associated or affiliated with Line 6. Using the 1 Switch Looper: Add a Looper > 1 Switch Looper block to your preset and assign it to a stomp footswitch. (Adding a 1 Switch Looper to HX Effects from Stomp view automatically assigns it to the selected footswitch.)Press the 1 Switch Looper switch. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again. The LED lights green, indicating the loop is playing back.Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again. The LED lights amber, indicating the loop is in overdub mode. Subsequent presses of the switch toggle between play and overdub mode.While the 1 Switch Looper is in play or overdub mode, press and hold the switch for 1 second. The most recent recording is undone. Holding the switch again will redo the recording. On Helix, Helix Rack/Control, and HX Effects, \"UNDO\" or \"REDO\" briefly appears on the scribble strip. On Helix LT, \"UNDO\" or \"REDO\" briefly appears in Performance view.Quickly double-press the 1 Switch Looper switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory.While Looper playback/recording is stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.",{"id":416,"title":183,"titles":417,"content":418,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#improvementschanges",[403],"The most recent new HX Reverb models have been tweaked to sound notably wetter (see Known Issues below)When changing the Time parameter, Legacy delay models now exhibit a more organic behavior (more like DL4 and Echo Pro)The Looper block is now called \"6 Switch Looper\" (see Known Issues below)Synchronizing to incoming MIDI clock has been improvedThe Mix parameter defaults of both mono and stereo HX Reverbs are now consistentWhen loading a preset, its default MIDI program change message would be transmitted after the preset is loaded and any Instant commands were sent. This PC message is now sent immediately when the preset is selectedHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: Shuriken Variax bank names now appear in the Input > Multi and Input > Variax block without requiring connection to Variax WorkbenchHX Effects only: On the Signal Flow page, if the Split block is selected and bypassed, it now appears with a different icon than when it's enabledMany under-the-hood improvements",{"id":420,"title":81,"titles":421,"content":422,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#bug-fixes",[403],"The Filter > Legacy > Obi Wah model is mono (should be stereo) — FIXEDModulation > Legacy > Analog Chorus > Mode parameter was mislabeled \"CH Vib\" — FIXEDPitch/Synth > Legacy > Smart Harmony > Key parameter was mislabeled \"V1 Key\" — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: After selecting a different preset, the Tempo > Preset BPM value display would not be updated — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: While the Looper (now 6 Switch Looper) is in playback mode, the LED on FS9 (Play/Stop) will go dim when exiting and then returning to Looper view — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: When the Tuner > Output routing is set to USB 5/6, the audio can instead be routed to USB 3/4 — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: If an Input block on Path 2A or 2B is set to \"None,\" its Input gate remains active if previously engaged — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: If Global Settings > EXP Pedals > EXP 1 Polarity is set to \"Inverted,\" EXP 2 Polarity could be affected — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: If a single Stomp mode footswitch is assigned to a block bypass and more than one parameter assignment, repeatedly touching the switch may not cycle through all assignments — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: Saving a preset with a Command Center Note On command can reset the note value to C-1 when quickly changing snapshots — FIXEDHelix, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only: In some cases, Command Center CC Toggle messages are not sent when selecting snapshots — FIXEDHelix Rack/Control only: In rare cases, if the current preset in Helix Rack is particularly DSP-intensive and an expression pedal is connected to Helix Control, recalling a different preset or snapshot can cause Helix Control to freeze — FIXEDHelix Rack/Control only: In rare cases, while quickly navigating presets, the preset name displayed on Helix Rack can sometimes not match that on Helix Control — FIXEDHX Effects only: The Delay > Stereo > Multi Pass block in some factory presets appeared only with the left channel active — FIXEDHX Effects only: Looper (now 6 Switch Looper) playback/recording can sometimes stop when changing presets, even if the target preset has the same type of looper (mono or stereo) — FIXEDHX Effects only: In some cases, the Looper (now 6 Switch Looper) can continue to play when selecting an empty preset with no Looper block — FIXEDHX Effects only: Selecting the Distortion > Thrifter Fuzz model can result in a brief thump accompanied by a high whine — FIXEDHX Effects only: If a controller is assigned to a Modulation > Pattern Trem block parameter and the min value is greater than the max value, moving the controller can cause HX Effects to freeze — FIXEDHX Effects only: Under rare, specific circumstances, parameters assigned to Note values could sometimes reset when recalling snapshots — FIXEDHX Effects only: Loading certain presets can cause some model blocks to appear as None blocks — FIXEDHX Effects only: Copying and pasting a block with many controller assignments can delete all controller assignments (and cause subsequent errors) after saving and then recalling the preset — FIXEDHX Effects only: When Global Settings > Switches >  Stomp mode is set to \"4 Switches,\" the Looper (now 6 Switch Looper) could sometimes fail to display Record and Undo switches — FIXEDHX Effects only: After a factory reset, recording a loop and then saving the preset could result in the loop being cleared — FIXEDHX Effects only: The Split block's bypass state could sometimes not be recalled via snapshots — FIXEDHX Effects only: Receiving MIDI CC69 messages to recall snapshots can sometimes result in unpredictable block bypass states — FIXEDHX Effects only: Attempting to assign a block to a footswitch that already has eight assignments can result in clearing one or more original assignments — FIXEDHX Effects only: In rare cases, assigning the same EXP pedal to the same parameter twice in a row via Learn Controller can cause a scribble strip's contents to disappear — FIXEDHX Effects only: Adjusting a parameter with an expression pedal while holding TAP/TUNER can result in the block's parameters appearing in Tuner view — FIXEDHX Effects only: When receiving an MIDI CC52, CC53, or CC54 message, HX Effects does not respond as expected — FIXEDHX Effects only: When a Send 1/2 Output block is selected, parameters in the Controller Assign are incorrect — FIXEDHX Effects only: After assigning a controller to the Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch > Interval parameter, it appears as \"-2147483\" in parameter spill view — FIXEDHX Effects only: Certain parameters with both positive and negative values can sometimes cause the Controller Assign menu's Min Value and Max Value parameter sliders to not reflect the correct value — FIXEDHX Effects only: After assigning a footswitch to parameter control via Controller Assign's FS3 (Learn), relearning a MIDI CC message results in HX Effects automatically applying CC4, regardless of the CC# received — FIXEDHX Effects only: Looper (now 6 Switch Looper) Undo function would not undo the most recent overdub — FIXEDHX Effects only: While performing a Factory Reset, turning knobs 1-3 could cause Global Settings to appear above Footswitch 2 — FIXEDHX Effects only: If a Wah block is changed to a Looper block, the Looper's Playback parameter is automatically assigned to EXP 2 — FIXEDHX Effects only: After clearing three or more Command Center assignments, all saved Command Center snapshot data can be inadvertently cleared — FIXEDHX Effects only: In rare cases, duplicate Command Center Instant commands can be transmitted when selecting snapshots — FIXEDHX Effects only: When Global Settings > Pedals > EXP 1 Position or EXP 2 Position is set to \"Global\", expression position may not always affect parameters globally — FIXEDHX Effects only: After saving a preset, HX Effects would sometimes not display the most recently accessed block on a footswitch assigned to multiple blocks — FIXEDHX Effects only: When the Tuner output is set to Send 1/2, signal flow audio sent to Send 1/2 can be muted — FIXEDHX Effects only: In rare, specific circumstances, Command Center MIDI Bank/Prog and CC values can be inadvertently altered when changing snapshots — FIXEDHX Effects only: Assigning 11 (!) parameters to a single controller, copying/pasting the block, and then moving the controller can cause HX Effects to freeze — FIXEDHX Effects only: If the Mixer block is moved to Path B, moving the block would cause its parameters above Footswitch 3 to disappear — FIXEDHX Effects only: While in the Save Preset menu, touching the TAP/TUNER switch to open the Tempo Panel will reset any recent custom name or save destination — FIXEDHX Effects only: In some cases, manually setting a Wah, Volume, or Pitch Wham's switch assignment can result in odd parameter slider behavior — FIXEDHX Effects only: In the Command Center, any Bank/Prog message's CC00, CC32, and Prog parameters could not contain have a value of 0 — FIXEDHX Effects only: If a block has a dual-state parameter assigned to a different footswitch, copying and pasting the block to another switch can fail to display white controller nodes and sometimes may freeze the UI — FIXEDHX Effects only: Receiving a MIDI CC68 message does not open and close the Tuner view — FIXEDHX Effects only: In some cases, Send 1/2 & Main L/R Pan and Level parameter settings are reflected across preset changes — FIXEDHX Effects only: Snapshot names can sometimes fail to appear on the scribble strips — FIXEDHX Effects only: EXP 1 and 2 would behave as if it was set to \"Per Preset\", even when set to \"Global\" — FIXEDMany other minor bug fixes and optimizations",{"id":424,"title":86,"titles":425,"content":426,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-60#known-issues",[403],"As the new HX Reverb models have been tweaked to sound notably \"wetter\", any existing user presets that use these models will sound different. Although Helix and HX hardware has the ability to compensate for changes made to models when rebuilding presets (and one of our goals is to rarely if ever cause audible changes to existing user presets), the improvements made to the reverb blocks unfortunately cannot be compensated forExisting user presets containing Helix's classic Looper block will continue to read \"Looper\" instead of \"6 Switch-Looper\" until the model is changed and the preset is re-saved. This is normal and does not affect operationIn rare cases, pitch artifacts may be heard on selected delay blocks when the Time parameter is set to Note Sync values higher than 1/2 Triplet",{"id":428,"title":429,"titles":430,"content":431,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-70","Release Notes 2.70 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 10/17/18",{"id":433,"title":434,"titles":435,"content":436,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#release-notes-270-helix","Release Notes 2.70 - Helix",[],"Released 10/17/18 2.70 (Oct 2018) \"The Marketplace Update\"",{"id":438,"title":439,"titles":440,"content":441,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#new-features-firmware-270","New Features (Firmware 2.70)",[434],"Marketplace support—Marketplace is a new online destination that lets users purchase presets and impulse responses created by select third-party content gurus. From the lower left-hand corner of HX Edit, click \"My Account\" and then choose \"Get More Presets...\" or \"Get More IRs...\"Three New Tuner Types—From the Tuner page, turn the Type knob to choose between \"Fine\" (color-changing needle tuner with fine tuning bar), \"Coarse\" (color-changing needle tuner with no fine tuning bar), and \"Strobe\". SEE IMPORTANT KNOWN ISSUE BELOW*",{"id":443,"title":444,"titles":445,"content":446,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#new-features-helix-native-170","New Features (Helix Native 1.70)",[434],"Marketplace support—Marketplace is a new online destination that lets users purchase presets and impulse responses created by select third-party content gurus. From the lower left-hand corner Helix Native, click \"My Account\" and then choose \"Get More Presets...\" or \"Get More IRs...\"",{"id":448,"title":449,"titles":450,"content":451,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#new-features-hx-edit-270","New Features (HX Edit 2.70)",[434],"Support for HX StompMarketplace support—Marketplace is a new online destination that lets users purchase presets and impulse responses created by select third-party content gurus. From the lower left-hand corner of HX Edit, click \"My Account\" and then choose \"Get More Presets...\" or \"Get More IRs...\"Multi-device support—HX Edit now opens a new window when multiple Helix or HX boxes are connected. For example, if you have Helix Floor and your bass player has HX Stomp, you can now connect both and quickly and easily copy and paste individual blocks back and forth. Windows can also be manually opened and closed from the Devices pull-down menu",{"id":453,"title":454,"titles":455,"content":456,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#improvements","Improvements",[434],"The tuner now accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string bassesHX Stomp only—Shortcut: If HX Stomp is in Preset or Snapshot mode, or FS3 in Stomp and Scroll mode has been assigned to something other than TAP/TUNER, you can now press ACTION and PAGE > together to open the Tuner screenHX Stomp only—Shortcut: Press ACTION and \u003C PAGE together to quickly toggle the Global Settings > Preferences > Snapshot Edits value",{"id":458,"title":81,"titles":459,"content":460,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#bug-fixes",[434],"Helix Floor, Rack, LT only—A couple of amp models (including Cali Texas Ch 2) have their polarity reversed. When combined with another amp in parallel, this could cause phase cancellation — FIXEDHelix Floor, Rack, LT only—Amp > Cali Texas Ch 1 could gradually decrease in level when Mid and/or Bass parameters are set to 0.0 — FIXEDHelix Floor, Rack, LT only—Delay models with two Time parameters could sometimes reset note divisions when changing snapshots — FIXEDHX Effects only—Clearing or cutting a block on Path B from HX Edit could sometimes HX Effects to freeze when in stomp footswitch mode — FIXEDHX Effects only—Switching from a preset with a Split > Crossover block to a preset with a Split > A/B block could sometimes cause HX Effects to freeze — FIXEDHX Effects only—When EXP Position is set to Global, the expression pedal's position could not be recalled immediately after switching presets, which could cause undesired signals to pass through — FIXEDHX Effects only—In rare cases, exiting the Tuner could sometimes slightly adjust signal level and tone — FIXEDHX Effects only—When connecting both left and right inputs, exiting the tuner could sometimes cause the right side of certain effects blocks to not be heardHX Effects only—In very rare cases, engaging a certain combination of footswitches while connected to HX Edit and then power cycling HX Effects could clear certain blocks — FIXEDHX Effects only—From HX Edit, copying and pasting an Output block over itself could sometimes paste Mixer parameters — FIXEDHX Effects only—Switching Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo > Tempo Select values while transmitting MIDI clock could sometimes result in sending incorrect tempi — FIXEDHX Effects only—After resetting Global Settings, Tap Tempo could become unresponsive while receiving MIDI Clock — FIXEDHX Effects only—HX Edit would not reflect the Looper > 1 Switch Looper's bypass status — FIXEDHX Effects only—Mixer parameter values could inadvertently be copied into new empty presets — FIXEDHX Effects only—Quickly changing snapshots from HX Edit could sometimes cause hardware and software to disconnect — FIXED",{"id":462,"title":86,"titles":463,"content":464,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-70#known-issues",[434],"The three new tuner types only appear for those registered users who didn't complain incessantly about Helix's previous tuner on social media. For those who did complain (AND WE KNOW WHO YOU ARE), the new tuner will be unlocked once you perform ONE of the following:Post a photo of yourself on the Helix Facebook Group with the \">\u003C\" logo written on your forehead in black Sharpie (washable magic marker is acceptable). The admins have been given the authority to unlock units with flagged serial numbers; assuming business hours, please allow 1-2 hours for the new tuner page to be unlocked (NOTE: You may have to restart Helix/HX for the new tuner page to appear)Post a meme of Arnold Schwarzenegger from Kindergarten Cop yelling \"IT'S NOT A TUNAAHH!\" on either the Line 6 Helix—or—The Gear Page > Digital and Modeling Gear forum. Be sure to use the proper Impact font. Memes will not be judged for their artistic merit, although the spelling must be correct. Again, admins have been given the authority to unlock units with flagged serial numbersIf you'd prefer to participate silently, you may instead manually rename 47 presets \"Patience is Key\" (NOTE: Will not work from HX Edit; nor can you just copy one \"Patience is Key\" preset into 46 additional locations. You must manually rename each one. Once all 47 presets have been named correctly, the inspector or FS5 on HX Effects will read \"Tuners unlocked!\")HX Effects only—When Tuner Type is set to \"Strobe\" and your string is waaay out of tune, the graphic tuner nodes may appear a bit glitchyHX Effects only—In rare cases, moving an Impulse Response block from Path A to Path B can cause a second IR block to reset its impulse selectionImporting bundles containing Marketplace assets can take notably longerWhen manually engaging a rebuild presets command (holding FS1+2 or FS2+3), Helix can appear to freeze even though it doesn't. Wait 15-20 seconds for the rebuild to complete and all is wellLoading a Distortion > Kinky Boost block can sometimes result in an audible thumpWait, are you serious about the sharpie forehead, Schwarzenegger meme, and renaming 47 presets thing? No. This is why you always read the entire release notes",{"id":466,"title":467,"titles":468,"content":469,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-71","Release Notes 2.71 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 12/5/18",{"id":471,"title":472,"titles":473,"content":469,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-71#firmware-271","Firmware 2.71",[],{"id":475,"title":81,"titles":476,"content":477,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-71#bug-fixes",[472],"On some occasions, multiple Delay block parameters would not be controlled properly when set to a footswitch - FIXEDOther bug fixes and improvements",{"id":479,"title":480,"titles":481,"content":482,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-80","Release Notes 2.80 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 7/18/2019",{"id":484,"title":485,"titles":486,"content":487,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#_280-the-missed-connections-update","2.80 The Missed Connections Update",[],"Released 7/18/2019 2.80 is the first firmware to utilize the new Helix Core engine, which unifies all Helix and HX products into the same ecosystem. Because there are tons of changes under the hood, presets created in 2.80 will not be compatible with earlier firmware, which means if you want to return to 2.71 for whatever reason, and you didn't back up before updating to 2.80, your presets will NO LONGER WORK. Therefore, we STRONGLY RECOMMEND everyone back up everything BEFORE updating.Transitioning to Helix Core also forces us to reset your Global Settings, but restoring your backup (STEP 5 below) restores them. No way around that. Just back everything up, okay? Instructions for backing up begin... now.",{"id":489,"title":490,"titles":491,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#updating-to-280-read-me","Updating to 2.80 (READ ME!)",[485],"",{"id":494,"title":495,"titles":496,"content":492,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#helix-floor-helix-rack-helix-lt-hx-effects-hx-stomp","Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp",[485,490],3,{"id":499,"title":500,"titles":501,"content":502,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-1abacking-up-helixhx-hardware","STEP 1a—Backing Up Helix/HX Hardware",[485,490,495],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB and turn it on. Do not use any sort of USB hub.Open YOUR CURRENT VERSION of HX Edit (NOT the new HX Edit 2.80).From the top File menu, select \"Create Backup...\"Click \"Create Backup.\" If you want to load the 2.80 factory presets and hotkey templates, it's better to manually back up individual setlists, so you can later import them into empty setlists. To do this, from the preset library along the left side, select the setlist you want to back up and click \"Export.\" Choose a destination folder and click \"Save.\" Repeat for any other setlists you want to back up.",4,{"id":505,"title":506,"titles":507,"content":508,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-1bbacking-up-helix-native","STEP 1b—Backing Up Helix Native",[485,490,495],"If you don't currently own Helix Native, skip this step. Open any instance of YOUR CURRENT VERSION of Helix Native (NOT the new Helix Native 1.80) within your DAW and click the \"My Account\" button in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.From the General tab, click \"Export Bundle.\"Choose the destination folder and click \"Save.\" If you want to load the 2.80 factory presets, it's better to manually back up individual setlists, so you can later import them into empty setlists. To do this, from the preset library along the left side, select the setlist you want to back up and click the small yellow \"Export.\" Choose a destination folder and click \"Save.\" Repeat for any other setlists you want to back up.",{"id":510,"title":511,"titles":512,"content":513,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-2updating-hx-edit-to-280-you-must-do-this-before-updating-your-helixhx-firmware","STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.80 (YOU MUST DO THIS BEFORE UPDATING YOUR HELIX/HX FIRMWARE!)",[485,490,495],"Turn off or disconnect any connected Helix or HX hardware.Log onto line6.com. Once logged in, download the latest version of HX Edit, available here:\nHX Edit for Max OS XHX Edit for Windows 7, 8, or 10Read the Software License Agreement (hahaahaaa!) and click \"Accept and Download.\"Once the software has downloaded, double-click the installer and follow the prompts. Installing HX Edit 2.80 automatically installs the latest version of Line 6 Updater, which is required to update the firmware.",{"id":515,"title":516,"titles":517,"content":518,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-3aupdating-helix-floorracklt-to-280-do-not-do-this-until-after-youve-updated-hx-edit-to-280","STEP 3a—Updating Helix Floor/Rack/LT to 2.80 (DO NOT DO THIS UNTIL AFTER YOU'VE UPDATED HX EDIT TO 2.80!)",[485,490,495],"If you have HX Effects or HX Stomp, skip to STEP 3b below instead. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.Connect Helix to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.Launch Line 6 Updater. The latest version was automatically installed when you installed HX Edit 2.80 in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.80\" above.Enter your Line 6 Username and Password and click \"Sign In.\" A big green box appears with a picture of your Helix product. Click the big green box and then click \"Update\" next to Version: 2.80.Carefully read the instructions (HEY! DID YOU BACK UP FIRST?), click \"Continue,\" and then \"Accept.\" A warning dialog appears, telling you that Helix will be reset twice.Think \"Hmm, maybe I should've backed up first? Nah, I insist on subverting the dominant paradigm,\" and click \"OK.\" Helix begins updating. As wholly expected, because we warned you... because you always read the instructions... halfway through the update process, Line 6 Updater displays a second dialog and Helix's LCD reads \"Boot Failure. Entered Update Mode!\" THIS IS NORMAL. Breathe deep, everything is fine. You're almost there.Click \"OK\" again. When finished, Helix restarts automatically and begins rebuilding your presets. Let it finish. This may take some time. If Helix appears to not respond for many minutes, turn Helix off, connect to a different USB port on your computer, and attempt the update again If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads \"Helix Control must be updated to work properly. Update now?\" Press Knob 6 (OK) to update Helix Control. Updating the firmware does not automatically load any new presets. See \"STEP 4—Loading the 2.80 Factory Presets/Templates\" below.",{"id":520,"title":521,"titles":522,"content":523,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-3bupdating-hx-effectshx-stomp-to-280-do-not-do-this-until-after-youve-updated-hx-edit-to-280","STEP 3b—Updating HX Effects/HX Stomp to 2.80  (DO NOT DO THIS UNTIL AFTER YOU'VE UPDATED HX EDIT TO 2.80!)",[485,490,495],"If you have Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, or Helix LT, follow STEP 3a above instead. Shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.Connect your HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.Launch Line 6 Updater. The latest version was automatically installed when you installed HX Edit 2.80 in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.80\" above.Enter your Line 6 Username and Password and click \"Sign In.\" A big green box appears with a picture of your HX product. Click the big green box and then click \"Update\" next to Version: 2.80.Carefully read the instructions (HEY! DID YOU BACK UP FIRST?), click \"Continue,\" and then \"Accept.\" When finished, your HX device restarts automatically. Updating the firmware does not automatically load any new presets. See \"STEP 4—Loading the 2.80 Factory Presets/Templates\" below.",{"id":525,"title":526,"titles":527,"content":528,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-4optional-loading-the-280-factory-presetstemplates","STEP 4—OPTIONAL: Loading the 2.80 Factory Presets/Templates",[485,490,495],"The following procedure will COMPLETELY ERASE ALL OF YOUR CUSTOM PRESETS! If you want to keep them, make sure you back them up first! (See \"STEP 1a—Backing Up Helix/HX Hardware\" above.) Turn off your Helix/HX processor.Depending on your type of Helix/HX product, follow the procedure below:\nHelix Floor/LT—While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two left-most switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix/Helix LT. Wait for \"Will restore stock Presets and Setlists...\" and let goHelix Rack/Control—While holding knobs 3 and 4 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" and let goHX Effects—While holding footswitches 5 and 6 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" and let goHX Stomp—While holding footswitches 1 and 2, turn on HX Stomp. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" to appear on the screen and let goHelix Native—Click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window. From the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Restore Factory Setlists\"",{"id":530,"title":531,"titles":532,"content":533,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-5aoptional-restoring-helixhx-presets-irs-and-global-settings-from-a-backup","STEP 5a—OPTIONAL: Restoring Helix/HX Presets, IRs, and Global Settings from a Backup",[485,490,495],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.Open the NEW VERSION OF HX Edit 2.80 you installed in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.80\" above.From the top File menu, select \"Restore from Backup.\"Browse to the backup file and click \"Open.\" If you instead exported individual setlists and loaded the 2.80 factory presets/templates (and want to keep them), from the preset list along the left side, select an empty User setlist and then drag the saved setlist file (from the tip in STEP 1) into the preset list You may notice that after restoring from a backup (or loading in previously stored setlists or individual presets) that preset switching times are slower than normal. Restart Helix/HX, and you'll see the display read \"Rebuilding preset XXX\". Wait for it to rebuild your presets, and they will load faster.",{"id":535,"title":536,"titles":537,"content":538,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#step-5boptional-restoring-helix-native-from-a-backup","STEP 5b—OPTIONAL: Restoring Helix Native from a Backup",[485,490,495],"If you don't currently own Helix Native, skip this step. Open any instance of Helix Native within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.From the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Import Bundle.\"Browse to the location chosen in STEP 2 above and click \"Open.\" Whew! That wasn't too terrible, now was it? What's that... it was? Sorry. Now that Helix Core is finished, hopefully future update procedures will be less... involved.",{"id":540,"title":541,"titles":542,"content":543,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#new-amp-models-in-280","New Amp Models in 2.80",[485],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp Fullerton Nrm, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (normal channel)Fullerton Brt, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (bright channel)Fullerton Jump, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (jumped channels)Grammatico Nrm, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (normal channel)Grammatico Brt, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (bright channel)Grammatico Jump, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (jumped channels)Revv Gen Red, based on* the red (gain 2) channel of the Revv® Generator 120Ampeg SVT-4 PRO, based on* the Ampeg® SVT-4 PRO All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. That said, the teams at Revv and Grammatico are super cool (and patient!) and you should buy their awesome amps.",{"id":545,"title":546,"titles":547,"content":548,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#new-effects-models-in-280","New Effects Models in 2.80",[485],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp Distortion > Dhyana Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Hermida ZendriveDistortion > Heir Apparent (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Analogman Prince of Tone (basically half a King of Tone)Distortion > Tone Sovereign (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Analogman King of Tone V4 (basically two Prince of Tones in one)Distortion > ZeroAmp Bass DI (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Tech 21® SansAmp Bass Driver DI V1Distortion > Ampeg Scrambler (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Ampeg® Scrambler Bass OverdriveFilter > Asheville Pattrn (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Moog® Moogerfooger® MF-105M MIDI MuRF Filter (with both MuRF and Bass MuRF voicings)EQ > Low/High Shelf (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalEQ > Tilt (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Tilt is a subtle 6dB EQ that boosts high frequencies while simultaneously attenuating low frequencies (or vice versa). Great for quickly making tones a bit brighter or darker. The Center Freq parameter sets the frequency around which the boost and cut pivot All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.",{"id":550,"title":551,"titles":552,"content":553,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#new-features-in-280","New Features in 2.80",[485],"For additional information on Helix Native 1.80 or HX Edit 2.80, check out the latest Helix Native and HX Edit Pilot's Guides, which are automatically installed with the new 1.80/2.80 software.",{"id":555,"title":556,"titles":557,"content":558,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#hotkeys","Hotkeys",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects The first time you update Helix/HX to 2.80, your Mac or PC may ask what kind of keyboard you have connected. Just ignore this and close the window. The Command Center can now send QWERTY hotkeys (keyboard shortcuts with or without modifiers such as Shift, Control, Option/Alt, and Command) to your Mac, PC, or iOS device via USB. You can now control virtually any software ever made, including DAWs, looping software, DJ software, media players, lighting software, video software, browsers, or video games… with your feet... or when assigned to an Instant command, from any preset or snapshot recall. From the Command Center menu, select a footswitch or Instant command and turn Knob 1 (Command) to select \"Hotkey.\"Turn knobs 2-5 to select the desired keystroke. If the keystroke doesn't have modifiers, leave knobs 2, 3, and 4 set to \"None.\" It's much faster and easier to program keystrokes from HX Edit 2.80. Open the Command Center window, select a footswitch or Instant command, and from the Command pull-down menu, select \"Hotkey.\" Click the small keypad icon and simply enter the keystroke from your computer keyboard. Don't forget to customize the switch label! Just like a normal computer keyboard, hotkeys won't work unless the software or app you want to control is in focus.",{"id":560,"title":561,"titles":562,"content":563,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#hotkey-templates","Hotkey Templates",[485,551,556],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects To get you started with hotkeys, we've provided the following template presets in 2.80: CubasePro Tools (Mac)Pro Tools (PC)Logic/GarageBandAbleton Live (Mac)Ableton Live (PC)Reaper (Mac)Reaper (PC)StudioOneCakewalkMainStageQLabYouTubeiTunesSpotify (Mac)Spotify (PC)Apple KeynoteFirst-person shooter video games Most software has dozens if not hundreds of available hotkeys; feel free to swap ours out with the ones you use the most. With clever choices and a bit of finesse, you may be able to run a recording session (or elaborate live show with lighting and video cues) without ever touching a mouse or keyboard. Depending on your type of Helix/HX product, follow the procedure below: Helix Floor/Rack/LT—Press the PRESET knob, move the joystick left to select the Setlist column, select 8 TEMPLATES, and press the joystick. Hotkey templates begin at 06AHX Effects—Press MODE to to select Preset mode and turn the Big Knob. Hotkey templates begin at 16A Updating the firmware does not automatically load any new presets or the hotkey templates; you must manually load them. See \"STEP 5—Loading the 2.80 Factory Presets/Templates\" above.",{"id":565,"title":566,"titles":567,"content":568,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#variax-string-level","Variax String Level",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT Helix can now remotely adjust the level of individual guitar strings on a connected Shuriken Variax, JTV, or Variax Standard. Just like with any amp, cab, or effect parameter, Variax String Level can be quickly assigned to footswitches or Snapshots. \"Wait. You mean I can turn off the top three strings for the verse (Snapshot 1) and bring them back in for the chorus (Snapshot 2)? And if the high E is too shrill I can back its volume down to 85%?\" Yes. \"That's pretty nuts.\" Yes it is. Select the Input > Multi or Input > Variax block and press PAGE > three times.Turn Knobs 1-6 to adjust each string's level.If you want to set a particular string's level separately for each snapshot, press and turn the string's knob. The value will turn white and appear in brackets. Assigning a continuous controller (such as an expression pedal or slider on your MIDI controller) is not recommended, as it may result in minor pops and clicks; this is due to limitations in Variax DSP, not Helix.",{"id":570,"title":571,"titles":572,"content":573,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#powercab-plus-remote","Powercab Plus Remote",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT You must also update Powercab Plus! It must be running firmware 2.0 or higher. Helix can now remotely adjust parameters in one or two L6 LINK-connected Powercab 112 Plus or Powercab 212 Plus modeling speaker cabs. When one Powercab Plus 112 is connected via L6 LINK (110-ohm AES/EBU cable), it receives a mono signal from Helix; when one Powercab 212 Plus is connected via L6 LINK, it receives a stereo signal; when two Powercab 112 Plus or 212 Plus amps are daisy-chained via L6 LINK, the first cab in the chain receives the left signal and the second cab receives the right signal. Just like with any amp, cab, or effect parameter, Powercab Plus parameters can be quickly assigned to footswitches or Snapshots. Select the Output > Multi or Output > Digital block and press PAGE > once.Turn Knob 1 (Powercab Remote) to select \"Per Preset\" or \"Global.\" If you don't plan on changing Powercab parameters along with Helix presets, choose \"Global.\"Turn Knob 2 (Powercab Mode) to select the desired type of Powercab mode: Flat, Speaker, or IR. Note that certain parameters will gray out depending on the mode chosen.Turn Knob 4 (Speaker Select) to specify which Powercab you want to control—Powercab 1, Powercab 2, or both Powercabs simultaneously (\"1+2 Link\"). Normally, you should leave this set to \"1+2 Link,\" which edits both Powercabs simultaneously, to maintain phase coherence. Note that with Powercab 212 Plus, \"Powercab 1\" targets the left speaker in each (or both) amp(s) and \"Powercab 2\" targets the right speaker in each (or both) amp(s).Flat Voicing—When Powercab Mode is set to \"Flat,\" determines the type of speaker voicingSpeaker Type—When Powercab Mode is set to \"Speaker,\" determines the current speaker modelSpeaker DI Mic—When Powercab Mode is set to \"Speaker,\" determines the mic model used on Powercab's XLR output(s)Spider Mic Dist—When Powercab Mode is set to \"Speaker,\" determines the mic distance used on Powercab's XLR output(s)Speaker User IR—When Powercab Mode is set to \"User IR,\" selects the impulse response usedSpeaker Low Cut—Applies a Low Cut filter to Powercab Plus for minimizing low end rumbleSpeaker Hi Cut—Applies a High Cut filter to Powercab Plus for minimizing high end harshnessSpeaker Level—Applies a level trimSpeaker Color—Lets you choose the LED ring color on any connected Powercab(s) For more information on Powercab Plus, see the Powercab Pilot's Guide.",{"id":575,"title":576,"titles":577,"content":578,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#dt50dt25-remote","DT50/DT25 Remote",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Edit Your DT amp must be running firmware 2.0 or higher. Chances are it already is (2.0 was released back in 2012) but if things are wonky, this is the first thing to check. Helix can now remotely adjust the real tube topology settings and other parameters in one or two L6 LINK-connected DT25 or DT50 amplifiers. When one DT25 or DT50 is connected via L6 LINK (110-ohm AES/EBU cable), it receives a mono signal from Helix; when two DT250 or DT50 amplifiers are daisy-chained via L6 LINK, the first cab in the chain receives the left signal and the second cab receives the right signal. Just like with any amp, cab, or effect parameter, DT parameters can be quickly assigned to footswitches or Snapshots. From the Output > Multi or Output > Digital block, press PAGE > three times.Turn Knob 1 (DT 25/50 Remote) to select \"Per Preset\" or \"Global.\" If you don't plan on changing DT topology settings along with Helix presets, choose \"Global.\"Turn Knob 2 (DT Select) to specify which DT amp you want to control—DT 1, DT 2, or both DT amps simultaneously (\"1+2 Link\"). Normally, you should leave this set to \"1+2 Link,\" which edits both DT amps simultaneously, to maintain phase coherence.\nDT Channel—When set to Channel A, the DT switches to Channel A and its preamp is bypassed for when using a preamp model in Helix. When set to Channel B, the DT switches to Channel B and its preamp is activated Assign a stomp footswitch (or snapshots) to simultaneously bypass a Helix preamp block AND switch a connected DT amp to Channel B. This gives you a wider variety of tones in the same preset, without the DSP overhead required to run two simultaneous Preamp blocks DT Topology—Changes the DT amp's negative feedback loop topology. Choose \"I (Tight)\" for behavior reminiscent of the great American Blackface amps of the 60's, choose \"II (Loose)\" for dialing in echoes of classic British amps, choose \"III (ZNF)\" for a very open or dynamic feeling amp, or choose \"IV (Resonant)\" to add low frequency resonance that pairs well with high gain tonesDT Power Amp—Sets the DT amp's operating class, wattage, and bias type. Choose \"Class A\" for more dynamics with greater touch sensitivity; choose \"Class AB\" for greater headroom and powerDT Tube Config—Changes the configuration of the DT's power tubes. Chose \"Pentode\" for clear and commanding tone; choose \"Triode\" for quieter and rounder sounds with a more vintage feelDT Reverb—Turns the DT amp's built-in spring reverb on and offDT Rev Mix—Determines the amount of built-in spring reverbDT 12AX7 Boost; DT50 only—When Low Volume Mode is off, applies a volume boostDT Feedbk Cap; DT50 only—Sets the DT amp's feedback capacitor typeDT B+ Voltage; DT50 only—Sets the DT amp's phase inverter B+ voltage For more information on DT amps, see the DT25 Pilot's Guide or the DT50 Pilot's Guide.",{"id":580,"title":581,"titles":582,"content":583,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#snapshot-bypass","Snapshot Bypass",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit There may be situations where you don't want Helix's snapshots to control a particular block's bypass state; that is, you'd prefer to turn it on and off manually. For example, you may want manual control of a boost pedal at any time without worrying whether a particular snapshot might turn it on or off. Depending on your type of Helix/HX product, follow the procedure below: Helix Floor/Rack/LT—Select a processing block, press ACTION, and set Knob 5 (Snapshot Bypass) to \"Off\" to disable snapshot control of that block's bypass stateHX Effects—Select a processing block, press ACTION, and press the \"Snapshot Bypass\" switch to disable snapshot control of that block's bypass stateHX Stomp—From Edit view, select a processing block, press ACTION, press PAGE >, and set Knob 3 (Snapshot Bypass) to \"Off\" to disable snapshot control of that block's bypass stateHelix Native/HX Edit—Right-click (Mac: control-click) on a processing block and uncheck \"Snapshot Bypass.\" Alternatively, right-click (Mac: control-click) the Bypass button to uncheck \"Snapshot Bypass.\"",{"id":585,"title":586,"titles":587,"content":588,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#hardware-compatibility-mode","Hardware Compatibility Mode",[485,551],"Helix Native Helix Native can now reflect the signal flow and model set of all Helix and HX hardware devices, so transferring presets to and from your DAW is even easier. In addition, Hardware Compatibility can be disabled entirely, so the simultaneous model count is now limited only by the speed of your computer. Open any instance of Helix Native within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.Click the Hardware Compatibility tab.From the \"Current Hardware Compatibility Mode\" pull-down menu, select one of the following options:\nOff—Disables Hardware Compatibility and lets you add as many blocks (of any type) as your computer's horsepower will allow. Choose this setting if you don't own any Helix or HX hardwareHelix Floor/LT/Rack (the default)—Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, or Helix LTHX Effects—Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into HX Effects. In this mode, no Amp or Cab models will be availableHX Stomp—Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into HX StompClick OK. Depending on the current Hardware Compatibility Mode, Helix Native may repopulate the preset list to reflect that of the selected hardware. For example, if you choose \"HX Stomp,\" HX Stomp's factory presets will appear and the signal flow will be limited to six blocksClick \"Set as Default\" to ensure any new instances of Helix Native open in the selected mode. Each Hardware Compatibility Mode incorporates its own, independent preset library. Therefore, you will see the Helix Native preset library automatically repopulate to reflect that of the selected hardware.",{"id":590,"title":591,"titles":592,"content":593,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#helixhx-preset-sharing","Helix/HX Preset Sharing",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit All Helix and HX hardware and software now live within the same ecosystem. Using multiple windows within HX Edit and/or multiple instances of the Helix Native plug-in, both blocks and entire presets can be freely dragged and dropped or copied and pasted between units. Aside from the obvious caveats below, all Helix and HX products can now share the same content. Due to the vast differences in how Helix/HX products manage controllers, snapshots, and Command Center messages, there is no guarantee that every single tiny detail of a preset will translate properly. You can now drag/drop, copy/paste, or otherwise load: HX Effects or HX Stomp presets into Helix Floor/Rack/LT and Helix Native. If an HX Effects preset has 9 blocks, the ninth block will be routed to Path 2Helix Floor/Rack/LT, Helix Native, or HX Stomp presets into HX Effects. However, there are caveats. To avoid an error message, the source preset must:\nContain 9 or fewer blocksNot contain any Amp+Cab, Amp, Preamp, or Cab blocksContain no more than one Split and Merge blockFit within one path worth of DSP processingHelix Floor/Rack/LT, Helix Native, or HX Effects presets into HX Stomp. However, there are caveats. To avoid an error message, the source preset must:\nContain 6 or fewer blocksContain no more than one Split and Merge blockFit within one path worth of DSP processingHelix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, or HX Stomp presets into Helix Native A dialog box will appear if the source preset cannot be accommodated by the current Hardware Compatibility Mode (see above). At this point, you may choose to switch the current Hardware Compatibility Mode to that of the source preset, or attempt to translate the preset into the current Hardware Compatibility Mode, given the caveats above. See the Helix Native Pilot's Guide for more information—click the question mark icon in the lower left corner of the plug-in.",{"id":595,"title":596,"titles":597,"content":598,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#undoredo","Undo/Redo",[485,551],"Helix Native,  HX Edit Both the Helix Native plug-in and HX Edit now support multiple levels of undo/redo. Click the Undo button to undo the most recent edit.Click the Redo button to redo the most recent undo.",{"id":600,"title":601,"titles":602,"content":603,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#midi-learn","MIDI Learn",[485,551],"Helix Native (Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, and HX Stomp already have this feature) Helix Native can now learn an incoming MIDI CC message and automatically assign it to a parameter.\nRight-click on a parameter and select Controller > MIDI Learn. A small brain icon flashes. If you change your mind, click the icon to cancel. Send Helix Native a MIDI CC message. The parameter is automatically assigned to it. In Helix Native, right-click (Mac: control-click) on a processing block to open a pull-down that lets you manually assign a MIDI CC to block bypass. Right-click (Mac: control-click) on a parameter slider to open a pull-down menu that lets you manually assign a MIDI CC to parameter control. Not all DAW software automatically routes incoming MIDI data through to any plug-in, especially those instanciated as an insert on an audio track. See your DAW's documentation for more information. The new MIDI In indicator in the lower right corner flashes if Helix Native receives MIDI data.",{"id":605,"title":606,"titles":607,"content":608,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#hands-free-pedal-edit-for-inputoutput-blocks","Hands-free Pedal Edit for Input/Output Blocks",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT In addition to Amp, Effect, Cab, IR, Split, and Mixer parameters, Input and Output Block parameters can also now be edited with your feet, including the new Variax String Level, Powercab Plus remote, and DT25/DT50 remote parameters. Press and hold MODE to enter Pedal Edit Mode. The switches flash.If necessary, press MORE one or more times to view additional blocks and press the Input 1A (or 1B, 2A, or 2B) or Output 1A (or 1B, 2A, or 2B) footswitch. If the block has more than one page of parameters, press FS8 (\u003C PAGE) or FS9 (PAGE >) until you find the parameter.Press the footswitch displaying the parameter you want to adjust and use an expression pedal to adjust the parameter. For fine adjustment, press FS10 (VALUE–) and FS11 (VALUE+). Hold FS10 (VALUE–) or FS11 (VALUE +) for faster adjustments.\nWhen finished, press FS12 (EXIT). If you want to save any changes made to the preset, hold FS12 (EXIT) for two seconds.",{"id":610,"title":611,"titles":612,"content":613,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#snapshot-reselect","Snapshot Reselect",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp Currently, pressing the currently active Snapshot switch will reload the stored state of that snapshot. With 2.80, you can now choose to instead toggle between it and the previously selected snapshot. For example, if you're on Snapshot 2 and switch to Snapshot 8, pressing the Snapshot 8 footswitch will seamlessly toggle between Snapshot 8 and Snapshot 2. From the Global Settings > Preferences menu, turn Snapshot Reselect to choose \"Reload\" or \"Toggle Prev.\" \"Reload\" remains the default.",{"id":615,"title":616,"titles":617,"content":618,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#stomp-select","Stomp Select",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT (parameter is already in HX Effects and HX Stomp) Currently, briefly touching a stomp footswitch jumps to select its assigned items' parameters; it's a super fast and simple way to navigate your various amps and effects. For those neanderthals of you who play barefoot, you can disable this functionality from Global Settings > Footswitches > Touch Select. With 2.80, this parameter has now changed to Stomp Select, and lets you choose whether touching a switch, pressing a switch, or both instantly jumps to display the assigned items' parameters. Depending on your type of Helix/HX product, follow the procedure below: Helix Floor/Rack/LT—From the Global Settings > Footswitches menu, turn Knob 1 (Stomp Select) to choose \"None,\" \"Touch,\" \"Press,\" or \"Touch+Press.\" \"Touch\" remains the defaultHX Effects/HX Stomp—From the Global Settings > Footswitches menu, turn Knob 1 (Stomp Select) to choose \"Touch,\" \"Press,\" or \"Both.\" \"Touch\" remains the default",{"id":620,"title":621,"titles":622,"content":623,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#swap-updown-switches","Swap Up/Down Switches",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects Some users have requested the ability to press the DOWN switch to select the next bank, preset, or snapshot. With 2.80, Up and Down can be swapped: From the Global Settings > Footswitches menu, turn Swap Up/Down to choose \"Off\" (normal) or \"On\" (reversed). Touch (but don't press) the Up and Down switches together for one second, and then press Knob 6 FS6 on HX Effects (OK). The up and down switches are now swapped.",{"id":625,"title":626,"titles":627,"content":628,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#turn-joystick-to-select-blocks","Turn Joystick to Select Blocks",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT Currently, turning the joystick encoder scrolls through available models for the selected block. With 2.80, you can now choose to instead turn the joystick to quickly move across the signal flow.\nFrom the Global Settings > Preferences menu, turn Knob 5 (Joystick Encoder) to choose \"Model\" or \"Selection.\" \"Model\" remains the default. Pressing and turning the joystick will provide the opposite setting; that is, when set to \"Model\", press and turn the joystick to quickly move across the signal flow. When set to \"Selection,\" press and turn the joystick to scroll through available models for the selected block.",{"id":630,"title":631,"titles":632,"content":633,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#tempo-indicator","Tempo Indicator",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control Press TAP/TUNER two or more times to enter a new tempo. The TAP/TUNER scribble strip briefly displays the entered tempo. To fine-tune the tempo, briefly touch the TAP/TUNER switch. The Tempo panel opens. Turn Knob 6 (BPM) to manually set the tempo.",{"id":635,"title":636,"titles":637,"content":638,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#pedal-position-indicator","Pedal Position Indicator",[485,551],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control A new Global Settings > Displays > Pedal Position Display parameter lets you determine whether the scribble strip above the expression pedal temporarily displays the expression pedal position (\"Temporary\") or remains visible (\"Persistent\").\nMove the built-in expression pedal. The EXP scribble strip displays a position indicator (0 ~ 100%).",{"id":640,"title":641,"titles":642,"content":643,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#helix-native-pricing","Helix Native Pricing",[485,551],"Helix Native It's not technically a feature, but Helix Native is now $99.99 US for all registered owners of Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, and HX Stomp ($300 off). Helix Native brings the amps, cabs, effects, and IR loading from Helix to your Mac or PC's recording software without the need for time-consuming re-amping. Depending on your computer's horsepower, you may be able to add an entire Helix's worth of processing to multiple guitar, bass, synth, vocal, drum, bus, slide whistle, and nose flute tracks. Helix Native along with Helix hardware is also an immeasurably helpful tool when trying to rebuild studio tones for your tour, or tones built on the road for the next record—What used to take weeks (or hiring an expensive programmer) now takes seconds. Helix Native can be purchased here.",{"id":645,"title":646,"titles":647,"content":648,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#other-changes-and-improvements-in-280","Other Changes and Improvements in 2.80",[485],"The Global Settings > Preferences > Tap Tempo Pitch (Authentic, Transparent) setting now also affects tempo changes taking place across snapshot changes, not just when pressing the TAP switch (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp)On a Cab > Dual block, changing the first cab no longer changes the second cab (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, Helix Native, HX Edit feature is already in HX Stomp)Page indication has changed from small colored dots to the right of the inspector to a scrolling inspector header line (similar to the one in HX Stomp). This allows Impulse Response blocks to display longer IR names. Oh yeah—speaking of which... (Helix Floor/Rack/LT)Impulse Response blocks now display as many IR file name characters as will fit in the inspector header (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, Helix Native)In previous versions, only the last value would be recalled via Snapshots (example: In Program messages, only the PC value could change). With 2.80, all values are recalled via Snapshots (example: In Hotkey messages, all modifiers and the keystroke can change, so each snapshot could have different sets of key commands). (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects)Additional values have been added to recall snapshots remotely via MIDI. CC69 Value 8 will select the next snapshot and Value 9 will select the previous snapshot (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, Helix Native, HX Effects feature is already in HX Stomp)Command Center > CC Toggle, CV Toggle (Helix Floor only), and Amp Control messages have an additional Type parameter that lets one determine whether the footswitch is latching or momentary. Previously, you would have to assign a processing block (set to momentary) to the same footswitch to make the Command Center message momentary (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects)An additional \"None\" value has been added to Command Center > Instant > Amp Control messages (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects)The \"Pac Man\" shortcut where moving the joystick right from the Output block jumps to the Input block (and vice versa) now also works when moving the joystick up and down (Helix Floor/Rack/LT)On the Save Preset, Rename Preset, Rename Snapshot, Rename Setlist, and Customize screens, moving the joystick right from the last character jumps to the first (and vice versa) (Helix Floor/Rack/LT feature is already in HX Stomp and HX Effects)The boot screen now displays a red progress bar (Helix Floor/Rack/LT feature is already in HX Stomp)While in the Command Center menu, pressing SAVE twice to save a preset no longer exits you all the way to the Home screen (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects)Pressing Up and Down together from Snapshot mode now exits to the previous mode (same as pressing EXIT) (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects)Turning the PRESET knob past the last preset in each setlist now jumps back to the beginning of the setlist (and vice versa) (Helix Floor/Rack/LT feature is already in HX Stomp and HX Effects)Helix Native 1.80 now responds to MIDI program change messages as well as MIDI CC32 (values 0-7) to recall setlists (AU/AAX only) (Helix Native feature is already in Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, and HX Stomp)A small indicator in the lower right corner of the plug-in window flashes whenever a MIDI message is received (Helix Native)Automation and MIDI/controller assignments can now be managed together from the Automation/Controller Assign tab (Helix Native, HX Edit)Blocks assigned to controllers or automation now display their category name in brackets. Parameters assigned to controllers or automation display a small icon to the left of their parameter sliders. In addition, pop-up menus now display controller or automation assignments, if any (Helix Native, HX Edit)From the Controller/Automation tab, right-click (Mac: control-click) an assignment to open a pull-down menu, letting you clear one or all assignments (Helix Native, HX Edit feature is already in Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, and HX Stomp)The Preferences menu in HX Edit now lets you set FS3, FS4, and FS5 functions (HX Edit feature is already in HX Stomp)A new \"Restore Factory Settings\" button has been added to the bottom of the Preferences window (Helix Native, HX Edit feature is already in Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, and HX Stomp)Helix Native can now take advantage of Ableton Live 10.1's support of VST3Helix Native's default tempo is now set to \"Host Sync\" instead of \"Per Preset\"In HX Edit, snapshots can now be selected while the Command Center window is openIn HX Edit, the parameter tab will now be in sync with the Helix display for Amp+Cab and Cab > Dual blocksWhen a Shuriken Variax is connected, HX Edit now displays its bank names properlyWow, you're still reading this? Congratulations; you're way cooler and better looking than other Helix/HX owners. Celebrate your superiority with some delicious tacosAs Ampeg is now Line 6's sister company, all pre-2.80 Ampeg models have been renamed:Amp > Bass > Tuck n' Go is now called \"Ampeg B-15NF\"Amp > Bass > SV Beast Nrm is now called \"Ampeg SVT Nrm\"Amp > Bass > SV Beast Brt is now called \"Ampeg SVT Brt\"Cab > 1x15 Tuck n' Go is now called \"1x15 Ampeg B-15\"Cab > 4x10 Rhino is now called \"4x10 Ampeg HLF\"Cab > 8x10 SV Beast is now called \"8x10 Ampeg SVT E\"Numerous stability and performance improvementsLots of other little things",{"id":650,"title":651,"titles":652,"content":653,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#bug-fixes-in-280","Bug Fixes in 2.80",[485],"On rare occasions, with dirty footswitches, a single press can generate two Command Center messages. We've added a small timeout to ensure this doesn't happen, regardless of the condition of the footswitchesPressing the Cab > Mic parameter knob now returns the value to defaultWhen importing a preset into Helix Native, the Output 1B setting is now preservedIn Helix Native, Output 1B and Output 2B Level and Pan controls now function properlyIn Helix Native, the Input Gate on paths 1B and 2B now functions properlyIn Helix Native, presets containing IR blocks now initialize the IRs properly when presets are loadedWhile HX Edit is running, double-clicking a preset, setlist, or bundle file on the desktop or any finder window will load the fileIn HX Edit, background windows now properly reflect the connected state of the deviceIn HX Edit, preset names are now preserved in setlist, bundle, or backup files if an empty preset was renamedMany other minor bug fixes",{"id":655,"title":656,"titles":657,"content":658,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-80#known-issues-in-280","Known Issues in 2.80",[485],"The first time you update Helix/HX to 2.80, your Mac or PC may ask what kind of keyboard you have connected. This is due to the new Hotkey feature. Just ignore this and close the windowAssigning a Command Center > Hotkey message to a footswitch that already has a block assigned to it (set to latching, which is the default) will cause the keystroke to be repeatedly sent to your Mac/PC. To avoid this behavior, either assign the Hotkey message to an empty footswitch or set the footswitch's mode to MomentaryOn Helix Floor, Rack, and LT, you cannot currently rename a footswitch assigned to the 1 Switch LooperIn rare cases, dragging a Looper block across a Split or Merge block may cause a subsequent preset to appear blank. If this happens, simply reload the preset and it should appear as expectedSwitching Helix presets that remotely change speaker modes in an L6 LINK-connected Powercab Plus can sometimes cause a very brief volume increaseChanging a delay or mod block's Time or Speed parameter from ms/Hz to note values (or vice versa) is not remembered by Undo/Redo. Changing the actual ms/Hz or note value itself, however, is remembered correctly",{"id":660,"title":661,"titles":662,"content":663,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-81","Release Notes 2.81 - Helix/HX",[],"Released 8/6/2019",{"id":665,"title":666,"titles":667,"content":663,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#_281","2.81",[],{"id":669,"title":670,"titles":671,"content":672,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#updating-to-281-from-280-read-me","Updating to 2.81 from 2.80 (READ ME!)",[666],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp The following instructions are only for those who've already successfully updated their Helix/HX Hardware to 2.80. If you're currently running an older version, click here for instructions on how to update to 2.81 from 2.71 or Earlier.",{"id":674,"title":500,"titles":675,"content":676,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-1abacking-up-helixhx-hardware",[666,670],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB and turn it on. Do not use any sort of USB hub.\nOpen the 2.80 version of HX Edit (NOT the new HX Edit 2.81).\nFrom the top File menu, select \"Create Backup...\"\nClick \"Create Backup.\"",{"id":678,"title":506,"titles":679,"content":680,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-1bbacking-up-helix-native",[666,670],"If you don't currently own Helix Native, skip this step.\nOpen any instance of Helix Native 2.80 (NOT the new Helix Native 1.81) within your DAW and click the \"My Account\" button in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the General tab, click \"Export Bundle.\"\nChoose the destination folder and click \"Save.\"",{"id":682,"title":683,"titles":684,"content":685,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-2updating-hx-edit-to-281-you-must-do-this-before-updating-your-helixhx-firmware","STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.81 (YOU MUST DO THIS BEFORE UPDATING YOUR HELIX/HX FIRMWARE!)",[666,670],"Turn off or disconnect any connected Helix or HX hardware.\nLog onto line6.com. Once logged in, download HX Edit 2.81, available here:\nHX Edit 2.81 for Max OS X\nHX Edit 2.81 for Windows 7, 8, or 10\nRead the Software License Agreement (hahaahaaa!) and click \"Accept and Download.\"\nOnce the software has downloaded, double-click the installer and follow the prompts.",{"id":687,"title":688,"titles":689,"content":690,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-3updating-helixhx-firmware-to-281-do-not-do-this-until-after-youve-updated-hx-edit-to-281","STEP 3—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.81 (DO NOT DO THIS UNTIL AFTER YOU'VE UPDATED HX EDIT TO 2.81!)",[666,670],"If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.\nConnect Helix/HX to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.\nLaunch Line 6 Updater, enter your Line 6 Username and Password, and click \"Sign In.\" A big green box appears with a picture of your Helix/HX product. Click the big green box and then click \"Update\" next to Version: 2.81.\nCarefully read the instructions, click \"Continue,\" and then \"Accept.\" When finished, your Helix/HX device restarts automatically and may begin rebuilding your presets. If so, let it finish. If you run into an issue during the update process such as the update procedure not completing or if you receive an error message, we strongly recommend trying a different USB port and/or USB cable. USB 2.0 or greater ports and cables are highly recommended. For Windows computers, USB ports on the back of desktop PCs have proven to be the most reliable.",{"id":692,"title":693,"titles":694,"content":695,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-4optional-loading-the-28x-factory-presetstemplates","STEP 4—OPTIONAL: Loading the 2.8X Factory Presets/Templates",[666,670],"The following procedure will COMPLETELY ERASE ALL OF YOUR CUSTOM PRESETS! If you want to keep them, make sure you back them up first! (See \"STEP 1a—Backing Up Helix/HX Hardware\" above.) Turn off your Helix/HX processor.\nDepending on your type of Helix/HX product, follow the procedure below:\nHelix Floor/LT—While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two left-most switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix/Helix LT. Wait for \"Will restore stock Presets and Setlists...\" and let go\nHelix Rack/Control—While holding knobs 3 and 4 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" and let go\nHX Effects—While holding footswitches 5 and 6 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" and let go\nHX Stomp—While holding footswitches 1 and 2, turn on HX Stomp. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" to appear on the screen and let go\nHelix Native—Click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window. From the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Restore Factory Setlists\"",{"id":697,"title":531,"titles":698,"content":699,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-5aoptional-restoring-helixhx-presets-irs-and-global-settings-from-a-backup",[666,670],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.\nOpen the NEW VERSION OF HX Edit 2.81 you installed in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.81\" above.\nFrom the top File menu, select \"Restore from Backup.\"\nBrowse to the backup file and click \"Open.\"",{"id":701,"title":536,"titles":702,"content":703,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-5boptional-restoring-helix-native-from-a-backup",[666,670],"If you don't currently own Helix Native, skip this step.\nOpen any instance of Helix Native within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Import Bundle.\"\nBrowse to the location chosen in STEP 2 above and click \"Open.\"",{"id":705,"title":706,"titles":707,"content":708,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#updating-to-281-from-271-or-earlier-read-me","Updating to 2.81 from 2.71 or Earlier (READ ME!)",[666],"The following instructions are only for those who have not yet updated their Helix/HX Hardware to 2.80. If you're already at 2.80, click here for instructions on how to update to 2.81 from 2.80. Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp",{"id":710,"title":500,"titles":711,"content":712,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-1abacking-up-helixhx-hardware-1",[666,706],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB and turn it on. Do not use any sort of USB hub.\nOpen YOUR CURRENT VERSION of HX Edit (NOT the new HX Edit 2.81).\nFrom the top File menu, select \"Create Backup...\"\nClick \"Create Backup.\" If you want to load the 2.8X factory presets and hotkey templates, it's better to manually back up individual setlists, so you can later import them into empty setlists. To do this, from the preset library along the left side, select the setlist you want to back up and click \"Export.\" Choose a destination folder and click \"Save.\" Repeat for any other setlists you want to back up.",{"id":714,"title":506,"titles":715,"content":716,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-1bbacking-up-helix-native-1",[666,706],"If you don't currently own Helix Native, skip this step.\nOpen any instance of YOUR CURRENT VERSION of Helix Native (NOT the new Helix Native 1.81) within your DAW and click the \"My Account\" button in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the General tab, click \"Export Bundle.\"\nChoose the destination folder and click \"Save.\" If you want to load the 2.8X factory presets, it's better to manually back up individual setlists, so you can later import them into empty setlists. To do this, from the preset library along the left side, select the setlist you want to back up and click the small yellow \"Export.\" Choose a destination folder and click \"Save.\" Repeat for any other setlists you want to back up.",{"id":718,"title":683,"titles":719,"content":720,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-2updating-hx-edit-to-281-you-must-do-this-before-updating-your-helixhx-firmware-1",[666,706],"Turn off or disconnect any connected Helix or HX hardware.\nLog onto line6.com. Once logged in, download the latest version of HX Edit, available here:\nHX Edit 2.81 for Max OS X\nHX Edit 2.81 for Windows 7, 8, or 10\nRead the Software License Agreement (hahaahaaa!) and click \"Accept and Download.\"\nOnce the software has downloaded, double-click the installer and follow the prompts. Installing HX Edit 2.81 automatically installs the latest version of Line 6 Updater, which is required to update the firmware.",{"id":722,"title":723,"titles":724,"content":725,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-3aupdating-helix-floorracklt-to-281-do-not-do-this-until-after-youve-updated-hx-edit-to-281","STEP 3a—Updating Helix Floor/Rack/LT to 2.81 (DO NOT DO THIS UNTIL AFTER YOU'VE UPDATED HX EDIT TO 2.81!)",[666,706],"If you have HX Effects or HX Stomp, skip to STEP 3b below instead.\nIf you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.\nConnect Helix to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.\nLaunch Line 6 Updater. The latest version was automatically installed when you installed HX Edit 2.81 in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.81\" above.\nEnter your Line 6 Username and Password and click \"Sign In.\" A big green box appears with a picture of your Helix product. Click the big green box and then click \"Update\" next to Version: 2.81.\nCarefully read the instructions (HEY! DID YOU BACK UP FIRST?), click \"Continue,\" and then \"Accept.\" A warning dialog appears, telling you that Helix will be reset twice.\nThink \"Hmm, maybe I should've backed up first? Nah, I insist on subverting the dominant paradigm,\" and click \"OK.\" Helix begins updating. As wholly expected, because we warned you... because you always read the instructions... halfway through the update process, Line 6 Updater displays a second dialog and Helix's LCD reads \"Boot Failure. Entered Update Mode!\" THIS IS NORMAL. DO NOT FREAK OUT, TAKE A PHOTO, AND THEN POST IT ONLINE BECAUSE EVERYONE WILL MAKE FUN OF YOU FOR NOT READING THESE INSTRUCTIONS.\nMoveAlong.jpg.178f5fc3b9e6bdeec47d4a5935e47444.jpg\nClick \"OK\" again. When finished, Helix restarts automatically and begins rebuilding your presets. Let it finish. This may take some time. If Helix appears to not respond for many minutes, see the message directly below step 8. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads \"Helix Control must be updated to work properly. Update now?\" Press Knob 6 (OK) to update Helix Control. If you run into an issue during the update process such as the update procedure not completing or if you receive an error message, we strongly recommend trying a different USB port and/or USB cable. USB 2.0 or greater ports and cables are highly recommended. For Windows computers, USB ports on the back of desktop PCs have proven to be the most reliable. Updating the firmware does not automatically load any new presets. See \"STEP 4—Loading the 2.8X Factory Presets/Templates\" below.",{"id":727,"title":728,"titles":729,"content":730,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-3bupdating-hx-effectshx-stomp-to-281-do-not-do-this-until-after-youve-updated-hx-edit-to-281","STEP 3b—Updating HX Effects/HX Stomp to 2.81  (DO NOT DO THIS UNTIL AFTER YOU'VE UPDATED HX EDIT TO 2.81!)",[666,706],"If you have Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, or Helix LT, follow STEP 3a above instead.\nShut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.\nConnect your HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.\nLaunch Line 6 Updater. The latest version was automatically installed when you installed HX Edit 2.81 in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.80\" above.\nEnter your Line 6 Username and Password and click \"Sign In.\" A big green box appears with a picture of your HX product. Click the big green box and then click \"Update\" next to Version: 2.81.\nCarefully read the instructions (HEY! DID YOU BACK UP FIRST?), click \"Continue,\" and then \"Accept.\" When finished, your HX device restarts automatically. Updating the firmware does not automatically load any new presets. See \"STEP 4—Loading the 2.8X Factory Presets/Templates\" below.",{"id":732,"title":693,"titles":733,"content":695,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-4optional-loading-the-28x-factory-presetstemplates-1",[666,706],{"id":735,"title":531,"titles":736,"content":737,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-5aoptional-restoring-helixhx-presets-irs-and-global-settings-from-a-backup-1",[666,706],"Connect your Helix/HX processor to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub) and turn it on.\nOpen the NEW VERSION OF HX Edit 2.81 you installed in \"STEP 2—Updating HX Edit to 2.81\" above.\nFrom the top File menu, select \"Restore from Backup.\"\nBrowse to the backup file and click \"Open.\" If you instead exported individual setlists and loaded the 2.8X factory presets/templates (and want to keep them), from the preset list along the left side, select an empty User setlist and then drag the saved setlist file (from the tip in STEP 1) into the preset list You may notice that after restoring from a backup (or loading in previously stored setlists or individual presets) that preset switching times are slower than normal. Restart Helix/HX, and you'll see the display read \"Rebuilding preset XXX\". Wait for it to rebuild your presets, and they will load faster.",{"id":739,"title":536,"titles":740,"content":703,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#step-5boptional-restoring-helix-native-from-a-backup-1",[666,706],{"id":742,"title":743,"titles":744,"content":745,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#bug-fixes-in-281","Bug Fixes in 2.81",[666],"The active EXP Pedal (1 or 2) was not saved with the presetOn Helix LT, the XLR Outputs would reset to Mic level upon power cycleAfter loading two presets in a row containing a Looper block on Path 1B or 2B, audio could sometimes drop outIn rare cases, restoring a backup made on 2.71 could cause headphone audio to be lostIn hands-free Pedal Edit Mode, moving an expression pedal could also affect any Wah, Volume/Pan, or controller assignmentsChanging IRs via controller or snapshot could sometimes result in an audible crossfade between IRsPresets with Input > S/PDIF blocks would not pass audio until another preset with a different input block is loadedWhen Global Settings > Preferences > Snapshot Edits is set to \"Discard,\" tempo would not reflect this setting when set to \"Per Snapshot\"Command Center > MMC > Record, Punch In, and Punch Out commands could not transmit correctlyIn rare cases on Helix Floor, Helix Rack, and Helix LT, FS6 (MODE) could fail to toggle between footswitch modesAdjusting certain Frequency parameters (typically those below 1kHz) could change at different increments between hardware and HX EditIn HX Edit, assigning both a block and Command Center command to the same footswitch could result in erratic behavior when attempting to change the LED colorSnapshot-controlled Command Center > CC Toggle or CV Toggle values could sometimes not import correctly from older presetsIn rare cases, undoing a footswitch assignment remotely from HX Edit could result in a firmware crashIn HX Edit, repeatedly pressing Up/Down arrows could inadvertently jump to the bottom of the controller parameter listIn HX Edit, attempting to undo hardware changes after a Global Factory Reset could sometimes reload preset data from before the resetIn HX Edit, performing an Undo/Redo function could sometimes cause a Cab > Dual block to change to a Cab > Single blockIn HX Edit, performing an Undo/Redo function could sometimes cause a stereo effect block to change to a mono effect blockIn HX Edit on Windows, the Edit panel's sliders could sometimes fail to appearIn HX Edit on Windows, customized Command Center text could sometimes be truncatedOn Windows, the Win Defender pop-up could block installation of Helix Native or HX Edit",{"id":747,"title":748,"titles":749,"content":750,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-81#known-issues-in-281","Known Issues in 2.81",[666],"On Helix Rack/Control, connecting an expression pedal to Helix Control could sometimes cause the pedal position display to behave erraticallyPitch/Synth > 3 OSC Synth, 3 Note Generator, and 4 OSC Generator are louder than in 2.71In rare cases, the Dynamics > LA Studio Comp model can sometimes cause a drop in preset volumeIn HX Edit, applying a custom color to a Snapshot footswitch can sometimes not be reflected on the hardware. For now, apply snapshot footswitch colors from the hardwareIn HX Edit, if the current preset has not been saved, importing a different preset, setlist, or bundle does not currently clear the Undo historyIn rare cases, Helix/HX devices can become disconnected from HX Edit. If possible, always connect your Helix/HX device directly to the USB port closest to your computer's power connector. Never use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on the front of towersHelix Native will not open in hardened runtime builds of Cubase 10.5Some tempo synced effects can act authentic with the global setting set to transparent if tempo changes are controlled via snapshots.In HX Edit, importing a setlist containing Command Center > Instant commands may transmit the messages even if no new preset is loadedLogic Pro X is currently unable to write snapshot or switch automation data for Helix NativeIn HX Edit, performing an undo after a block cut or clear can delete the block's footswitch and/or controller assignmentsIn HX Edit, moving an effect, amp, cab, or IR block can sometimes inadvertently reposition a Split or Merge blockIn HX Edit, certain Output > Powercab and DT parameters cannot currently be assigned to snapshots via Alt+click/Option+click. For now, press and turn the knob on the Helix hardwareIn HX Edit, Ctrl+click/Command+click on certain Output > Powercab and DT parameters may not reset them to default settingsIn Helix Native, changing models can clear automation assignments of common parameters (such as Amp > Bass or Delay > Time)",{"id":752,"title":753,"titles":754,"content":755,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-90","Release Notes 2.90 - Helix/HX",[],"\"The Always Level Presets By Ear at Stage Volume with the Rest of the Band Playing Update\"",{"id":757,"title":758,"titles":759,"content":760,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#helixhx-290-helix-native-190","Helix/HX 2.90 | Helix Native 1.90",[],"\"The Always Level Presets By Ear at Stage Volume with the Rest of the Band Playing Update\" Helix/HX 2.90 and Helix Native 1.90 include new amps, cabs, effects, features, and bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.",{"id":762,"title":763,"titles":764,"content":495,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#updating-to-290","Updating to 2.90",[758],{"id":766,"title":767,"titles":768,"content":769,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#step-1updating-hx-edit-to-290","STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.90",[758,763],"Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90: macOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9678Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9677",{"id":771,"title":772,"titles":773,"content":774,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#step-2updating-helixhx-firmware-to-290","STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.90",[758,763],"If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click \"Check for Updates\" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.Click \"Update Now.\" A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click \"Create Backup.\"Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads \"Update Complete\" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click \"Back to HX Edit.\"If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads \"Helix Control must be updated to work properly.\" Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":776,"title":777,"titles":778,"content":779,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#new-amp-models-in-290","New Amp Models in 2.90",[758],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp Revv Gen Purple, based on* the purple (Gain 1) channel of the Revv® Generator 120",{"id":781,"title":782,"titles":783,"content":784,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#new-cab-models-in-290","New Cab Models in 2.90",[758],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp 1x12 Fullerton, based on* the classic 1953 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe1x12 Grammatico, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange",{"id":786,"title":787,"titles":788,"content":789,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#new-effects-models-in-290","New Effects Models in 2.90",[758],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp Distortion > Alpaca Rouge (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Way Huge® Red Llama (modded)Distortion > Legendary Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Carvin VLD1 Legacy Drive (high gain channel)Distortion > Xenomorph Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Subdecay Harmonic AntagonizerDynamics > Rochester Comp (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Ashly® CLX-52 and created in conjunction with Billy SheehanModulation > Pebble Phaser (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Electro-Harmonix® Small Stone phaserSplit > Dynamic, Line 6 original. This new Split block type lets you dynamically route signals to Path B, depending on how hard you play. For example, you could roll your guitar's volume back a bit and play clean chords through a Grammatico on Path A and then roll it back up and dig in to blend in a searing Revv Gen Purple lead on Path B\nKnob 1 (Threshold)—Signals below the Threshold are routed to Path A; signals above the Threshold are routed to Path BKnob 2 (Attack)—Determines how fast the signal routes to Path B once reaching the ThresholdKnob 3 (Decay)—Determines how fast the signal returns to Path A once falling below the ThresholdKnob 4 (Reverse)—Swaps dynamic path routing. When set to \"On\", signals below the Threshold are routed to Path B and signals above the Threshold are routed to Path A All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.",{"id":791,"title":792,"titles":793,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#new-features-in-helixhx-firmware-290","New Features in Helix/HX Firmware 2.90",[758],{"id":795,"title":796,"titles":797,"content":798,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#output-meters","Output Meters",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT The following block types display output meters in the inspector when selected: OutputSend/Return > SendSend/Return > FX Loop Meters (in any product, not just Helix) are never appropriate for ensuring consistent levels from preset to preset. The models you use, the preset's frequency and dynamic response, your guitar or bass, your pickups, your playback system, your environment, your location in front of (or behind!) your playback system, and especially your bandmates all radically affect the perceived loudness of various presets.It's very common for the meters of one preset to show it's louder than another, while what you hear is the exact opposite. ALWAYS trust your ears when leveling presets, and whenever possible, level presets at stage volume, with the rest of the band playing.",{"id":800,"title":801,"titles":802,"content":803,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#gain-reduction-meters","Gain Reduction Meters",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected: Dynamics > Compressor (the 3-Band Comp displays three meters)Dynamics > Gate",{"id":805,"title":806,"titles":807,"content":808,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#signal-presentclip-indicators","Signal Present/Clip Indicators",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp The following block types now display a pale green background when signal is present and a bright red background if the block clips: InputOutputSend/Return > Send (clip indication only)Send/Return > Return (clip indication only)Send/Return > FX Loop (clip indication only)",{"id":810,"title":811,"titles":812,"content":813,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#improved-ir-referencing","Improved IR Referencing",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp Impulse Response blocks now reference each IR file by waveform instead of index number. This means that when presets are shared and the recipient has the same IRs, they'll appear in the right place without having to manually reorder all IRs to match. For improved IR referencing to take place, all presets must be rebuilt. Presets should've automatically been rebuilt after updating to 2.90, but if they didn't, you can manually rebuild them:Helix, Helix LT: While holding FS10 and FS11 (bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for \"Will rebuild all Presets...\" to appear and let goHelix Rack: While holding Knobs 1 and 3 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for \"Will rebuild all Presets...\" to appear and let goHX Effects: No preset rebuild necessaryHX Stomp: While holding both the Upper and Lower Knobs, turn on HX Stomp. Wait for \"Will rebuild Presets...\" to appear and let goHelix Native: The first time you open the plug-in, a dialog appears, reading \"Your presets are being parsed to associate IR blocks intelligently with the IRs they reference.\" Click OK.",{"id":815,"title":816,"titles":817,"content":818,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#command-center-hx-preset","Command Center > HX Preset",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  HX Effects A new Command Center command type lets you assign any preset (or Next Preset or Previous Preset) to any stomp switch. Together with HX Snapshot and HX Looper commands, you can now customize Stomp footswitch mode to your liking. From the Command Center, select a stomp switch and turn Knob 1 (Command) to select \"HX Preset.\"Turn Knob 2 (Preset) to choose Next Preset, Previous Preset, or any single preset within the current setlist. Although stomp mode switches can be assigned to multiple functions, to avoid unintended behavior, we strongly recommend HX Preset commands be assigned to empty footswitches.",{"id":820,"title":821,"titles":822,"content":823,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#command-center-hx-snapshot","Command Center > HX Snapshot",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  HX Effects A new Command Center command type lets you assign any snapshot (or Snapshot Up or Snapshot Down) to any stomp switch. Together with HX Preset and HX Looper commands, you can now customize Stomp footswitch mode to your liking. From the Command Center, select a stomp switch and turn Knob 1 (Command) to select \"HX Snapshot.\"Turn Knob 2 (Behavior) to set the behavior of the stomp switch:Press/Release—Pressing the switch engages the Knob 3 (Press) function; releasing the switch engages the Knob 4 (Release) functionPress/Hold—Briefly pressing the switch engages the Knob 3 (Press) function; pressing and holding the switch for 1 second engages the Knob 4 (Hold) function Although stomp mode switches can be assigned to multiple functions, to avoid unintended behavior, we strongly recommend HX Snapshot commands be assigned to empty footswitches.",{"id":825,"title":826,"titles":827,"content":828,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#command-center-hx-looper","Command Center > HX Looper",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  HX Effects A new Command Center command type lets you assign any Looper function to any stomp mode switch or instant command. Together with HX Preset and HX Looper commands, you can now customize Stomp footswitch mode to your liking. Note that a 6 Switch Looper or 1 Switch Looper block must be present in your preset for HX Looper commands to function properly. Also, caution should be taken when assigning HX Looper commands, as only the Press function is displayed on the scribble strip (Performance View on Helix LT); Release and Hold functions are not displayed. From the Command Center, select a stomp switch and turn Knob 1 (Command) to select \"HX Looper.\"Turn Knob 2 (Behavior) to set the behavior of the stomp switch:Press/Release—Pressing the switch engages the Knob 3 (Press) function; releasing the switch engages the Knob 4 (Release) function.Press/Hold—Briefly pressing the switch engages the Knob 3 (Press) function; pressing and holding the switch for 1 second engages the Knob 4 (Hold) function. Although stomp mode switches can be assigned to multiple functions, to avoid unintended behavior, we strongly recommend HX Looper commands be assigned to empty footswitches.",{"id":830,"title":831,"titles":832,"content":833,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#shortcut-model-subcategory","Shortcut > Model Subcategory",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp You can now quickly skip through model subcategories without ever having to open the model list. Finding a specific amp or effect is now faster than ever. Helix/Helix Rack/Helix LT—From the Home screen, hold \u003C PAGE and press PAGE > to jump to the the next subcategory. Hold PAGE > and press \u003C PAGE to jump to the previous subcategory. Then turn the joystick to select models within that subcategoryHX Effects—From Stomp view, press and turn the Big Knob to skip subcategories, then turn normally to select models within that subcategoryHX Stomp—From Edit view, press and turn the Lower Knob to skip subcategories, then turn normally to select models within that subcategory. For example, if you have HX Stomp and have selected an empty block location, pressing and turning the Lower Knob will jump to the first model in each subcategory: Distortion > Mono, Distortion > Stereo, Distortion > Legacy, Dynamics > Mono, Dynamics > Stereo, Dynamics > Legacy, EQ > Mono, EQ > Stereo, Modulation > Mono, Modulation > Stereo, and so on.",{"id":835,"title":836,"titles":837,"content":838,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#update-firmware-from-hx-edit","Update Firmware From HX Edit",[758,792],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp Instead of hanging out on social media, desperately asking when the next firmware's dropping, you can now, I dunno, actually play guitar? As soon as a new update becomes available, HX Edit will tell you, and all you gotta do is follow the prompts.",{"id":840,"title":841,"titles":842,"content":843,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#new-features-in-helix-native-190","New Features in Helix Native 1.90",[758],"::tip NOTE:\nFor additional information on Helix Native 1.90 or HX Edit 2.90, check out the latest Helix Native and HX Edit Pilot's Guides, which are automatically installed with the new 1.90/2.90 software.\n::",{"id":845,"title":846,"titles":847,"content":848,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#ab-compare","A/B Compare",[758,841],"Helix Native A new set of buttons lets you temporarily store all of the Helix Native instance's model selection and parameter settings, then tweak any number of parameters and easily compare an A version and a B version. Click the middle button to quickly copy the current state to the other (A to B or B to A).",{"id":850,"title":851,"titles":852,"content":853,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#other-changes-and-improvements-in-helixhx-290-helix-native-190","Other Changes and Improvements in Helix/HX 2.90 | Helix Native 1.90",[758],"The EQ > Low/High Shelf model's Hi Freq parameter now goes down to 400Hz (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, Helix Native)Booting up now takes roughly half the time (Helix Floor/Rack/LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp)While in Tuner mode, the three footswitch LEDs act as additional tuning indicators (HX Stomp feature is already in HX Effects)Edited presets now display a small \"E\" icon (HX Effects, HX Stomp feature is already in Helix Floor/Rack/LT)Blocks can now quickly be copied and pasted across signal flows by Option-dragging (Windows: Control-dragging) the block (Helix Native, HX Edit)IRs can now be dragged directly from the Impulses list onto the signal flow view (Helix Native, HX Edit)Double-clicking an IR in the Impulses list now auto-populates the currently selected IR block (Helix Native, HX Edit)Parameters with very few values now appear as select boxes instead of sliders (Helix Native, HX Edit)Parameters assigned to controllers now scale slider width to reflect Min and Max values (Helix Native)A \"Check for Updates\" box has been added to the Preferences window (Helix Native, HX Edit)Lots of stability and usability improvements across the board (Helix Native, HX Edit)",{"id":855,"title":856,"titles":857,"content":858,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#bug-fixes-in-290","Bug Fixes in 2.90",[758],"Distortion > Obsidian Drive's polarity was reversedRemotely changing Powercab Plus speaker modes upon preset recall could sometimes result in a volume bumpUsing Learn to quickly assign a parameter to footswitch control could occasionally swap the switch's Latching/Momentary settingSetting the Input block on Path 1A to S/PDIF could stop passing audio if a new Path 1B Input block had been createdConnecting an expression pedal to Helix Control could sometimes cause the pedal position display to behave erraticallyLots of other minor bug fixes",{"id":860,"title":861,"titles":862,"content":863,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-90#known-issues-in-290","Known Issues in 2.90",[758],"A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz modelWhile backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audioIn a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)",{"id":865,"title":866,"titles":867,"content":868,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-91","Release Notes 2.91 - Helix/HX",[],"Helix/HX 2.91 and Helix Native 1.91 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.91.",{"id":870,"title":871,"titles":872,"content":873,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#helixhx-firmware-291","Helix/HX Firmware 2.91",[],"Helix/HX 2.91 and Helix Native 1.91 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.91. Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.",{"id":875,"title":876,"titles":877,"content":495,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#updating-helixhx-firmware-to-291","Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91",[871],{"id":879,"title":880,"titles":881,"content":882,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#step-1updating-hx-edit-to-290-assuming-you-havent-done-this-already","STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.90 (assuming you haven't done this already)",[871,876],"Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:\nmacOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9678Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9677",{"id":884,"title":885,"titles":886,"content":887,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#step-2updating-helixhx-firmware-to-291","STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91",[871,876],"If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click \"Check for Updates\" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.Click \"Update Now.\" A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click \"Create Backup.\" IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads \"Update Complete\" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click \"Back to HX Edit.\"From the File pull-down menu, click \"Restore from backup...\" A dialog appears. Click \"Restore Backup\" and then \"Yes.\"Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads \"Helix Control must be updated to work properly.\" Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":889,"title":890,"titles":891,"content":892,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#updating-helix-native-to-191","Updating Helix Native to 1.91",[871],"Helix Native Quit your DAW software.Log onto line6.com, download, and install Helix Native 1.91:\nmacOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9689Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9690",{"id":894,"title":895,"titles":896,"content":897,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#bug-fixes-in-291","Bug Fixes in 2.91",[871],"Resolves multiple unexpected behaviors that can occur when adjusting the Volume knob, entering the Tuner, or other actions during the first 30 seconds after power up—FIXEDEngaging the Tap Tempo switch would calculate a different tempo than intended—FIXEDWhen routing Path 1 to Path 2, the Path 2A and/or Path 2B input blocks could display clipping even when the signal was not—FIXEDFor presets with parallel paths, the Mixer > Merge block would boost signals by 3dB—FIXED",{"id":899,"title":900,"titles":901,"content":902,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-91#known-issues-in-291","Known Issues in 2.91",[871],"A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz modelWhile backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audioIn a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)The Looper block's Overdub function does not currently respond to incoming MIDI (HX Stomp)While connected to HX Edit, quickly changing models through the IR block can sometimes result in a unit freeze (HX Stomp)",{"id":904,"title":905,"titles":906,"content":907,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-92","Release Notes 2.92 - Helix/HX",[],"Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.",{"id":909,"title":910,"titles":911,"content":912,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#helixhx-firmware-292","Helix/HX Firmware 2.92",[],"Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92. Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.",{"id":914,"title":915,"titles":916,"content":495,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#updating-helixhx-firmware-to-292","Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92",[910],{"id":918,"title":919,"titles":920,"content":921,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#step-1updating-hx-edit-to-292","STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92",[910,915],"Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.92:\nmacOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9732Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9731",{"id":923,"title":924,"titles":925,"content":926,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#step-2updating-helixhx-firmware-to-292","STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92",[910,915],"If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click \"Check for Updates\" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.Click \"Update Now.\" A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click \"Create Backup.\" IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads \"Update Complete\" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click \"Back to HX Edit.\"From the File pull-down menu, click \"Restore from backup...\" A dialog appears. Click \"Restore Backup\" and then \"Yes.\"Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads \"Helix Control must be updated to work properly.\" Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":928,"title":929,"titles":930,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#updating-helix-native-to-192","Updating Helix Native to 1.92",[910],{"id":932,"title":933,"titles":934,"content":935,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#helix-native","Helix Native",[910,929],"Quit your DAW software.Log onto line6.com, download, and install Helix Native 1.92:\nmacOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9734Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=9735",{"id":937,"title":938,"titles":939,"content":940,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#bug-fixes-in-292","Bug Fixes in 2.92",[910],"When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to \"Off\" or \"Press,\" touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXEDThe TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXEDIn HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXEDIn HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXEDEngaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXEDEngaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXEDIn rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXEDOn Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXEDIn HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXEDIn HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXEDIn HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXEDIn rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXEDThe polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXEDDynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXEDDynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXEDIn rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXEDThe Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED",{"id":942,"title":943,"titles":944,"content":863,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/2-92#known-issues-in-292","Known Issues in 2.92",[910],{"id":946,"title":947,"titles":948,"content":949,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3","Release Notes 3.00 - Helix/HX",[],"\"The Along Came Poly Update\"",{"id":951,"title":952,"titles":953,"content":954,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3#helixhx-firmware-300","Helix/HX Firmware 3.00",[],"\"The Along Came Poly Update\" Helix 3.0 includes new amps, cabs, effects, features, bug fixes, and other changes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Click here for detailed update instructions.",{"id":956,"title":242,"titles":957,"content":958,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#new-amps",[952],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton ReverbDas Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4",{"id":960,"title":961,"titles":962,"content":963,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#new-cabs","New Cabs",[952],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12\" Alnico Blue driver",{"id":965,"title":252,"titles":966,"content":967,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#new-effects",[952],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to \"Extended,\" drops the gate's threshold down to -90dBDistortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzzDistortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff PiDistortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzzDynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to \"Extended,\" drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an ampEQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Includes an extra Shimmer parameter that imparts some motion to the harmonics, reminiscent of how a string's vibration tends to affect the other strings. Just like the original, works best with single-coil pickups. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IRModulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original. Great for those who avoid traditional chorus pedalsDelay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original infinite sustain with a modulated poly pitch engine built in\nAssign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.Press the switch again (off), and the sustained note or chord fades out.\nInterval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play overAttack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades inDecay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effectMod Freq—Sets the speed of the built-in modulationMod Depth—Sets the depth of the built-in modulationFX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signalRandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable droneRandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wandersLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockDelay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real-time\nTime—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note valuesDelay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller incrementsMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardFeedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequenceSliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this \"Super Chaotic Feedback\"Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reorderingOctaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lowerReverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwardSeq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitelySmoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicksTrails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassedPitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original\nNOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitch-shifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more informationIMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP (unless  you're running Helix Native with Hardware Compatibility Mode turned off). Don't say we didn't warn you...Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitonesCents—Sets the pitch of the effect in centsShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to \"1/1\"ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). At the knob's extremes (Start Slow 5 and Start Fast 5), the pitch will actually overshoot a little before settling on the target pitch. The default is \"Linear\"ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat valuesReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). At the knob's extremes (Start Slow 5 and Start Fast 5), the pitch will actually overshoot a little before settling on the original pitch. The default is \"Linear\"Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine reacts to your playing. Leave this set to \"X Stable\" (the default, with the fewest artifacts when pitch shifting complex chords) and only select a different setting if you experience too much latency when playing fast lead linesAuto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is appliedMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitch-shiftLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockPitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Automatically assigned to EXP 1 and the toe switch toggles it on and off. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional informationPitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. A Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to transpose your playing. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional informationPitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulationVolume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original. Used to increase the apparent stereo width of your signal when connecting Helix to two amps or a stereo playback system; just make sure there aren't any mono blocks after it!Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you real-time control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands\nAdd the Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green, and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):\nSlices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped intoSeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loopShuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshufflingOctave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lowerReverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwardRepeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeatingSmoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicksSeq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitelyPlayback—Sets the looper's playback levelLow Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove the looper signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove the looper signal above a certain frequencyWant to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops, and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted, and the LED lights dim white. *NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.",{"id":969,"title":101,"titles":970,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#new-features",[952],{"id":972,"title":973,"titles":974,"content":975,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#true-preset-spillover","True Preset Spillover",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT only Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating a second identical DSP to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not some global reverb or delay smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to \"On.\" (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading \"Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?\"Press Knob 6 (OK).Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover, but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay's feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to \"Off.\" (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading \"The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!\" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.Press Knob 6 (OK). But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 for spillover! Then keep using snapshots.",{"id":977,"title":978,"titles":979,"content":980,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#favorites","Favorites",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. (Favorites in HX Effects do not recall footswitch assignment.) Favorites appear in a new \"Favorites\" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. From HX Edit, you can use the Export and Import Favorites to create an endless collection of them on your hard drive, and even share them with friends and across devices (where supported). TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, save the block as a favorite without assigning a footswitch.\" Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment. (Favorites in HX Effects do not recall footswitch assignment.)Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION. To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)To rename the selected favorite, press Rename FavoriteTo clear the selected favorite, press Clear FavoriteTo clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm. All right, so what? Here's what: At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep effect types on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing. Wait. Did you really name the 3.0 update after the 2004 romantic comedy starring Ben Stiller and Jennifer Aniston that has a dismal rating of 27% on Rotten Tomatoes? Huh. I guess it sounds dumb when you put it that way.",{"id":982,"title":983,"titles":984,"content":985,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#user-model-defaults","User Model Defaults",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp 3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default, so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. Editing/saving a User Default does not affect any existing instances of the model currently in use in your presets. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select \"User Default.\"",{"id":987,"title":988,"titles":989,"content":990,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#global-settings-preferences-auto-impedance","Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  HX Stomp A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to \"Auto.\" When set to \"First Block\" (the default, and how Helix has worked since the beginning), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to \"First Enabled,\" the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called \"Auto Impedance\" because \"Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83\" wouldn't fit.",{"id":992,"title":993,"titles":994,"content":995,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#minmax-value-indicators","Min/Max Value Indicators",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  HX Stomp Feature already in HX Effects Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small white Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators above and below the value bar. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.",{"id":997,"title":998,"titles":999,"content":1000,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#eight-blocks-in-hx-stomp","Eight Blocks in HX Stomp",[952,101],"HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight. Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie. It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.",{"id":1002,"title":1003,"titles":1004,"content":1005,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#command-center-in-hx-stomp","Command Center in HX Stomp",[952,101],"HX Stomp Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it, and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add. Press \u003C PAGE and PAGE > together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual. Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys? Yes.",{"id":1007,"title":1008,"titles":1009,"content":1010,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#tuner-in-helix-native","Tuner in Helix Native",[952,101],"Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix. Click the tuner icon.From the Type pull-down menu, choose the tuner type: Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.",{"id":1012,"title":1013,"titles":1014,"content":1015,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#gain-reduction-meters-in-helix-native","Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native",[952,101],"The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected: Dynamics > CompressorDynamics > Gate",{"id":1017,"title":1018,"titles":1019,"content":1020,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#artist-presets","Artist Presets",[952,101],"Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; there are two methods to restore them: METHOD ONE: Resetting Factory Presets Restoring factory presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!\nMake sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX. Perform the following procedure: Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for \"Will restore stock Presets and Setlsts...\" to appear and let goHelix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for \"Will restore stock Presets and Setlsts...\" to appear and let goHelix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, select the Presets/IRs tab, and click \"Restore Factory Setlists\"HX Effects: While holding footswitches 5 and 6 (two middle switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" to appear and let goHX Stomp: While holding footswitches 1 and 2, turn on HX Effects. Wait for \"Will reset Presets...\" to appear and let go METHOD TWO: Manually Loading 3.0 Factory Setlists via HX Edit HX Effects/Stomp users! Loading a factory setlist file will completely overwrite your own, so make sure everything's backed up first! Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native users! Loading a factory setlist file will completely overwrite the current setlist, so make sure it's backed up first! We strongly recommend you choose an empty (or unwanted) setlist to overwrite. Click here and download the setlist file(s) for your Helix or HX product.\nConnect Helix/HX to your computer and launch HX Edit 3.0 (or higher).If you have Helix Floor, Rack, LT, or Native, select the Presets tab and click the Setlists pull down to select the setlist you wish to overwrite (see image below). HX Effects and HX Stomp do not have multiple setlist locations, so you can skip this step.Drag the .hls setlist file you downloaded in Step 1 onto the Preset List. Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists: Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native FACTORY 1 setlist 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)15C—Robbie Calvo15D—Ryan \"Fluff\" Bruce (Dragged Under)16A-16D—Felix Martin17A—Mario Quintero (Spotlights)17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)20C—John Browne (Monuments)20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)21A—Jon Button (The Who)21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)21C—Steve Howe (Yes)21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)22A—Pete Thorn22B—Rhett Shull22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)23C, 23D—Chris Buck24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)24B-25A—Rabea Massaad25B—Soren Andersen25C—Devin Townsend25D, 26A—Nathan Navarro26B-26D—Vernon Reid27B—Philip Bynoe27C—Markus Reuter HX Effects 12A-12D—Julien Baker13A—Sarah \"Noveller\" Lipstate13B, 13C—Steve Stevens",{"id":1022,"title":1023,"titles":1024,"content":1025,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3#version-30-owners-manuals","Version 3.0 Owner's Manuals",[952,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT,  Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0. Helix FloorHelix Rack/ControlHelix LTHelix NativeYou can also access the 3.0 Pilot's Guide from within Helix Native itself. Click the question mark in the lower left corner and select \"Pilot's Guide\"HX EffectsHX StompHX Edit—Access the 3.0 Pilot's Guide from within HX Edit itself. Click the question mark in the lower left corner and select \"Pilot's Guide\"",{"id":1027,"title":1028,"titles":1029,"content":1030,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#other-changes-and-improvements","Other Changes and Improvements",[952],"On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an \"Off\" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LTPitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 HzHX Edit now lets you restore individual setlists from a backupIn HX Edit, Favorites and User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independent of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global SettingsGain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate Helix Floor, Rack, and LT onlyGain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsiveParameter knob ballistics have been improvedParameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicatorsPress-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignmentsNew splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp",{"id":1032,"title":81,"titles":1033,"content":1034,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#bug-fixes",[952],"When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXEDIf Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours or longer with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXEDMany other minor fixes and improvements",{"id":1036,"title":86,"titles":1037,"content":1038,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3#known-issues",[952],"Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcomingIn certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commandsVariax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connectedAfter importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stopWhen Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stopClearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment",{"id":1040,"title":1041,"titles":1042,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-01","Release Notes 3.01 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1044,"title":1045,"titles":1046,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-01#helixhx-firmware-301","Helix/HX Firmware 3.01",[],{"id":1048,"title":81,"titles":1049,"content":1050,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-01#bug-fixes",[1045],"In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXEDIn certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXEDMany other minor fixes and improvements",{"id":1052,"title":86,"titles":1053,"content":1054,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-01#known-issues",[1045],"Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcomingThe Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commandsVariax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connectedAfter importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stopWhen Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stopClearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment",{"id":1056,"title":1057,"titles":1058,"content":1059,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-10","Release Notes 3.10 - Helix/HX",[],"AKA: \"The we really wanted to fit most of this into 3.0 but ran out of time update\"",{"id":1061,"title":1062,"titles":1063,"content":1059,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#helixhx-firmware-310","Helix/HX Firmware 3.10",[],{"id":1065,"title":1066,"titles":1067,"content":1068,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#how-do-i-update","How do I update?",[1062],"Any chance you've already updated HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10 and backing everything up to your computer.",{"id":1070,"title":1071,"titles":1072,"content":1073,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#what-if-i-didnt-update-hx-edit-to-301","What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01?",[1062],"That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link: macOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=10457Windows: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=10459",{"id":1075,"title":1076,"titles":1077,"content":1078,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#anything-else-i-should-know","Anything else I should know?",[1062],"Yes. We STRONGLY recommend performing a factory reset AFTER UPDATING to 3.10 and THEN RESTORING YOUR BACKUP. (Backing up is part of the update process). Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS A FACTORY RESET WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK! Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LTHelix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix RackHX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 farthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX EffectsHX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX StompHX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp",{"id":1080,"title":1081,"titles":1082,"content":1083,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#new-amp","New Amp",[1062],"For Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Stomp",{"id":1085,"title":1086,"titles":1087,"content":1088,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#guitar-mandarin-rocker","Guitar > Mandarin Rocker",[1062,1081],"Based on the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII (Dirty Channel). NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.",{"id":1090,"title":252,"titles":1091,"content":495,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#new-effects",[1062],{"id":1093,"title":1094,"titles":1095,"content":1096,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#distortion-ratatouille-dist","Distortion > Ratatouille Dist",[1062,252],"(Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch Gain: Sets the amount of distortionFilter: Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)Level: Sets the overall level of the block",{"id":1098,"title":1099,"titles":1100,"content":1101,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#modulation-retro-reel","Modulation > Retro Reel",[1062,252],"(Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, effects returns, you name it. Anything that needs a bit more punch or vibe. Wow Fluttr: Determines how much warbly tape sound is heardSaturation: Adds an analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a toneLow Cut: Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effectHigh Cut: Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tapeTape Speed: Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape emulationLevel: Sets the overall level of the block",{"id":1103,"title":1104,"titles":1105,"content":1106,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#delay-euclidean-delay","Delay > Euclidean Delay",[1062,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean rhythm algorithms. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the mixer to L100 and R100. Time: Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note valuesFeedback: Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to \"0%\"Steps: Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)Fill: Using Euclidean math, evenly distributes fills in the sequence with repeats (1-16; see diagram below)Rotate: Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forwardMix: Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLow Cut: Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut: Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyLevel: Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails: When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed I was told there'd be no math! We lied. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_rhythm",{"id":1108,"title":1109,"titles":1110,"content":1111,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#reverb-dynamic-hall","Reverb > Dynamic Hall",[1062,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb Decay: Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity) TIP: Assign a second stomp switch to toggle between a lower Decay value and Infinity. Label it \"ForEVER ever?\"Predelay: Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signalsRoom Size: Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllersDiffusion: Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signalDamping: Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were emptyMix: Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardMotion: Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signalLow Freq: Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is appliedLow Gain: Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequenciesLow Cut: Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut: Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyLevel: Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails: When on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed",{"id":1113,"title":1114,"titles":1115,"content":1116,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#reverb-hot-springs","Reverb > Hot Springs",[1062,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb Dwell: Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decaySpring Count: Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)Drip: Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much \"ploink\" you might hearLow Cut: Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut: Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyMix: Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel: Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails: When on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed",{"id":1118,"title":101,"titles":1119,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#new-features",[1062],{"id":1121,"title":1122,"titles":1123,"content":1124,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#increased-oversampling","Increased Oversampling",[1062,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple amps in parallel. Some people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.",{"id":1126,"title":1127,"titles":1128,"content":1129,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#customizable-stomp-switches","Customizable Stomp Switches",[1062,101],"HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE > and then Customize.Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.Press PAGE > and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to \"Auto\" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)When finished, press \u003C PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).",{"id":1131,"title":1132,"titles":1133,"content":1134,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#customizable-snapshot-switches","Customizable Snapshot Switches",[1062,101],"HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.Press Rename Snapshot.Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.Press PAGE > and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to \"Auto\" (the default), the switch is whiteWhen finished, press \u003C PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).",{"id":1136,"title":1137,"titles":1138,"content":1139,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#tuner-trails","Tuner Trails",[1062,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Don't sleep on this one: The Tuner screen has a new \"Trails\" parameter. When set to \"On,\" delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward \"everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky.\"",{"id":1141,"title":1142,"titles":1143,"content":1144,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#expanded-30-models","Expanded 3.0 Models",[1062,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL 3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.",{"id":1146,"title":1147,"titles":1148,"content":1149,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#delay-poly-sustain","Delay > Poly Sustain",[1062,101,1142],"Auto EQ: Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is appliedOperation: Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default):\n\"Mute All\": When Poly Sustain is bypassed, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED; when Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. This setting would typically be used when Poly Sustain is on a parallel path and you want to apply additional effects to only the sustained signal\"Dry Kill\": When Poly Sustain is bypassed, the dry signal is heard; when Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard\"Normal\" (default): When Poly Sustain is bypassed, the dry signal is heard; when Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone",{"id":1151,"title":1152,"titles":1153,"content":1154,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#delay-glitch-delay","Delay > Glitch Delay",[1062,101,1142],"Pitch: Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called \"Octaves\" in 3.0Interval 1: Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)Interval 2: Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)Low Cut: Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut: Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency\nLevel**: Controls the overall output level of the block",{"id":1156,"title":1157,"titles":1158,"content":1159,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#looper-shuffling-looper","Looper > Shuffling Looper",[1062,101,1142],"Pitch: Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called \"Octaves\" in 3.0Interval 1: Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)Interval 2: Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)",{"id":1161,"title":1162,"titles":1163,"content":1164,"level":503},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#pitchsynth-12-string","Pitch/Synth > 12 String",[1062,101,1142],"PluckType: Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP",{"id":1166,"title":1167,"titles":1168,"content":1169,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#instant-command-wait-time","Instant Command Wait Time",[1062,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new \"Wait Time\" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to \"0 ms.\"",{"id":1171,"title":1172,"titles":1173,"content":1174,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#new-and-improved-midi-implementation","New and Improved MIDI Implementation",[1062,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved withBank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messagesFS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127 = press; values 0-63 = release)Stomp switch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch modeNew MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switchNew MIDI message: CC 72 value 64-127 = next preset, value 0-63 = previous presetNew MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views",{"id":1176,"title":1028,"titles":1177,"content":1178,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#other-changes-and-improvements",[1062],"HX Edit and Helix Native now add support for macOS 11 Big SurHelix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit modeOn the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value",{"id":1180,"title":81,"titles":1181,"content":1182,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#bug-fixes",[1062],"Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXEDWhen Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXEDThe tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXEDIn rare cases, an Impulse Response block's IR Select parameter can be reset to 1 after moving any other block to Path 2A—FIXEDHX Effects, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL only—Poly Pitch and Poly Sustain blocks could continue processing audio when the unit is in DSP Bypass—FIXEDThe Agua 51 model could stop processing audio when its Bass parameter is set to 0.0 and its Mid parameter set to 10.0—FIXEDThe Essex A30 model could stop passing audio after roughly 2 minutes when its drive parameter is set to 10.0—FIXEDIn some cases, Command Center > HX Looper commands would not function while in Preset Spillover mode—FIXEDThe Filter > Legacy > Slow Filter Mode parameter would be fixed on Up even when set to Down—FIXEDDelay > Cosmos Echo could exhibit a \"ramp up\" sound when enabled—FIXEDHX Effects only—Pressing and holding FS1+FS4 to cycle through Bank, Preset, and Snapshot Up/Down could inadvertently continue cycling through banks—FIXEDMany other minor fixes and improvements",{"id":1184,"title":86,"titles":1185,"content":1186,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-10#known-issues",[1062],"Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computersAs Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved againIn rare cases, after importing a .WAV file into the 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block set to the same index, all audio output can stopHelix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connectionHelix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messagesHX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freezeHX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the rightImpulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported",{"id":1188,"title":1189,"titles":1190,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-11","Release Notes 3.11 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1192,"title":1193,"titles":1194,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#helixhx-firmware-311","Helix/HX Firmware 3.11",[],{"id":1196,"title":81,"titles":1197,"content":1198,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#bug-fixes",[1193],"HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display \"MULTIPLE X\" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXEDHX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXEDHX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXEDReceiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXEDIn some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED",{"id":1200,"title":1201,"titles":1202,"content":1203,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#how-do-i-update-to-311","How do I update to 3.11?",[1193],"Any chance you've already updated HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021) or 3.10 (released on April 15, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including backing everything up to your computer. If you updated HX Edit to 3.10, THAT IS THE NEWEST VERSION AS OF THIS WRITING.",{"id":1205,"title":1206,"titles":1207,"content":1208,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#i-updated-but-why-dont-i-see-model-x","I updated but why don't I see Model X?",[1193],"HX Edit can't magically see new models added to your Helix/HX hardware; you must update HX Edit at well. Here's a link: macOS: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=10457Windows: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=10459",{"id":1210,"title":1211,"titles":1212,"content":1213,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#my-helixhx-is-at-version-xxx-can-i-go-straight-to-311","My Helix/HX is at version X.XX. Can I go straight to 3.11?",[1193],"Absolutely, but note that if you're starting with a version lower than 2.80, the update will appear to happen twice. This is normal.",{"id":1215,"title":1076,"titles":1216,"content":1217,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#anything-else-i-should-know",[1193],"Yes. We STRONGLY recommend performing a factory reset AFTER UPDATING your Helix/HX firmware to 3.11 and THEN RESTORING YOUR BACKUP. (Backing up is part of the update process). Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS A FACTORY RESET WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK! Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LTHelix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix RackHX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 farthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX EffectsHX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX StompHX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp",{"id":1219,"title":1220,"titles":1221,"content":1222,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-11#known-issues-in-310311","Known Issues in 3.10/3.11",[1193],"User model defaults for Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper have been reset due to each model's new parameters—FIXEDHelix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computersAs Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved againIn rare cases, after importing a .WAV file into the 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block set to the same index, all audio output can stopHelix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connectionHelix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messagesHX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freezeHX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the rightImpulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported",{"id":1224,"title":1225,"titles":1226,"content":1227,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-15","Release Notes 3.15 - Helix/HX",[],"Helix/HX 3.15 includes a new Line 6 original amp, 10 new Helix effects, 18 additional Legacy effects, new features, additional improvements, and bug fixes, and is recommended for all users.",{"id":1229,"title":1230,"titles":1231,"content":1227,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#helixhx-firmware-315","Helix/HX Firmware 3.15",[],{"id":1233,"title":1234,"titles":1235,"content":1236,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#new-amp-in-315","New Amp in 3.15",[1230],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL",{"id":1238,"title":1239,"titles":1240,"content":1241,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#amppreamp-line-6-ventoux","Amp/Preamp > Line 6 Ventoux",[1230,1234],"Based on: Line 6 Original \"The amp model name is Ventoux, which is a mountain in the south of France that is a legendary cycling climb. I did it in 2018 and it was awesome and very hard. This model comes from a physical amp idea I had a while back. I was going to build it as a tube amp first. There are only so many hours in a day, though. The idea was to create a “coveted boutique amp” that had a different origin story. Most coveted boutique amps come from modified black panel Fenders or modified Marshall circuits. I wanted to do the same thing, but base it on the early 70s Orange circuits and the mid-wattage Fender Tweed circuits. Ventoux has a unique topology. In an indirect way, every knob is kind of a gain/drive control. The tone controls adjust the character and/or amount of the overdrive in those frequencies. This might be seen as complicated by some, but I find it exciting and full of possibilities.\" —Ben Adrian, Sound Design Manager Drive—Controls the amount of amp driveHP Filter—Higher values result in tighter distortions and thinner cleans; lower values result in looser distortions and warmer cleansMid—Allows for more character than most. At lower values it's like the scooped sounds of traditional 60s Fender amps; at higher values it's flatter, like the 50s tweed amps that have very little tone-shaping in the circuits. Plus, a full-up mid sound will get a nice crunch when Drive is upPresence/Depth—You may have noticed this amp was lacking regular bass and treble controls. That is accounted for with Depth and Presence controls; bass and treble for the power amp. These actually occur in the circuit just before phase inverter, but they really need the whole power amp to function. They also affect the character of the power amp distortionCh Vol—Sets the overall level of the Amp blockMaster—Ventoux's Master volume exists in an \"impossible\" place for a physical amp. Generally, you'll want to leave this at 10.0, like a vintage amp with no master volume. However, a variety of textures can be had by reducing the level",{"id":1243,"title":1244,"titles":1245,"content":1246,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#new-effects-in-315","New Effects in 3.15",[1230],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL",{"id":1248,"title":1249,"titles":1250,"content":1251,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#dynamics-ampeg-opto-comp","Dynamics > Ampeg Opto Comp",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), based on the Ampeg Opto Comp compressor pedal. Compress—This is actually a ratio control, which controls the amount of compression. At 0.0, the ratio is 1:1; at 5.0, the ratio is at 3:1, and at 10.0, the ratio is at 10:1Release—Controls how long it takes for the compressor to stop reducing gain. At 0.0, the release is 75 ms; at 10.0, the release is around 600 msMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the compressor. When set to 0%, no compressed signal is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Sets the overall level of the block",{"id":1253,"title":1254,"titles":1255,"content":1256,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#modulation-ampeg-liquifier","Modulation > Ampeg Liquifier",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), based on the Ampeg Liquifier chorus pedal. Rate—Adjusts the speed of the chorus' low-frequency oscillator (LFO) from slow to fast.Depth—Adjusts the amplitude of the modulation, from mild to deep.Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the chorus. When set to 0%, no chorus is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardType—Liquifier is actually two choruses in one, hence the \"Dual\" default. If you'd prefer it to behave more like a traditional chorus pedal, choose \"Single\"Headroom—Some mod pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedalLevel—Sets the overall level of the block",{"id":1258,"title":1259,"titles":1260,"content":1261,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-heliosphere","Delay > Heliosphere",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original A delay with reverb injected into the feedback loop. Time—Sets the delay time. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note valuesFeedback—Controls the overall number of repeats. To hear only one repeat, set to 0%Rate—Controls the rate or speed of modulationDepth—Controls the depth or amount of modulationMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Sets the overall level of the blockScale—For stereo delays, the Time parameter sets the left side. The right side's time is always some percentage of the left's time, and is determined by the Scale parameter. For example, if Time is set to 500ms, and Scale is set to 70%, the left delay is 500ms and the right delay is 350ms (or 70% of 500ms). When scale is set to 100%, left and right delays are the sameRev Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb inside the delay's feedback loop. When set to 0%, no reverb is heardRev Decay—Sets the decay of the reverbHeadroom—Some delay pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedalTrails—When set to \"Off,\" delay repeats are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" delay repeats continue to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1263,"title":1264,"titles":1265,"content":1266,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-adt","Delay > ADT",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original double-tracking tape emulation. Delay 1, Delay 2—Sets the delay time for each deck. Delay 1 can go up to 20ms and Delay 2 can go up to 200msWowFlutr1, WowFlutr2—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard for each deckSaturate1, Saturate2— Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a toneDeck 1 Vol, Deck 2 Vol—Sets the level of each deck independently. Deck 2 is a bit lower than Deck 1 by defaultDeck 2 Pol—Flips the polarity of deck 2Mod Rate—Controls the rate or speed of modulation applied to Deck 2ModDepth—Controls the depth or amount of modulation applied to Deck 2Level—Sets the overall level of the blockTapeSpeed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the WowFluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape emulationTexture— Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortionLow Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the decks, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the decks, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyDeck 1 Pan, Deck 2 Pan—Pans each deck left and rightEnvThresh—Sets the level above which engages the envelope. When on, picking harder can impart very slight pitch fluctuations by tweaking Deck 2's delay. Subtle, but funTrails—When set to \"Off,\" delay repeats are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" delay repeats continue to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1268,"title":1269,"titles":1270,"content":1271,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-crisscross","Delay > Crisscross",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original dual delay with cross-feedback between the two delay lines. Time A, Time B—Sets the delay time for each of the two delay lines. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note valuesFeedbk A, Feedback B—Controls the number of repeats for each delay line. To hear only one repeat, set to 0%Pan A, Pan B—To achieve the widest stereo field, set Pan A to L100 and Pan B to R100Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Sets the overall level of the blockCrossfeed—Controls the amount of the A delay line fed back into the B delay line and vice versaHeadroom—Some delay pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedalMod Rate—Controls the rate or speed of modulationMod Depth—Controls the depth or amount of modulationShape—Sets the modulation's wave shape (Sine or Triangle)Phase—Determines the modulation's phase relationship between the two delay lines. At 0°, the delay lines modulate together; at 180°, modulation is inverted from one anotherBit Depth—Lowers the bit depth of the delay repeats for a grungier sound. For more transparent results, set to \"24 bits\"Sample Rate—Lowers the sample rate of the delay repeats for a grungier sound. For more transparent results, set to \"48kHz\"Low Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the repeats, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the repeats, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyTrails—When set to \"Off,\" delay repeats are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" delay repeats continue to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1273,"title":1274,"titles":1275,"content":1276,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-tesselator","Delay > Tesselator",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Tesselator is part morphing delay, part loop sampler, part drone machine. It's stellar for creating rhythmic pads, textures, or pitch/filter ramp effects to play over and has been placed in the Delay category so you can run multiple instances at once. Once audio is captured and repeating, you can effectively transition/morph between two states—First and Last, each with its own time, speed/pitch, HP filter, and LP filter—by applying increasing amounts to each repeat until the target settings are reached. Assign Tesselator to a stomp footswitch. It's bypassed by default. Play a chord and while it's ringing, press the Tesselator switch. Audio captured BEFORE the switch press is repeated and manipulated by the following parameters: First—Determines the length of the first step in the sequence, that is, the length of repeated audio when first engaged. Press the knob to toggle between ms and note valuesLast—Determines the length of the last step in the sequence. If shorter than the First step's time, the sequence will get shorter; if longer than the First step's time, the sequence will get longer. If First and Last are the same time, the sequence length remains constant (Ex. 1 below). Press the knob to toggle between ms and note valuesSteps—Determines how many steps there are in the sequence (1 ~ 50). For example, if your first step is 100ms and your last step is 500ms, each successive step in the sequence will lengthen from 100ms to 500ms. The more steps you have, the longer it takes to reach the last step and therefore, the longer it takes to alter the sequence's characteristicsDirection—Determines the direction of the steps:\nForward: Each step plays back normally (Ex. 2a below)Reverse: Each step plays back in reverse (Ex. 2b below)Fwd/Rev: Steps alternate between forward and reverse (Ex. 2c below)Boomerang—When off, the last step in the sequence repeats indefinitely. When on, all steps play forward, then backward, then forward again, etc. (Ex. 3a below)Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Tesselator is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)\n\"Mute All\"—When Tesselator is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED\"Dry Kill\"—When Tesselator is on, only the effected signal is heard. TIP: With Tesselator on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the effected signal in and out by switching between the two values\"Normal\" (default)—When Tesselator is on, both the dry and effected signals are heardType—Determines whether any speed/pitch changes across the sequence reference a static or semitone value\n\"Speed\" (default)—Sets the target speed of the last step. Use the Speed parameter to set the specific value (0.0x speed ~ 2.0x speed)\"Pitch\"—Sets the target pitch of the last step. Use the Pitch parameter to set the value (-12 ~ +12 semitones; see Ex. 3c below)Speed—Sets the target speed for the last step. For example, if set to \"2.0x,\" the last step will be twice as fast as the first step and if set to \"0.0x,\" the last step will appear to stop completely. Disabled unless Type is set to \"Speed\"Pitch—Sets the target pitch for the last step. For example, if set to \"-12\", the last step will be an octave lower than the first step. Disabled unless Type is set to \"Pitch\" (see Ex. 3c below)HP Filter—Very different from Helix's traditional Low Cut and High Cut filters. Sets the high-pass (low cut) filter target for the last step. For example, if set to a higher value, each successive step will filter out more bass until the last step of the sequenceLP Filter—Very different from Helix's traditional Low Cut and High Cut filters. Sets the low-pass (high cut) filter target for the last step. For example, if set to a higher value, each successive step will filter out more treble until the last step of the sequence (Ex. 3b below)FX Level—Controls the level of the effected signalLevel—Controls the overall output level of the block Woohoo! More charts and diagrams! Tesselator is capable of hundreds of unique sounds, and it's impossible to illustrate them all, but here are a few examples: Example 1: If Knob 1 (First) and Knob 2 (Last) are set to the same value (say, 1/4 note), the same length of audio repeats until Tesselator is bypassed. In this case, it acts very much like Delay > Ratchet, except the audio is captured BEFORE the stomp press, not after. Example 2: If Knob 2 (Last) is set to a shorter time than Knob 1 (First), steps in the sequence progressively get shorter (Ex. 2a). If Last is set to a longer time than First, steps in the sequence progressively get longer. The last step is repeated indefinitely until Tesselator is bypassed. Setting Direction to \"Reverse\" (Ex. 2b) reverses all steps; setting Direction to \"Fwd/Rev\" (Ex. 2c) alternates between forward and reversed steps. Example 3: Turning Boomerang to \"On\" plays the entire step sequence forward, then backward, then forward again, etc. (Ex. 3a) Increasing LP Filter to a higher value progressively darkens each step in the sequence (Ex. 3b). Increasing HP Filter to a higher value progressively thins out each step in the sequence. Setting Type to \"Pitch\" and Pitch to a value other than \"0\" will change the pitch of each step until it lands on the target pitch at the last step. For example, if Pitch is set to \"+5\" and you play an E note, the last note in the sequence will be an A, or 5 steps higher (Ex. 3c). If you want the last A note to repeat indefinitely instead of stepping back down to E, turn Boomerang back to \"Off.\" You can change all of these parameters while Tesselator is... tessellating, to create evolving, engaging soundscapes. Run it into Pitch > Dual Pitch and Reverb > Shimmer and prepare to waste hours in drone land.",{"id":1278,"title":1279,"titles":1280,"content":1281,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-ratchet","Delay > Ratchet",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original buffer sampler/delay. Used to capture and loop a short snippet of audio (whose length is determined by the Time parameter) while the block is enabled. Great for rhythmic stutter effects. You could almost consider Ratchet a simplified version of Tesselator, where the audio is captured AFTER the footswitch press, not before. Assign Ratchet to a stomp footswitch. It's bypassed by default. While playing, press the Ratchet switch. Audio captured AFTER the switch press is repeated for as long as the block is enabled. For this reason, it may be best to make the switch momentary, and only step on the Ratchet switch when you change chords, almost like a really messed up (and by messed up, we mean awesome) sustain pedal. Time—Predetermines the length of the audio to be recorded and looped. To loop an entire 4/4 bar, choose \"1/1\"; to stutter your playing, start with \"1/16\" or \"1/32\"Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Ratchet is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)\n\"Mute All\"—When Ratchet is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED\"Dry Kill\"—When Ratchet is on, only the effected signal is heard. TIP: With Ratchet on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the effected signal in and out by switching between the two values\"Normal\" (default)—When Ratchet is on, both the dry and effected signals are heardFX Level—Controls the level of the looped audioLevel—Controls the overall output level of the block",{"id":1283,"title":1284,"titles":1285,"content":1286,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#reverb-dynamic-plate","Reverb > Dynamic Plate",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original A plate reverb typically found in high-end studio rack reverbs. Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the plate. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signalsDamping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were emptyMotRate—Motion Rate, or how fast the echoes' intensity changes, due to changes in plate tension or temperatureMotRng—Motion Range, or how much the internal delays change. Similar to the modulation control on older tank reverbsMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLow Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is appliedLow Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequenciesLow Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails—When set to \"Off,\" the reverb decay is instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" the reverb continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1288,"title":1289,"titles":1290,"content":1291,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#reverb-dynamic-room","Reverb > Dynamic Room",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original A room reverb typically found in high-end studio rack reverbs. Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 3.0 sec)Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the room. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signalsDamping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your room is full of people wearing foam high school mascot costumes, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were emptyDiffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signalMotRate—Motion Rate, or how quickly the room's shape may be changing, due to people moving, doors opening or closing, etc.Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLow Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is appliedLow Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequenciesLow Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyEarlyReflc—Level—Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails—When set to \"Off,\" the reverb decay is instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" the reverb continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1293,"title":1294,"titles":1295,"content":1296,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#reverb-shimmer","Reverb > Shimmer",[1230,1244],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original A shimmer reverb. We originally planned to release Shimmer as two distinctly different reverbs—Luster and Sheen—but combining them into a single model and letting you seamlessly switch back and forth via a footswitch or snapshots seemed cooler. Type—Determines the type of shimmer effect applied. TIP: Assign Type to a footswitch (or snapshots) to try both within the same preset\n\"Luster\"—More of a traditional, reverb pedal-type shimmer effect with tighter definition in the lustery bits\"Sheen\" (default)—More of a lush, studio plugin-type shimmer effect with a massive, sheeny bloomPitch 1—Sets the interval of the first pitchshifter. Set to \"Oct Up\" for more traditional shimmer sounds; set to \"Oct Down\" for something a bit creepier. Note that Pitch 1 and Pitch 2 have 0.1 semitone resolution between -1and +1Pitch 2—Sets the interval of the second pitchshifterIntensity—Controls the mix between the pitchshifted and non-pitchshifted reverbFeedback—Numbers of times the pitchshifting recirculates through the reverbPitch Blend—Controls how much of Pitch 1 is heard vs. Pitch 2 (set to \"Even\" by default)Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardDecay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec or Infinity)Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the room. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signalsRoom Size—Sets the size of the room (10, 20, or 30 meters)Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbedDiffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signalMotion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signalLow Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails—When set to \"Off,\" the reverb decay is instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" the reverb continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected",{"id":1298,"title":1299,"titles":1300,"content":1301,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#new-legacy-effects-in-315","New Legacy Effects in 3.15",[1230],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL 18 additional effects—most from the FX Junkie model pack for POD Farm 2.5—have been added to the Legacy subcategory in their respective effects categories. Don't sleep on these!",{"id":1303,"title":1304,"titles":1305,"content":1306,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#distortion-bronze-master-legacy","Distortion > Bronze Master (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Based on the Maestro® Bass Brassmaster. Originally designed for bass, but equally cool on guitar, the Maestro® Bass Brassmaster is considered by many to be the Holy Grail of bass distortion units, an ultra-rare bird designed in the early 70’s for Maestro® by synth genius Tom Oberheim NOTE: The Blend parameter is not like overall distortion Mix; instead, it sets how much of the filtered signal passes through the clipping/octave circuitry",{"id":1308,"title":1309,"titles":1310,"content":1311,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#distortion-killer-z-legacy","Distortion > Killer Z (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Based on the BOSS® Metal Zone MT-2. Equipped with a dual gain circuit, the MT-2 provides amazing sustain plus heavy mids and lows similar to a stack of overdriven amps. We’ve simplified the EQ controls a bit to make the Killer Z model, but you’ll still find the sought after flavor of the MT-2 style sound",{"id":1313,"title":1314,"titles":1315,"content":1316,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#modulation-tape-eater-legacy","Modulation > Tape Eater (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. If you’ve ever had a cassette player eat a tape before you’ll know what we’re talking about. Try this with a slow speed setting and a 100% wet mix",{"id":1318,"title":1319,"titles":1320,"content":1321,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#modulation-warble-matic-legacy","Modulation > Warble-Matic (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. This effect is reminiscent of the Sweeper model, but when used subtly it can produce a nice mild phasey sound or with Depth maxed out you can simulate the sound of an alien spacecraft landing in one of those old 50’s sci-fi movies",{"id":1323,"title":1324,"titles":1325,"content":1326,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#modulation-random-sh-legacy","Modulation > Random S&H (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. This has a similar effect as the old Oberheim® Voltage Controlled Filter. It creates changes in tone by randomly emphasizing certain frequencies. Try pressing the Speed knob to lock it to tempo and playing single chords to that tempo",{"id":1328,"title":1329,"titles":1330,"content":1331,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#modulation-sweeper-legacy","Modulation > Sweeper (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. Imagine having 2 wah pedals on steroids separated in a stereo field that are pulsating in opposite positions and you’re close to what you’ll hear here. Use the Q and Freq parameters to set the character of the sweep and adjust Depth to go from subtle to full on freak out. Any resemblance to guitar tracks heard in a particular genre of B films is strictly coincidental",{"id":1333,"title":1334,"titles":1335,"content":1336,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-phaze-eko-legacy","Delay > Phaze Eko (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. Starting with the basic tone of our EP-1 tape delay emulation, they’ve added something very much like a Uni-Vibe to the delay repeats. The result is an echo unit that gives you unique new creative possibilities for adjusting the tone of your delays with a beautiful, burbling texture",{"id":1338,"title":1339,"titles":1340,"content":1341,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#delay-bubble-echo-legacy","Delay > Bubble Echo (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. Bubble Echo has a sample-and-hold filter on the repeats. It takes a filter sweep (like the one on Sweep Echo), chops it up into little bits, and rearranges them semi-randomly, so that it sounds like sudden little bits of wah pedal randomly sprinkled about",{"id":1343,"title":1344,"titles":1345,"content":1346,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-synth-lead-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Synth Lead (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. These are styled after popular analog monophonic synth lead sounds from Moog, ARP and Sequential Circuits",{"id":1348,"title":1349,"titles":1350,"content":1351,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-string-theory-legacy","Pitch/Synth > String Theory (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. This emulates classic synth string sounds like those found in the ARP Solina String Ensemble and the Elka® Synthex. The harder you pick, the brighter the sound. We somehow had two separate effects called \"Synth String\"—one from POD Farm 2.5 and the other from FM4, which was already added to Helix/HX in 1.50. Renamed the POD Farm version \"String Theory\" to avoid confusion",{"id":1353,"title":1354,"titles":1355,"content":1356,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-synth-fx-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Synth FX (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. These sounds aren’t really designed to be musical. These are more \"special effects\" sounds. You’ll hear a lot of these kinds of sounds in movie soundtracks",{"id":1358,"title":1359,"titles":1360,"content":1361,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-buzz-wave-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Buzz Wave (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. These are cool combinations of saw and square waves with fast vibrato. The 8 different Wave parameters offer different vibrato speeds and different pitches",{"id":1363,"title":1364,"titles":1365,"content":1366,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-rez-synth-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Rez Synth (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. These are all sweeping low pass filter effects with the resonance set high. Resonance is a peak at the frequency of the low pass filter",{"id":1368,"title":1369,"titles":1370,"content":1371,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-saturn-5-ring-mod-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Saturn 5 Ring Mod (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. Ring modulators take two signals (one supplied by your guitar, the other supplied by the effect) then adds and subtracts similar frequencies. Electro-Harmonix® makes a ring modulator pedal called the Frequency Analyzer that is a popular guitar effect. The only limiting factor is that the pitch of the signal provided by the effect is constant. Meaning you have to play only in the key of that pitch to be musical",{"id":1373,"title":1374,"titles":1375,"content":1376,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-double-bass-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Double Bass (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. This effect has two oscillators that track the pitch of your guitar—one square wave tuned one octave down, and one saw tooth wave two octaves down",{"id":1378,"title":1379,"titles":1380,"content":1381,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-seismik-synth-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Seismik Synth (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. This effect has an oscillator that tracks the pitch of your guitar. You can choose between 8 different wave shapes which give you different \"flavors\"—all of them one or two octaves down from the original pitch",{"id":1383,"title":1384,"titles":1385,"content":1386,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-analog-synth-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Analog Synth (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. These are great for funky synth guitar (or bass) lines. These sounds were made popular by Moog and ARP",{"id":1388,"title":1389,"titles":1390,"content":1391,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#pitchsynth-synth-harmony-legacy","Pitch/Synth > Synth Harmony (Legacy)",[1230,1299],"Line 6 Original. If you loved those big synth leads from 70’s era prog bands then you’ll love this effect. There are two synth waves at work here. Your first two parameters allow you to choose a pitch interval of your original note played. The Wave parameter works differently from what you’d expect with the other synth models; here it controls the gain of the saw wave, while the square wave gain remains constant",{"id":1393,"title":1394,"titles":1395,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#new-features-in-315","New Features in 3.15",[1230],{"id":1397,"title":1398,"titles":1399,"content":1400,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#input-block-per-preset-guitar-pad","Input Block > Per-Preset Guitar Pad",[1230,1394],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL The Input > Multi and Input > Guitar block now has an additional Guitar Pad parameter that lets you engage the analog guitar pad per preset (\"Off\" or \"On). Or you could leave it set to \"Global\" and continue to turn the guitar pad on and off from the Global Settings menu. For HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL, \"Global\" refers to the Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Input Level setting. When Pad is on, it's the same as if Input Level is set to \"Line\"; when off, it's the same as if Input Level is set to \"Instrument.\"",{"id":1402,"title":1403,"titles":1404,"content":1405,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#global-midi-control-of-knobs-1-6-pagepage-and-preset-save","Global MIDI Control of Knobs 1-6, \u003C PAGE/PAGE >, and Preset Save",[1230,1394],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Instead of manually having to assign parameters to incoming MIDI CC messages, Knobs 1-6 for any block on the Home screen (Knobs 1-3 on HX Effects, HX Stomp, or HX Stomp XL) respond to new global MIDI CCs. This turns any programmable MIDI keyboard or tabletop controller into a simple way to edit blocks without having to reach down (for those of you who can't be bothered to use Pedal Edit Mode). In addition, sending Helix/HX a CC74 message will save any changes to the preset. IMPORTANT! We ran out of reserved Global CCs and unfortunately had to steal five user-assignable CCs for this feature. Any parameters you've assigned to CC77-CC81 will have to be remapped. Sorry 'bout that.",{"id":1407,"title":1408,"titles":1409,"content":1410,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-15#other-changes-and-improvements-in-315","Other Changes and Improvements in 3.15",[1230],"HX Stomp XL only: Global Settings > Footswitches > Snapshot Mode adds a third value—Toggle, like the one in HX Effects and POD Go. This remembers whether Preset Mode is in Preset or Snapshot mode and allows for toggling between Stomp and Snapshot mode via the MODE switchThe max delay time for several Delay > Legacy models has been increased from 2 seconds to 2.5 secondsNumerous additional minor improvements to Delay > Legacy modelsDelay > Multitap 6 has been optimized to use less than half the DSP as in pre-3.15 buildsMIDI CC69 values are now transmitted upon snapshot changeCommand Center > HX Snapshot commands are now affected themselves by snapshot changes. This means the same stomp switch could recall a different, specific snapshot (or next or previous snapshot) per snapshotCommand Center > HX Snapshot command parameters can now be controlled by Snapshots themselves. For example, imagine that you are on Snapshot 1 and create an HX Snapshot command on FS2. You set it so that pressing that switch recalls Snapshot 3. You then switch to Snapshot 3 and set the same switch to recall Snapshot 6. Recall Snapshot 6 and set the switch to recall Snapshot 2. Finally, you recall Snapshot 2 and set the switch to recall Snapshot 1. Now, you go back to Snapshot 1 and begin pressing the switch. Each successive press recalls the assigned Snapshot and you would cycle Snapshot  1 -> 3 -> 6 -> 2 -> 1 -> 3 -> 6 -> 2 and so on for each switch press. This assumes that the Snapshot Edits global is set to Recall. If it's set to Discard, you'd have to save the preset after each set in order for the changes to stick. Bypass Assign > EXP Pedal 1/2 now has a new Behavior parameter to control how bypassing is handled. The default value \"Toggle\" behaves as this feature always has - bringing the pedal past threshold will toggle the block's bypass state from what it is currently (i.e. enable if currently bypassed and vice versa). \"Toe Down\" and \"Heel Down\" always bypass the block at the designated position, regardless of the block's starting state. So with \"Heel Down\" selected, the block will always enable when you cross the Position threshold and bypass when you return below itWe ran out of reserved Global CCs and unfortunately had to steal five user-assignable CCs for MIDI control of Knobs 1-6 and \u003C PAGE/PAGE >. Any parameters you've assigned to CC77-CC81 will have to be remappedEncoder ballistics have been improved. For parameters with hundreds of values, you can now go from Min to Max in a couple of turns",{"id":1412,"title":1413,"titles":1414,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-50","Release Notes 3.50 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1416,"title":1417,"titles":1418,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#helixhx-firmware-350","Helix/HX Firmware 3.50",[],{"id":1420,"title":1421,"titles":1422,"content":1423,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#all-new-cab-enginenew-cabs","All New Cab Engine/New Cabs",[1417],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Thousands of impulses were captured with Sound Design's new IR capture system and consolidated into 24 all new cabs. And due to Helix Core's new FIR acceleration, a new cab uses 66-80% less DSP than a pre-3.50 Hybrid cab. As such, cab subcategories have been updated: Single—One new cabDual—Two new cabsLegacy Single—One older Hybrid cabLegacy Dual—Two older Hybrid cabs Amp+Cab subcategories have been updated as well: Guitar—Guitar Amp+new cabBass—Bass Amp+new cabGuitar+Legacy—Guitar Amp+older Hybrid cabBass+Legacy—Bass Amp+older Hybrid cab With Cab > Dual blocks, you can now also choose whether changing the first cab automatically recalls a matching cab for the second. Leave this on and then change the mic, distance, if you want to emulate the sound of two mics on the same cab or turn this off if you want full independent control over both IRs. From the Global Settings menu, select the Preferences page.Press PAGE > until you see Link Dual Cabs. When set to \"On\" (default), changing the first cab automatically loads a matching cab for the second. Choose this option if you want to emulate the sound of two different mics (or two of the same mic with different angles or positions) on the same cab. When set to \"Off,\" both cabs are completely independent of one another.Alternatively, in HX Edit, click the Link Dual Cabs icon. Off (left) and On (right):",{"id":1425,"title":1426,"titles":1427,"content":1428,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-guitar-cabs","New Guitar Cabs",[1417,1421],"Cab > 1x10 US Princess (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1x10\" Fender Princeton Eminence CopperheadCab > 1x12 Grammatico (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1x12\" Grammatico LaGrange P12QCab > 1x12 US Deluxe (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1×12″ Fender® Deluxe OxfordCab > 1x12 Cali EXT (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1x12\" Mesa Boogie Extension CabCab > 2x12 Blue Bell (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×12″ Vox® AC-30 Fawn BlueCab > 2x12 Double C12N (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×12″ Fender® Twin C12NCab > 2x12 Jazz Rivet (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×12″ Roland® JC-120Cab > 2x12 Mail C12Q (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×12″ Silvertone® 1484Cab > 2x12 Mandarin 30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2x12\" Orange PPC212 V30Cab > 4x10 Tweed P10R (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×10″ Fender® Bassman® P10RCab > 4x12 Greenback25 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Marshall® Basketweave G12 M25Cab > 4x12 1960A T75 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Marshall® 1960A T75Cab > 4x12 Blackback 30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Park® 75 G12 H30Cab > 4x12 Brit V30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Marshall® 1960AV V30Cab > 4x12 Cali V30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ MESA/Boogie® 4FB V30Cab > 4x12 Mandarin EM (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Orange® EminenceCab > 4x12 MOO)))N T75 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4x12\" Sunn Cab w/G75TCab > 4x12 Uber T75 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Bogner® Uberkab T75Cab > 4x12 Uber V30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Bogner® Uberkab V30Cab > 4x12 XXL V30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ ENGL® XXL V30Mic—Select from up to 12 mics:57 Dynamic—Shure® SM57421 Dynamic—Sennheiser® MD 421-U7 Dynamic—Shure® SM7906 Dynamic—Sennheiser® e90630 Dynamic—Heil Sound® PR 30121 Ribbon—Royer® R-121160 Ribbon—Beyerdynamic® M 1604038 Ribbon—Coles 403884 Ribbon—AEA R84414 Cond—AKG® C414 XLS47 Cond FET—Neumann® U47 FET67 Cond—Neumann® U67Position—Sets the lateral location of the mic in relation to the speaker cone. Choose from Center, 0.1 ~ 2.2, Cap Edge, 2.4 ~ 9.9, and EdgeDistance—Sets the distance of the mic from the speaker cone. Choose from 1.00\" to 12.00\" in 1/4\" incrementsAngle—Sets the angle of the mic. 0 degrees is pointing directly at the speaker, 45 degrees is pointing off-axisLow Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumbleHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshnessLevel—Sets the overall level of the cabPan (Cab > Dual only)—Moves the signal left or right across the stereo sound field. For example, if you're running a stereo playback system with two or more speakers, panning the first cab to Left 100 and the second cab to Right 100 can make your tone sound notably wider. Press the knob to return to CenterDelay (Cab > Dual only)—Although the new cabs in 3.50 perfectly line up with one another, there may be situations where you want to delay one side very slightly, to perhaps impart a bit of phase incoherence or at higher values, to increase the apparent stereo spread. A little goes a long way here",{"id":1430,"title":1431,"titles":1432,"content":1433,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-bass-cabs","New Bass Cabs",[1417,1421],"Cab > 1x15 Ampeg B-15 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1×15″ Ampeg® B-15Cab > 2×15 Brute (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×15″ MESA/Boogie® 2×15 EVCab > 4×10 Garden (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4x10\" Eden D410XLTCab > 8x10 SVT AV (Single, Dual), captured from* the 8×10″ Ampeg® SVT® (SVT-810AV Heritage Edition)Mic—Select from up to 12 mics:57 Dynamic—Shure® SM57421 Dynamic—Sennheiser® MD 421-U7 Dynamic—Shure® SM788 Dynamic—Beyerdynamic® M88TG52 Dynamic—Shure® Beta 52A112 Dynamic—AKG® D112D6 Dynamic—Audix D640 Dynamic—Heil Sound® PR 404038 Ribbon—Coles 4038414 Cond—AKG® C414 TLII47 Cond FET—Neumann® U47 FET67 Cond—Neumann® U67All other parameters the same as for guitar cabs (see above)",{"id":1435,"title":242,"titles":1436,"content":1236,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-amps",[1417],{"id":1438,"title":1439,"titles":1440,"content":1441,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#amppreamp-moon-t-nrm","Amp/Preamp > MOO)))N T Nrm",[1417,242],"Based on: the normal channel of the Sunn Model T The Moon model is based on a 1974, silver knob Sunn Model T amplifier. This is the early version with the more traditional tone stack. Though it has been repaired over the years, the circuit has every component at stock value. This specific unit has been well used, well maintained, and regularly enveloped in fog. \"This amp circuit can best be described as a Fender Tweed Bassman/Marshall JTM45 preamp mated with a very high volume, very flat, ultralinear power amp that uses 6550 tubes. The result of this configuration is a tone with a raw growl that really has a strong punch to the gut. In addition, this configuration takes pedals very well; adding a distortion or booster can turn the amp into a high gain, doom machine.\" —Ben Adrian, Sound Design Manager",{"id":1443,"title":1444,"titles":1445,"content":1446,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#amppreamp-moon-t-brt","Amp/Preamp > MOO)))N T Brt",[1417,242],"Based on: the bright channel of the Sunn Model T",{"id":1448,"title":1449,"titles":1450,"content":1451,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#amppreamp-moon-t-jump","Amp/Preamp > MOO)))N T Jump",[1417,242],"Based on: the normal and bright channels jumped in the Sunn Model T",{"id":1453,"title":1454,"titles":1455,"content":1456,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#amppreamp-pv-vitriol-crunch","Amp/Preamp > PV Vitriol Crunch",[1417,242],"Based on: the crunch channel of the Peavey Invective Peavey designed this 6L6 tube-powered monster in collaboration with Misha Mansoor of Periphery, with the goal of offering no-compromise, high-gain performance and flexibility.",{"id":1458,"title":1459,"titles":1460,"content":1461,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#amppreamp-pv-vitriol-lead","Amp/Preamp > PV Vitriol Lead",[1417,242],"Based on: the lead channel of the Peavey Invective",{"id":1463,"title":252,"titles":1464,"content":1246,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-effects",[1417],{"id":1466,"title":1467,"titles":1468,"content":1469,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#distortion-pillars-od","Distortion > Pillars OD",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), based on* the Earthquaker Devices Plumes distortion. Gain—Sets the amount of distortionTone—Sets the overall tonal balance of the distortionLevel—Sets the overall level of the blockMode—Chooses the type of clipping circuit—1 is LED, 2 is Clean Opamp, 3 is Asymmetrical",{"id":1471,"title":1472,"titles":1473,"content":1474,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#distortion-vital-dist","Distortion > Vital Dist",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), based on* the Earthquaker Devices Life pedal (distortion side) Gain—Sets the amount of distortionFilter—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the signal, letting you remove treble frequencies. At 0.0, no filter is appliedLevel—Sets the overall level of the blockClipping—Chooses the type of clipping circuit—Opamp, Asymmetrical, or SymmetricalOctave—Blends in a signal one octave up. At 0.0, no octave signal is heard. Works best when playing single notes",{"id":1476,"title":1477,"titles":1478,"content":1479,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#distortion-vital-boost","Distortion > Vital Boost",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), based on* the Earthquaker Devices Life pedal (boost side) Boost—Sets the output level of the boost circuit",{"id":1481,"title":1482,"titles":1483,"content":1484,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#modulation-4-voice-chorus","Modulation > 4-Voice Chorus",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original Rate—Adjusts the speed of the chorus’ low-frequency oscillator (LFO) from slow to fastDepth—Adjusts the amplitude of the modulation, from mild to deepVoices—Determines the number of voices in the chorus (2, 3, or 4)Low Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the chorus, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHighShelf—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the chorus. When set to 0%, no chorus is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Controls the overall output level of the block",{"id":1486,"title":1487,"titles":1488,"content":1489,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#modulation-flexovibe","Modulation > FlexoVibe",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original Rate—Adjusts the speed of the chorus’ low-frequency oscillator (LFO) from slow to fastIntensity—Adjusts the amplitude of the modulation, from mild to deepWarp—Controls the shape of the LFO. At 0.0, the LFO waveform is a triangle; at +1.0 and -1.0, the waveforms exhibit more chaos, or \"warping\"Spread—Controls the phase offset between the two LFOs. At 0.0, no offset is heard; at 10.0, the two LFOs are separated by 180°. Generally sounds best somewhere in the middleMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the FlexoVibe effect. When set to 0%, no effect is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Controls the overall output level of the block",{"id":1491,"title":1492,"titles":1493,"content":1494,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#reverb-dynamic-ambience","Reverb > Dynamic Ambience",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original ambience reverb At less extreme settings can be used to \"open up\" the sound of your amp without applying a notable reverb effect. Also utilizes less DSP than other Dynamic reverbs. Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (8, 10, or 12 meters)Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signalsDamping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were emptyDiffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signalShape—Controls the blend of the Early and Late reflections. Turning the knob clockwise adds more Late reflections; turning the knob counterclockwise adds more Early reflections. Press the knob to reset to \"Even\"Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLow Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockTrails—When on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed",{"id":1496,"title":1497,"titles":1498,"content":1499,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#pitchsynth-boctaver","Pitch/Synth > Boctaver",[1417,252],"(Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® OC-2 Octaver –1 Oct—Sets the level of the signal one octave down–2 Oct—Sets the level of the signal two octaves downDry Level—Sets the level of the dry (unaffected) signal",{"id":1501,"title":101,"titles":1502,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-features",[1417],{"id":1504,"title":1505,"titles":1506,"content":1507,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#ir-dual-block","IR > Dual Block",[1417,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL 3.50 renames the Impulse Response > Mono subcategory to \"Single\" and adds a new subcategory: Dual. The IR > Dual block can accommodate two 1024-point IRs, you can pan them independently, flip the polarity of either one, and even slightly delay one vs. the other to account for any phase inconsistencies between IR developers. IR Select A—Selects the IR file for the first (A) slotLow Cut A—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the IR, letting you remove the signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut A—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the decks, letting you remove the signal above a certain frequencyLevel A—Sets the level of the first (A) IRPan A—Pans the IR left or right between stereo speakers. Press the knob to reset to CenterPolarity A—Flips the polarity of the IR's waveform. If your IR block suddenly makes everything sound thin, try setting this to \"Inverted\" to see if it helpsIR Select B—Selects the IR file for the second (B) slotLow Cut B—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the IR, letting you remove the signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut B—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the decks, letting you remove the signal above a certain frequencyLevel B—Sets the level of the second (B) IRPan B—Pans the IR left or right between stereo speakers. Press the knob to reset to CenterPolarity B—Flips the polarity of the IR's waveform. If your IR block suddenly makes everything sound thin, try setting this to \"Inverted\" to see if it helpsBoth Delay—Some IR files don't line up perfectly, especially when mixing and matching files from two different developers. This can result in phase incoherence or a thin, unfocused tone. Turning this knob clockwise delays the B side IR by a tiny bit; turning it counterclockwise delays the A side by a tiny bit. Press the knob to return Delay to \"None\"Both Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the IR block. For Cab IRs, you should leave this set to 100%, but when utilizing body resonance IRs for acoustic guitars, you may want to find the right blend between the IR and dry signal",{"id":1509,"title":1510,"titles":1511,"content":1512,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#new-cabs-and-irs-now-use-66-80-less-dsp","New Cabs and IRs now use 66-80% Less DSP",[1417,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects (IRs only), HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Due to further improvements to Helix Core, new Cabs and 1024-point IRs use roughly 66% less DSP as in 3.15 or earlier. Even the new IR > Dual block uses less DSP than a single IR block in 3.15. 2048-point IRs use roughly 80% less DSP, although they still use a lot of memory, so they're still limited to one per path.",{"id":1514,"title":1515,"titles":1516,"content":1517,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#disable-snapshot-control-over-parameter-assignments","Disable Snapshot Control over Parameter Assignments",[1417,101],"Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects (IRs only), HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL Prior to 3.50, when assigning a parameter to a physical control (EXP 1, footswitch, etc.) or MIDI, Snapshots are also always assigned. In 3.50, they still are, but there's an additional \"Snapshot Control\" parameter on the Controller Assign page that lets you bypass this default. From the Controller Assign menu, select the desired parameter and turn Knob 2 (Controller) to select any value other than \"None\" or \"Snapshots.\" A second page appears.Press PAGE > and turn Knob 1 (Snapshot Control) to \"Off.\" It's set to \"On\" by default for all parameters.",{"id":1519,"title":1028,"titles":1520,"content":1521,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#other-changes-and-improvements",[1417],"Encoder ballistics have been radically improved. You can now go from min to max with one knob turn.Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—SHORTCUT: While the Model List is open, pressing \"AMP\" jumps to highlight the Amp category without having to scroll down to itHelix Floor/Rack/LT only—The Impulse Response category's name has been shortened to \"IR\" (now matches that of HX Stomp/XL) to accommodate a wider subcategory column in the model list as well as accommodate longer IR names in the inspector header",{"id":1523,"title":1524,"titles":1525,"content":1526,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#bug-fixes-in-350","Bug Fixes in 3.50",[1417],"Reverb > Shimmer's Pitch parameter was inconsistent between hardware and HX Edit—FIXEDReverb > Dynamic Room's Mot Rate value range was inconsistent between hardware and HX Edit—FIXEDDelay > Stereo > ADT's Mod Rate value range was inconsistent between hardware and HX Edit—FIXEDDelay > Tesselator and Ratchet's Operation is set to \"Mute All,\" the signal would be muted even when bypassed—FIXEDWhen Global Settings > Preferences > Snapshot Edits is set to \"Discard,\" holding FS12 (SAVE+EXIT) while in Pedal Edit mode did not always save edited parameters when controlled by snapshots—FIXEDAfter loading a preset containing a Command Center > Instant > Ext Amp command, EXP Pedal 1 could sometimes stop functioning properly—FIXEDWhen a snapshot is reloaded, a duplicate MIDI PC message was not sent—FIXEDWhen many Command Center commands are assigned, snapshot names could sometimes disappear—FIXEDWhile in tuner view, attempting to restore globals could sometimes cause Helix to crash—FIXEDWhen assigning block bypass to an expression pedal, Behavior > \"Heel Down\" or \"Toe Down\" could sometimes revert to \"Toggle\"—FIXEDHX Stomp/HX Stomp XL only—Upon receiving MIDI CC73, changing views was not functioning as expected—FIXEDHX Stomp/HX Stomp XL only—Overly long favorite names could result in graphical glitches—FIXEDHX Stomp XL only—After changing presets using footswitches, capacitive sensing could become disabled until pressing a stomp switch—FIXEDHX Stomp XL only—When a Command Center > Snapshot Up or Down command is assigned to Footswitch 7 or 8, an extra Snapshot Up/Down message could occur—FIXEDHX Edit only—Copying and pasting an IR with more than 31 characters in the name would truncate the IR's name—FIXEDHX Stomp w/ HX Edit only—After restoring from a 3.01 backup, if path B exists, blocks move 1 position to the right—FIXEDMany other minor fixes and improvements",{"id":1528,"title":1529,"titles":1530,"content":1531,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-50#known-issues-in-350","Known Issues in 3.50",[1417],"In some cases, the Input block's Variax Tone Knob setting is not recalled across preset changesIn some cases, sending MIDI CC49-59 (footswitch emulation control) to engage stomp switches assigned to snapshot commands can result in inconsistent * behavior. Instead, send Helix CC69 messages (values 0-7) to recall snapshotsIn rare cases, attempting to fill all 128 user IR locations can result in a \"Failed to get impulse names\" -8207 error and the device will appear to be frozen on \"Transferring data.\" In the meantime, load 127 or fewer IRs at a timeIf Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to \"Press\" or \"Touch+Press,\" engaging multiple block bypasses assigned to the same switch (set to momentary) can sometimes appear to lagIn the Command Center, any MIDI notes assigned to a footswitch can sometimes unexpectedly trigger upon snapshot changesHelix Floor/Rack/LT only—If Path 1 is routed to Path 2, engaging the Tuner while Tuner Trails is on can sometimes mute the processed audio signalHelix Floor/Rack only—While in 10 Stomp footswitch mode, the momentary state of FS1 or FS7 can sometimes become reversedHX Effects only—If HX Effects is receiving MIDI clock, loading a new preset can sometimes cause the TAP LED to flash at double the tempo (audio is not affected, however)HX Edit only—In specific cases, moving a Path 2 block across a Split or Merge block can sometimes cause the block's location in the hardware to become out of sync",{"id":1533,"title":1534,"titles":1535,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-60","Release Notes 3.60 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1537,"title":1538,"titles":1539,"content":1540,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#helixhx-firmware-360","Helix/HX Firmware 3.60",[],"Helix/HX 3.60 includes 3 new amps, 9 new cabs, 2 new effects, additional improvements, and bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all users.",{"id":1542,"title":1543,"titles":1544,"content":1236,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#new-amps-in-360","New Amps in 3.60",[1538],{"id":1546,"title":1547,"titles":1548,"content":1549,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#amppreamp-grammatico-gsg-based-on-the-grammatico-gsg100","Amp/Preamp > Grammatico GSG, based on* the Grammatico GSG100.",[1538,1543],"\"The Grammatico GSG100 is an amp based on the study of Dumble amps made around 1980. This model aims to capture all the unique details of this amplifier circuit, many of which are quite different than popular guitar amps from the major companies. The GSG100 is a feature-rich and complicated amp. There are many amazing sounds in the amp; however, the controls allow for such a wide range of adjustment that it's possible to get unpleasant sounds from it as well. To best use the amp, it really helps to know exactly what each of these features is doing to the guitar signal. Let's go through the parameters as they are found in the Helix model:\" —Ben Adrian, Sound Design Manager Drive—This is the first volume control on the amp. It's called \"drive\" on the model to fit the pattern of all the Helix models. On the real amp is says \"Volume.\"\nBass, Mid, Treble—The normal tone controls on the amp (called a tone stack by amp nerds), located between the first and second gain stages in the preamp. These have different ranges than traditional guitar amp tone controls. Also, the whole voicing of the tone stack can be changed with the \"Rock/Jazz\" switch, which will be explained later.Presence—This is like the presence controls on other guitar amps. It changes the amount of high frequency in the power amp by modifying the EQ filtering in the power amp's negative feedback loop.Ch Vol—This controls the output level of the amp model. It has no effect on the tone or distortion of the amp modelMaster—This is the master volume on the front panel of the amp. It is located between the preamp and power amp and can be used to get more or less power amp distortion. This amp is VERY loud, and most players would probably run the master volume on the lower side. If the master volume is cranked, the power amp distortion can be pushed into unpleasant territory. Most players would never crank the master in real life as the actual output would be way too loud for most musical settings.Mid Switch—This switch changes the value of the treble capacitor in the tone stack. When it is off, the amp has more of a scooped sound. When it is on, there is a noticeable upper-mid boost.Jazz/Rock—This switch changes the wiring of the tone stack circuit. It allows for two totally separate tonal voices. Jazz is quieter with a lower center frequency for the mids. Rock is louder with a more traditional mid frequency center. Tone controls rarely translate well between the Jazz and Rock settings. If a good sound is achieved in one mode, it is not guaranteed that the same settings in the opposite mode will still sound pleasing.OD Switch—This turns the two-gain-stage tube overdrive circuit on and off. This circuit is located AFTER the tone controls and Drive knob. When the overdrive is turned on it's as if a third and fourth gain stage is added to the preamp. Generally, it's best to set up the base tone of the amp with the Drive and tone controls first, and then adjust the overdrive circuit to work with the desired base tone.OD Drive—This controls the amount of drive or saturation in the overdrive circuit. Since the whole overdrive circuit is after the amp's regular drive and tone controls, the range of OD Drive knob will change based on those earlier knob settings.OD Level—This controls the output level of the overdrive circuit.Bright—This is a three position switch. The settings are \"off\" and two different values of bright capacitor. This bright capacitor works with the Drive (volume) knob earlier in the circuit, and is similar to other amps that have bright switches. When the Bright switch is engaged, the effect is more pronounced with lower Drive settings. The bright becomes less effective at higher Drive settings. When the Drive is at 10, the switch is effectively removed from the amp circuit, and changing the switch settings has no audible effect.FET Boost—The GSG100 has a solid state, FET (Field Effect Transistor) boost circuit at the very beginning of the amp circuit. It is akin to placing a FET Boost pedal before the amp. On the physical unit there are two input jacks, but on the model it is placed on a switch and can even be made foot-switchable. The FET Boost has a fixed boost amount of about 7 to 9 dB and also gives a slight EQ change.PAB—This stands for \"Preamp Boost.\" The PAB works by removing the tone controls from the circuit. Tone controls work by removing frequencies and signal level. Engaging the PAB circuit returns all of this lost signal level, but the side effect is that tone controls no longer work. It truth, the treble knob does work slightly, and the mid switch will change how much lows and mids comes through the circuit. In general, though, the PAB trades tone control functionality for a full blast level between tube gain stages 1 and 2.Sag—This is a control that is added to all the Helix models. Every tube amp has some amount of power supply sag, which feels like compression, squish, and sustain to the player. This control makes the sag amount user-adjustable.Hum—This is a control that is added to most of the Helix models. Preamp tube heaters in tube amps will leak a little bit of 60 cycle hum into the audio signal. When this hum mixes with the distorted audio signal, a non-musical distortion is created at low levels. To some players, this low-level, non-harmonic distortion adds a bit of realism to the amp model. The best way to put it is that sometimes the model sounds more \"wrong\" without the hum. However, if you don't like it, you can just turn it down.Ripple—This is a control that is added to most of the Helix models. Power amp circuits will sometimes let a little bit of rectified 120Hz hum (that the power supply filter caps can't quite fully remove) into the audio signal. When the power supply is being pushed hard, more of this ripple can get through the audio path. Much like the hum, this provides a bit of non-musical distortion to the power amp at distorted settings. To some people, this sounds like harmonic complexity that is enjoyable and realistic. Other players just don't like it and turn it off.Bias—This control is in most Helix models. It adjusts the bias of the tubes in the power amp, causing a change in tonality and the distortion characteristic.Bias X—This is the most difficult parameter to describe in Helix models, so hang on. All tube amps need to bias the power amp tubes. This is usually achieved by applying a negative voltage to the input audio signal. (Cathode bias works differently, but that's a story for a different time.) However, when the power tubes are distorting, free electrons can form around the input grid and cause a shift in the bias voltage. This shift only happens during the moments when distortion is occurring. This shift causes a tonal and texture change much like adjusting the bias control. However, once the tubes leave the distorted state, the free electrons dissipate and the bias returns to normal. Another way to put it (less accurately) is that this is a level/envelope controlled bias shift. This behavior is modeled in all Helix amps, and the Bias X control allows users to control the amount of bias shift that is happening. It is a very subtle change, so please don't expect high drama from this knob. Grammatico GSG factory presets to check out: FACTORY 1—04B Grammatico GSGFACTORY 1—13A Grammatico JNC. Preset created by John CordyFACTORY 1—13B Screams JNC. Preset created by John Cordy",{"id":1551,"title":1552,"titles":1553,"content":1554,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#amppreamp-line-6-elmsley-line-6-original","Amp/Preamp > Line 6 Elmsley, Line 6 Original",[1538,1543],"\"The Line 6 Elmsley is a new Line 6 original amplifier that employs a parallel distortion topology that layers distinct saturation characteristics across the lower and upper registers. The Elmsley features a smooth and present bottom end with some exceptional sparkle and definition all through the midrange and above. The result is an amplifier that is dazzling across the full spectrum, and the amplifier deals with pedals in spades. \"The other new key feature of The Elmsley's power amp section is the Negative Feedback (NFB) parameter, where the amount of feedback within the power section's response can be dialed anywhere from wild and unhinged, tight and punchy, and anything in between. As with many amplifier designs, the presence and depth controls are part of this negative feedback circuit and functions to control the brilliance and resonance of the power amp, respectively. As the NFB param is reduced, the presence and depth controls' influences are also influenced, and they become effectively deactivated when the NFB knob is at zero. These interactions allow the player to create countless tonal variations to suit their needs.” —Sam Hwang, Sound Designer Line 6 Elmsley factory preset to check out: FACTORY 1—04C Line 6 Elmsley. Turn Distortion > Minotaur off to hear more of the character of the amp. Press the NFB switch to instantly adjust with your feet",{"id":1556,"title":1557,"titles":1558,"content":1559,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#amppreamp-agua-sledge-based-on-the-aguilar-tone-hammer","Amp/Preamp > Agua Sledge, based on* the Aguilar Tone Hammer",[1538,1543],"Agua Sledge factory presets to check out: FACTORY 1—10D BAS:Agua SledgeFACTORY 1—11C BAS:Hire Me!",{"id":1561,"title":1562,"titles":1563,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#new-cabs-in-360","New Cabs in 3.60",[1538],{"id":1565,"title":1426,"titles":1566,"content":1567,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#new-guitar-cabs",[1538,1562],"Cab > 1x12 Blue Bell (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1×12″ Vox® AC-15 Blue AlnicoCab > 1x12 Open Cream (Single, Dual), captured from* a custom 1x12\" open back cabinet G12M-65Cab > 1x12 Open Cast (Single, Dual), captured from* a custom 1x12\" open back cabinet EVM12LCab > 2x12 Silver Bell (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2×12″ Vox® AC-30TB Silver AlnicoCab > 2x12 Match H30 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2x12\" Matchless® DC-30 custom G12H-30Cab > 2x12 Match G25 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 2x12\" Matchless® DC-30 custom G12M-25Cab > 2x12 Greenback 20 (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4×12″ Marshall® Basketweave G12M-20Mic—Select from up to 12 mics:57 Dynamic—Shure® SM57421 Dynamic—Sennheiser® MD 421-U7 Dynamic—Shure SM7906 Dynamic—Sennheiser e90630 Dynamic—Heil Sound® PR 30121 Ribbon—Royer® R-121160 Ribbon—Beyerdynamic® M 1604038 Ribbon—Coles 403884 Ribbon—AEA R84414 Cond—AKG® C414 XLS47 Cond FET—Neumann® U47 FET67 Cond—Neumann U67Position—Sets the lateral location of the mic in relation to the speaker cone. Choose from Center ~ Cap Edge ~ Edge. Cap Edge may appear in a different location depending on the selected cabDistance—Sets the distance of the mic from the speaker cone. Choose from 1.00\" to 12.00\" in 1/4\" incrementsAngle—Sets the angle of the mic. 0 degrees is pointing directly at the speaker, 45 degrees is pointing off-axisLow Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter, letting you remove all audio below a certain frequency. May be useful in removing undesirable low end rumbleHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter, letting you remove all audio above a certain frequency. May be useful in removing high end harshnessLevel—Sets the overall level of the cabPan (Dual only)—Moves the signal left or right across the stereo sound field. For example, if you're running a stereo playback system with two or more speakers, panning the first cab to Left 100 and the second cab to Right 100 can make your tone sound notably wider. Press the knob to return to CenterDelay (Dual only)—Although the new cabs in 3.60 perfectly line up with one another, there may be situations where you want to delay one side very slightly, to perhaps impart a bit of phase incoherence or at higher values, to increase the apparent stereo spread. A little goes a long way here",{"id":1569,"title":1431,"titles":1570,"content":1571,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#new-bass-cabs",[1538,1562],"Cab > 1x12 Epicenter (Single, Dual), captured from* the 1x12\" Epifani® Ultralight series cabinetCab > 4x10 Ampeg Pro (Single, Dual), captured from* the 4x10\" Ampeg® PR-410HLFMic—Select from up to 12 mics:\n57 Dynamic—Shure SM57421 Dynamic—Sennheiser MD 421-U7 Dynamic—Shure SM788 Dynamic—Beyerdynamic M88TG52 Dynamic—Shure Beta 52A112 Dynamic—AKG D112D6 Dynamic—Audix D640 Dynamic—Heil Sound PR 404038 Ribbon—Coles 4038414 Cond—AKG C414 TLII47 Cond FET—Neumann U47 FET67 Cond—Neumann U67All other parameters the same as for guitar cabs (see above)",{"id":1573,"title":1574,"titles":1575,"content":1246,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#new-effects-in-360","New Effects in 3.60",[1538],{"id":1577,"title":1578,"titles":1579,"content":1580,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#distortion-dark-dove-fuzz-mono-stereo-based-on-the-electro-harmonix-russian-big-muff","Distortion > Dark Dove Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Electro-Harmonix® Russian Big Muff",[1538,1574],"Sustain—Sets the amount of distortionTone—Sets the overall tonal balance of the distortionLevel—Sets the overall level of the block",{"id":1582,"title":1583,"titles":1584,"content":1585,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#modulation-triple-rotary-stereo-only-inspired-by-the-yamaha-ra-200-rotary-speaker-famously-implemented-by-pink-floyds-david-gilmour","Modulation > Triple Rotary (Stereo only), inspired by* the Yamaha® RA-200 rotary speaker (famously implemented by Pink Floyd's David Gilmour).",[1538,1574],"\"The Line 6 Triple Rotary is inspired by the Yamaha RA-200 Rotary speaker. The original RA-200 was a combo solid state amplifier designed to be used with organs much like other rotary speakers. However; the RA-200 unit was unique compared to the traditional rotary speakers, which typically have rotating horns and a rotating drum over a woofer, the Yamaha designs had midrange speakers which rotated vertically on top of a traditional non-rotating speaker cabinet. \"To make the model more versatile, we made this effect to behave more as a stereo effect rather than modeling the whole cabinet, and suggest using the effect in combination with a cabinet model if recording direct or listening through FRFR systems.\" —Sam Hwang, Sound Designer Speed—Sets whether the speaker reflects the Slow Speed or Fast SpeedSlow Speed—Sets the rate for the Slow Speed. Press the knob to toggle between a static rate (0.0 ~ 10.0) or note values for syncing with Tap Tempo and incoming MIDI clockFast Speed—Sets the rate for the Fast Speed. Press the knob to toggle between a static rate (0.0 ~ 10.0) or note values for syncing with Tap Tempo and incoming MIDI clockRamp Time—Adjusts how fast switching from Slow Speed to Fast Speed and back takes placeMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the rotary effect. When set to 0%, no rotary effect is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Controls the overall output level of the blockDrive—Controls the amount of drive into the speaker's power ampHeadroom—Adds up to 12.0dB of additional headroomLow Cut—Applies a low cut (high pass) filter to the speakers, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequencyHigh Cut—Applies a high cut (low pass) filter to the speakers, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequencyWobble—Models how evenly the rotating speaker and its ballast weight are balanced about the axis. At zero, the speaker and ballast are perfectly balanced, and as the wobble control is increased the rotation of the speakers becomes more eccentric.Separation—The separation of the stereo field. Practically, this simulates moving the two listening points further apart as the separation knob is increasedRotor Drift—Adjusts how close the three rotor motors are in sync with each other in speed. As each of the rotors were belt driven, there are often some differences in belt or motor wear, and it creates some subtle modulation effects between the three rotorsRotor 2 Lvl—Sets the individual volume of the second rotorRotor 3 Lvl—Sets the individual volume of the third rotor *NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.",{"id":1587,"title":1588,"titles":1589,"content":1590,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-60#changes-and-improvements-in-360","Changes and Improvements in 3.60",[1538],"As 3.60 adds a second Grammatico amp, the three existing Grammatico LaGrange amp models have been renamed to \"GrammaticoLG Nrm,\" \"GrammaticoLG Brt,\" and \"GrammaticoLG Jmp\"A few 3.50 factory presets have been updated to utilize 3.60 cabs where appropriate",{"id":1592,"title":1593,"titles":1594,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-70","Release Notes 3.70 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1596,"title":1597,"titles":1598,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#helixhx-firmware-370","Helix/HX Firmware 3.70",[],{"id":1600,"title":1601,"titles":1602,"content":1603,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#the-original-amp-update","The Original Amp Update",[1597],"The six Original Amp Designs in Helix/HX 3.70 (Clarity, Aristocrat, Carillon, Voltage, Kinetic, and Oblivion) are taken from Line 6's popular line of Catalyst guitar amps. Each boasts a unique, integrated boost circuit optimized specifically for that amp. You can assign the Boost parameter to a stomp switch: Select one of the six Original Amp Design models below.Press and hold the Boost knob. Helix/HX jumps to the Controller Assign screen.(HX only: Press PAGE > to show the Learn knob.) Press Learn.Press the desired stomp switch. Helix/HX automatically assigns it. If you like, adjust Min Value and Max Value to dial in how much boost you want.Press HOME to exit. Wonder to yourself \"wait, it's that easy to assign any parameter in Helix/HX to a stomp switch? Why haven't I done this before?\"—OR—ponder \"I'm a power user who knows all the shortcuts. I should assign parameters to switches more often.\"",{"id":1605,"title":1606,"titles":1607,"content":1608,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#guitar-amps","Guitar Amps",[1597],"Line 6 Clarity, Line 6 OriginalLine 6 Aristocrat, Line 6 OriginalLine 6 Carillon, Line 6 OriginalLine 6 Voltage, Line 6 OriginalLine 6 Kinetic, Line 6 OriginalLine 6 Oblivion, Line 6 OriginalBrit 2203, based on* the 100W Marshall JCM-800 Stock 2203Vitriol Clean, based on* the Peavey Invective (Clean channel)",{"id":1610,"title":1611,"titles":1612,"content":1613,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#bass-amps","Bass Amps",[1597],"US Dripman Nrm, based on* the Fender Bassman (Silverface)Mandarin Bass200, based on* the Orange AD200 MkIII bass amp",{"id":1615,"title":1616,"titles":1617,"content":1618,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#guitar-cabs","Guitar Cabs",[1597],"Soup Pro Ellipse, captured from* 1x6×9\" Supro® S66161×8 Small Tweed, captured from* 1×8\" Fender® Champ1x12 Fullerton, captured from* 1x12\" Fender 5C3 Tweed Deluxe1x12 Cali IV, captured from* 1x12\" Mesa Boogie Mk IV combo2×12 Interstate, captured from* 2×12\" Dr Z® Z Best V304x12 Greenback 30, captured from* the 4×12\" Marshall® Basketweave G12H-304x12 WhoWatt 100, captured from* the 4×12\" Hiwatt® AP Fane®",{"id":1620,"title":1621,"titles":1622,"content":1623,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#bass-cabs","Bass Cabs",[1597],"2x15 US Dripman, captured from* 2x15\" Fender® Bassman JBL D1306x10 Cali Power, captured from* 6×10\" MESA/Boogie® Power House",{"id":1625,"title":1626,"titles":1627,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#effects","Effects",[1597],{"id":1629,"title":1630,"titles":1631,"content":1632,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#dynamics-feedbacker-mono-line-6-original-feedback-generator","Dynamics > Feedbacker (Mono), Line 6 Original feedback generator",[1597,1626],"Oh man, this one is fun with a capital Ffffff but you'll want to read up on how to get the best results. Works best as one of the first blocks in your signal flow. NOTE: Feedbacker loads bypassed by default. Fdbk Gain—Controls the amount of feedback. At higher settings, can easily overwhelm your guitar signal; at lower settings, the feedback can better \"sit\" between chords. WARNING! Be careful, as this effect can quickly go off the rails, just like real feedback. Consider assigning it to a momentary stomp so feedback only appears while you hold the switch.Fdbk Type—Determines the type of the feedback generated. TIP: Try assigning different Feedback Type values to snapshots.-Octave—Feedback appears one octave below the \"reference frequency,\" which is basically the note Feedbacker chooses to base its feedback generation on. Depending on the chord, Feedbacker may choose different reference frequencies.Unison—Feedback appears at the reference frequency.+Octave—Feedback appears one octave above the the reference frequency.Oct +5th—Feedback appears one octave plus a 5th above the the reference frequency.+2 Octaves—Feedback appears two octaves above the the reference frequency.2 Oct+3rd—Feedback appears two octaves plus a 3rd above the reference note frequency.2 Oct+5th—Feedback appears two octaves plus a 5th above the reference note frequency.2 Oct+7th—Feedback appears two octaves plus a 7th above the reference note frequency.High to Low—Feedback typically begins on the highest harmonic below 1200 Hz and descends to lower harmonics as the signal decays.Mid to Low—Feedback typically starts on the highest harmonic below 500 Hz and drops down to lower harmonics as the signal decays.Rndm Onset—New harmonics are selected randomly every time a new onset (note or chord's attack) is detected. In this case, repeating the same chord could still generate different harmonics.Rndm Trigger—New harmonics are selected randomly every time the Retrigger parameter is set to \"Trigger.\" See the Retrigger parameter below.Attack—Controls how quickly feedback appears.Release—Controls how quickly each harmonic dies out or transitions to a different one. At higher values, you may hear more than one harmonic as they transition.Dry Kill—Determines what happens to the dry (unaffected) signal:\nOff—The dry signal is controlled by the Dry Level parameter but is otherwise unaffected when the Feedbacker block is turned onOn—The dry signal is muted when the Feedback block is turned on. TIP: With Dry Kill on and Fdbk Type set to \"Unison,\" playing slower, single notes can result in sounds similar to using an E-bow.Always—The dry signal is completely muted from the entire path, regardless of whether the Feedback block is on or off. TIP: Use this setting only when Feedbacker is on a parallel path.Dry Level—Sets the amount of dry signal through the Feedbacker block. TIP: Assign this parameter to an expression pedal for blending in the dry signal behind the feedback.Reference—Determines which note within a chord is referenced by the feedback. \"Lowest\" prioritizes a chord's lowest-pitched note as the feedback reference, which often represents the fundamental frequency of the chord. \"Loudest\" prioritizes the loudest note in the chord as the feedback reference, which may not be the lowest note.Silence Thr—Sets the level threshold above which feedback is generated. Below this level, no feedback will be generated.\nOnset Thr—When Feedback Type is set to Rndm Offset, sets the threshold of onsets (plucks) that cause changes to the feedback note. Lower values increase sensitivity to plucking and strumming, so changes to the feedback note take place more often. Higher values reduce sensitivity to plucking and strumming, so changes to the feedback note take place less often.Offset Thr—When the level drops below this level, feedback fades out.Retrigger—Okay, Retrigger isn't a parameter per sé; it's meant for you to assign it to an unused momentary stomp switch. (Press and hold the Retrigger knob, press Learn, press the desired stomp switch, and then set Type to \"Momentary.\") Every time you press the switch (and the parameter changes from \"---\" to \"Trigger\"), the feedback generated will change, depending on the type of mode:\nHigh to Low or Mid to Low modes—Pressing the Retrigger switch will cause the Feedbacker to descend to lower harmonics.Rndm Trigger or Rndm Onset—Pressing the Retrigger switch will cause the Feedbacker to randomly choose a different harmonic.All other modes—Pressing the Retrigger switch will cause feedback to regenerate at the mode's selected frequency.Trails—When on, feedback continues to ring out (for the duration of the Release parameter) after the block is bypassed. When off, feedback stops abruptly when the block is bypassed.",{"id":1634,"title":1635,"titles":1636,"content":1637,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#distortion-prize-drive-mono-stereo-based-on-the-nobels-odr-1","Distortion > Prize Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Nobels ODR-1",[1597,1626],"Drive—Sets the amount of distortionSpectrum—When turned down, mids are accentuated; when turned up, lows and highs are accentuated. Could almost be considered a \"scoop\" control.Level—Sets the overall level of the block.Bass Cut—When set to \"On,\" slightly attenuates low bass frequencies.Voltage—The Nobels ODR-1 can behave differently depending on how much power it receives. Choose 9V or 18V, which gives a bit more headroom.",{"id":1639,"title":1640,"titles":1641,"content":1642,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#distortion-regal-bass-di-mono-stereo-based-on-the-noble-preamp-bass-di","Distortion > Regal Bass DI (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Noble Preamp bass DI",[1597,1626],"Bass—Adds a 150Hz bass boost to the signal. 0.0 is flat.Treble—Adds a 3.5kHz treble boost to the signal. 0.0 is flat.Low Cut—Applies a 90Hz low cut (high pass) filter to the signal (6dB/octave).Volume—Controls the overall output level of the DI.",{"id":1644,"title":1645,"titles":1646,"content":1647,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#reverb-dynamic-bloom-mono-stereo-line-6-original-bloom-reverb","Reverb > Dynamic Bloom (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original bloom reverb",[1597,1626],"Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity).Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty.Mot Rate—Motion Rate, or how fast the echoes' intensity changes, due to changes in plate tension or temperature.Rise Time—Sets how long it takes for the reverb to bloom. Choose Short, Medium (default), or Long.Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard.Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied.Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies.Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency.High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency.Ducking—Controls how much of the reverb is dropped in volume (or \"ducked\") while the signal is active. Higher values drop the reverb level more while you play.Level—Sets the overall level of the block.Trails—When set to \"Off,\" reverb decay is instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" the reverb continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected.",{"id":1649,"title":1650,"titles":1651,"content":1652,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#reverb-nonlinear-mono-stereo-line-6-original-nonlinear-reverb","Reverb > Nonlinear (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original nonlinear reverb",[1597,1626],"Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (1.0 ms ~ 2.000 sec). Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values. TIP: When set to note values, playing a note/chord 4 beats (Decay set to \"1/1\") or 2 beats (Decay set to \"1/2\") before a song transition can cause the reverb to stop right on the downbeat.Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the reverb.\nShape—Determines the shape of the reverb's decay:\nLinear—Traditional reverse reverb with an even, linear slope; abruptly stops after the decay length.Log—Reverse reverb with a logarithmic curve so it starts low and ramps up toward the decay's end.Inverse Log—Reverse reverb with an inverse logarithmic curve so it ramps up quickly.Gauss—Ramps up and then down in a gaussian curve shape.Inverse Gauss—Ramps down and then up in a gaussian curve shape.Triangle—Ramps up and then down in a triangle shape.Inverse Triangle—Ramps up and then down in a triangle shape.Full—No ramp at all; the reverb is on full blast for the duration of the decay and then abruptly stops after the decay length. Late Dry—Adds a bit of the original signal as the very last tap. Most audible when playing simple lines with gaussian and triangle shapes.Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard.Level—Sets the overall level of the block.Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal.Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency.High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency.Mod—Controls the amount of modulation applied to the reverb.Rate—Controls the rate or speed of modulation applied to the reverb.Spread (Stereo version only)—Determines the stereo width or spread of the effected signal.Trails—When set to \"Off,\" reverb decay is instantly muted when the block is bypassed. When set to \"On,\" the reverb continues to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected.",{"id":1654,"title":1655,"titles":1656,"content":492,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#features","Features",[1597],{"id":1658,"title":1659,"titles":1660,"content":1661,"level":497},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#cab-delay-auto-value","Cab > Delay \"Auto\" value",[1597,1655],"Helix/HX's new cab engine (introduced with 3.50) makes it easy to quickly find a great cab sound by automatically phase and time-aligning the mics in dual cab setups; this avoids the phasing or \"thinning out\" that can occur naturally when using two mics at different distances. However, some studio engineers are very adept at using phase misalignment to achieve interesting sounds. We've now added a new \"Auto\" value to the Cab > Delay parameter (all the way left, before 0.0 ms) that automatically approximates the delay through the air when changing the mic Distance parameter. For most people, however, we recommend leaving Delay set to \"0.0 ms.\"",{"id":1663,"title":81,"titles":1664,"content":1665,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#bug-fixes",[1597],"When Amp/Preamp > PV Vitriol Crunch's Gain knob was turned all the way up, the signal could drop out unexpectedly—FIXEDWith very fast attack times, Dynamics > Deluxe Comp could sometimes exhibit distortion on some source material—FIXEDSome reverbs would not reflect the Tuner > Trails parameter—FIXEDStereo versions of select distortion and modulation effects could exhibit an unbalanced stereo field, some more so than others—FIXEDIn rare cases, some HX Command messages could appear laggy when assigned to a stomp switch with many other assignments—FIXEDHX Stomp/HX Stomp XL only: Accessing the Tempo panel by touching the Tap switch could sometimes make the Tempo knob non-responsive—FIXEDHX One only: In rare cases, adjusting select parameters and then pressing an external footswitch assigned to Next or Previous preset can cause HX One to become unresponsive—FIXEDHX One only: When Settings > Guitar-In Z was set to \"Auto\" and HX One was bypassed, the effect's impedance value would be retained—FIXEDHX One only: Flux On/Off Time would not respond to MIDI Clock when set to note division or beat values—FIXEDHX One only: Bypass state wouldn't always be recalled correctly after a power cycle—FIXEDHX One only: When using stereo inputs, in certain cases, the right channel would be offset by up to 6dB—FIXEDHX One only: Turning the BPM value knob could be a bit glitchy—FIXED",{"id":1667,"title":86,"titles":1668,"content":1669,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-70#known-issues",[1597],"The mono version of Reverb > Nonlinear exhibits a less-smooth decay than the stereo version, which is especially noticeable on percussive material. It also affects the stereo version if merged to a mono path or when utilizing a mono output.In some cases if a Path 1B or 2B Input block is set to the same return as a block on a B path in a corresponding preset, the preset can load blank.After performing a Factory Reset, attempting to load 128 or more IRs can result in a \"Failed to get impulse names\" -8207 error. Instead, load fewer than 128 IRs at once.If Looper > 1 Switch Looper is playing, the first MIDI CC62 (Play Once) command is ignored. Sending a second CC62 command will work properly.Helix Native (Windows VST/AAX) only: Switching from certain reverb types to others (for example, from Hot Springs to Shimmer or Glitz to Shimmer) can result in DSP loss.Helix LT only: After entering and exiting the tuner from Snapshot performance view, Helix LT returns to the home screen. In the meantime, note that pressing FS6 (MODE) and FS12 (TAP/TUNER) together returns to Snapshot performance view.HX Stomp/HX Stomp XL only: If you have a snapshot command set to a footswitch (and Global Settings > Displays > LED Rings is set to \"Off/Brt\"), the footswitches may not light up red when pressed.HX One only: User Model Defaults created with 3.60 firmware are lost after update to 3.70. IMPORTANT! Be sure to use HX One Librarian to back up all data BEFORE updating to 3.60!HX One only: In rare cases, very quickly push-turning the EFFECT encoder can maintain the effect category carousel view. Press HOME to exit.HX One only: When using HX One in 4-Cable Method, stereo models can collapse to mono when the Insert position is set to Post.HX One only: When True Bypass is engaged, the Tuner does not operate correctly.",{"id":1671,"title":1672,"titles":1673,"content":1674,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-71","Release Notes 3.71 - Helix/HX",[],"Helix/HX 3.71 (released Jan 10, 2024) includes additional important bug fixes, and is recommended for all users. IMPORTANT! 3.71 does not apply to HX Edit.",{"id":1676,"title":1677,"titles":1678,"content":1674,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-71#helixhx-firmware-371","Helix/HX Firmware 3.71",[],{"id":1680,"title":81,"titles":1681,"content":1682,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-71#bug-fixes",[1677],"When running sufficient level into a Reverb > Dynamic Bloom block, audio clipping could occur—FIXEDThe mono version of Reverb > Nonlinear exhibits a less-smooth decay than the stereo version, which is especially noticeable on percussive material. It also affects the stereo version if merged to a mono path or when utilizing a mono output—FIXEDWhen choosing the 30 Dynamic microphone at a distance of 7.0 ~ 11.75, Cab > WhoWatt Cab exhibits abnormal treble resonance—FIXEDDelay > Tesselator could exhibit unexpected behavior in 3.70—FIXEDAdjusting the Delay > Glitch Delay block's Time parameter could sometimes result in muted audio or other unexpected audio behavior—FIXEDAdjusting the IR > Dual block's Delay parameter could sometimes result in graphical anomalies—FIXEDHelix Native (Windows VST/AAX) only: Switching from certain reverb types to others (for example, from Hot Springs to Shimmer or Glitz to Shimmer) can result in DSP loss—FIXEDOther minor fixes and improvements 3.71 for HX One (released Feb 8, 2024) includes one important bug fix, and is recommended for all users: HX One would only pass MIDI messages through on the MIDI channel it's set to (or when set to Omni, all channels). This clearly undermines the whole point of having MIDI thru at all—FIXED",{"id":1684,"title":1685,"titles":1686,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-80","Release Notes 3.80 - Helix/HX",[],{"id":1688,"title":1689,"titles":1690,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#helixhx-firmware-380","Helix/HX Firmware 3.80",[],{"id":1692,"title":242,"titles":1693,"content":1694,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#new-amps",[1689],"Amp > German Xtra Red, based on* the Bogner Ecstasy 101B Red channelAmp > German Xtra Blue, based on* the Bogner Ecstasy 101B Blue channelAmp > US Super Nrm, based on* the Fender Super Reverb normal channelAmp > US Super Vib, based on* the Fender Super Reverb vibrato channelAmp > EV Panama Blue, based on* the EVH 5150III 100 6L6 Blue channelAmp > EV Panama Red, based on* the EVH 5150III 100 6L6 Red channel",{"id":1696,"title":961,"titles":1697,"content":1698,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#new-cabs",[1689],"4x10 US Super, captured from* the Fender Super Reverb4x12 Cartog Guv, captured from Ben Adrian's Cartographer cabinet (Modified Lee Jackson 4x12 with Eminence Governor speakers)4x12 Cartog C90, captured from Ben Adrian's Cartographer cabinet (Modified Lee Jackson 4x12 with Mesa C90 speakers)4x12 SoloLead EM, captured from* the Soldano SLO 4x12 cabinet",{"id":1700,"title":252,"titles":1701,"content":1702,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#new-effects",[1689],"Wah > Teardrop Bass Q (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original, based on the Dunlop 105Q\nPosition—Sets the position of the wah's pedal position. By default, this is assigned to Expression Pedal 1. You may set the Min and Max value parameters to set the wah's frequency sweep range from the Controller Assign menuQ Trim—Controls the Q or bandwidth of the effect. Lower values boost a wider frequency band and higher values boost a narrower frequency bandVol Trim—Emulates the actual pedal's side volume trim knobMix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the wah effect. When set to 0%, no wah effect is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heardLevel—Sets the overall (transparent) level of the block",{"id":1704,"title":1705,"titles":1706,"content":1707,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#new-hx-one-features","New HX One Features",[1689],"HX One only: The On/Off footswitch state is now saved with the presetHX One only: You can now view the preset name instead of the model name in the Home view. Configure this in the new Global > Display setting:\nAuto (default): Displays the preset name by default. When scrolling through models using the effect encoder, the model name appears and persists for 3 seconds after the last adjustment before reverting to the preset name. When editing model parameters, the preset name briefly switches to the model name, persisting for 3 seconds after the last edit before returning to the preset nameModel: Always displays the model namePreset: Always displays the preset name.HX One only: Added support for MIDI control of the Shuffling LooperHX One only: Introduced a new MIDI command for preset navigation (CC72):\nCC72, value 0-63: Previous presetCC72, value 64-127: Next presetHX One only: The chromatic tuner is now available when HX One is set to True Bypass",{"id":1709,"title":81,"titles":1710,"content":1711,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#bug-fixes",[1689],"Delay > Cosmos Echo would apply the same wow/flutter modulation to the left and right delays, making it appear in certain cases as though the Spread control was inoperable—FIXEDIf you let your Helix/HX box sit, doing nothing for many hours, certain delay and modulation effects could stop processing audio until the preset was reloaded—FIXEDDelay > Poly Sustain could sometimes exhibit glitching audio if Random or Random Speed knobs were maxed out—FIXEDIf the Amp > Ampeg B-15NF's Bass parameter was set to 10.0, the model could gradually lose volume over the course of 30 minutes or so—FIXEDIf the Amp > Mandarin Bass 200's Bass parameter was set to 0.0, the model could lose volume over the course of 30 minutes or so—FIXEDHX Stomp/XL only: In certain configurations, output USB 5/6 would not always mirror the instrument input—FIXEDHX One only: There was an issue with Looper > Shuffling Looper when exiting the preset list by pressing both footswitches—FIXEDHX One only: Stereo models could collapse to mono when the insert position was set to Post—FIXEDHX One only: Looper undo/redo states could become reversed when controlled via MIDI—FIXEDHX One only: Certain Delay effects could result in glitches when receiving MIDI Clock changes while Note sync is disabled—FIXEDHX One only: In some cases, Flux Min and Max values may not update after resetting the parameter to its default—FIXEDOther minor fixes and improvements",{"id":1713,"title":86,"titles":1714,"content":1715,"level":28},"/release-notes/helix/3-80#known-issues",[1689],"There is a known issue in HX Edit 3.80 on Apple silicon computers (M1, M2, M3, M4) where some global settings are not properly restored from a backup file. A hotfix for this issue will be released shortly. Windows and Intel Apple computers are not affected by this issue.",{"id":1717,"title":1718,"titles":1719,"content":1720,"level":9},"/release-notes","Line 6 Helix Release Notes",[],"This is the most comprehensive list of release notes for the Line 6 Helix, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL, HX Effects, and Helix Native that you can find.",{"id":1722,"title":1723,"titles":1724,"content":1720,"level":9},"/release-notes#helix-release-notes","Helix Release Notes",[],{"id":1726,"title":1727,"titles":1728,"content":1729,"level":28},"/release-notes#all-products","All Products",[1723],"3.80 - Released 11/19/20243.71 - Released 01/10/20243.70 - Released 11/16/20233.60 - Released 04/25/20233.50 - Released 11/03/20223.15 - Released 02/08/20223.11 - Released 04/28/20213.10 - Released 04/15/20213.01 - Released 12/04/20203.00 - Released 11/22/20202.92 - Released 5/12/20202.91 - Released 4/24/20202.90 - Released 4/21/20202.81 - Released 8/6/20192.80 - Released 7/18/20192.71 - Released 12/5/182.70 - Released 10/17/182.60 - Released 7/2/182.54 - Released 3/22/182.53 - Released 3/1/182.50 - Released 2/7/182.30 - Released 11/21/172.21 - Released 4/27/172.20 - Released 3/30/172.12 - Released 1/9/172.11 - Released 12/15/162.10 - Released 11/22/162.0 - Released 7/6/161.12.0 - Released 5/11/161.10.0 - Released 3/29/161.06.5 - Released 2/16/16",{"id":1731,"title":1732,"titles":1733,"content":1734,"level":28},"/release-notes#native-only","Native Only",[1723],"1.801.501.0",{"id":1736,"title":1737,"titles":1738,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1","Release Notes 1.0 - Native",[],{"id":1740,"title":1737,"titles":1741,"content":1742,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1#release-notes-10-native",[],"STEP ONE: Check to see what firmware your Helix Floor/Rack/LT is running: Press MENU, press Knob 6 (Global Settings), and look in the upper right corner of the main display.Firmware Version 2.20.0 OR HIGHER?—follow the GREEN steps belowFirmware Version 2.12.2 OR LOWER?—follow the BLUE steps belowUpdating a Helix Floor/Rack/LT Running 2.20.0 or HIGHER:Download the all new HX Edit application here (this will also install the latest version of Line 6 Updater):Mac OS X: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7877Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7878Connect Helix to your computer and launch HX Edit. From the File pull-down menu, select \"Create Backup…\" Follow the prompts to create a full-state backup of your Helix (Global Settings, IRs, setlists, and presets).Close HX Edit, open Line 6 Updater, and follow the prompts to update your Helix's firmware. Helix will begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.Close Line 6 Updater, reopen HX Edit, and from the File pull-down menu, select \"Restore From Backup…\" Follow the prompts to restore Helix to its previous state.Updating Helix Floor/Rack/LT Running 2.12.2 or LOWER:Shut down all Line 6 software as well as any software that streams audio, including, but not limited to: iTunes, Spotify, DAWs, browsers, etc.Use your CURRENT EXISTING Helix application to back up all of your presets and IRs (if you want to keep them). For example, if you're running Helix FW 2.12, your current Helix application version should be 2.12.Quit the CURRENT EXISTING Helix editor application and download and install the LATEST HX Edit application, available here (this will also install the latest version of Line 6 Updater):Mac OS X: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7877Windows 7/8/10: https://line6.com/software/readeula.html?rid=7878Open Line 6 Updater and update Helix to the newest firmware. At the end of the update process, Helix will reboot automatically and begin rebuilding presets. Wait for this process to complete.YOU MUST RESET GLOBALS AND RESTORE PRESETS, OTHERWISE HELIX WILL NOT WORK PROPERLY. DO IT. DO IT NOW!To reset globals and restore presets, turn off Helix.HELIX FLOOR OR LT ONLY: While holding footswitches 9 and 10 (middle two switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.HELIX RACK ONLY: While holding knobs 5 and 6 below the screen, turn on Helix Rack. Wait for the message \"Will reset Globals and restore stock Presets, Setlists and IRs…\" to appear and let go.Using the NEW HX Edit application, reload the user presets you backed up in step 2.",{"id":1744,"title":242,"titles":1745,"content":306,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#new-amps",[1737],{"id":1747,"title":252,"titles":1748,"content":310,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#new-effects",[1737],{"id":1750,"title":101,"titles":1751,"content":314,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#new-features",[1737],{"id":1753,"title":183,"titles":1754,"content":318,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#improvementschanges",[1737],{"id":1756,"title":81,"titles":1757,"content":322,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#bug-fixes",[1737],{"id":1759,"title":86,"titles":1760,"content":326,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1#known-issues",[1737],{"id":1762,"title":1763,"titles":1764,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1-50","Release Notes 1.50 - Native",[],{"id":1766,"title":1763,"titles":1767,"content":492,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1-50#release-notes-150-native",[],{"id":1769,"title":242,"titles":1770,"content":1771,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#new-amps",[1763],"Cali Texas Ch2, based on* the drive channel of the MESA/Boogie® Lonestar (Ch1 coming later this spring)Placater Dirty, based on* the BE/HBE channel of the Friedman® BE-100 (Clean channel coming later this spring)",{"id":1773,"title":342,"titles":1774,"content":1775,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#new-hx-effects-models",[1763],"Helix Native now includes a library of effects from M13, M9, M5, DL4, DM4, FM4, and MM4. These appear in a new \"Legacy\" subcategory in the model list. Delay > Multi Pass (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Glitz (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Ganymede (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Searchlights (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Plateaux (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 OriginalReverb > Double Tank (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original",{"id":1777,"title":347,"titles":1778,"content":1779,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#new-legacy-effects-models",[1763],"Distortion > Tube DriveDistortion > ScreamerDistortion > OverdriveDistortion > Classic DistDistortion > Heavy DistDistortion > ColordriveDistortion > Buzz SawDistortion > Facial FuzzDistortion > Jumbo FuzzDistortion > Fuzz PiDistortion > Jet FuzzDistortion > Line 6 DriveDistortion > Line 6 DistortionDistortion > Sub Oct FuzzDistortion > Octave FuzzDynamics > Tube CompDynamics > Red CompDynamics > Blue CompDynamics > Blue Comp TrebDynamics > Vetta CompDynamics > Vetta JuiceDynamics > Boost CompModulation > Pattern TremoloModulation > PannerModulation > Bias TremoloModulation > Opto TremoloModulation > Script PhaseModulation > Panned PhaserModulation > BarberpoleModulation > Dual PhaserModulation > U-VibeModulation > PhaserModulation > Pitch VibratoModulation > DimensionModulation > Analog ChorusModulation > Tri ChorusModulation > Analog FlangerModulation > Jet FlangerModulation > AC FlangerModulation > 80A FlangerModulation > Frequency ShiftModulation > Ring ModulatorModulation > Rotary DrumModulation > Rotary Drm/HornModulation > Ping PongModulation > DynamicModulation > StereoModulation > DigitalModulation > Dig w/ ModModulation > ReverseModulation > Lo ResModulation > Tube EchoModulation > Tape EchoModulation > Sweep EchoModulation > Echo PlatterModulation > Analog EchoModulation > Analog w/ ModModulation > Auto-Volume EchoModulation > Multi-HeadPitch/Synth > Bass OctaverPitch/Synth > Smart HarmonyPitch/Synth > Octi SynthPitch/Synth > Synth O MaticPitch/Synth > Attack SynthPitch/Synth > Synth StringPitch/Synth > GrowlerFilter > Voice BoxFilter > V TronFilter > Q FilterFilter > SeekerFilter > Obi WahFilter > Tron UpFilter > Tron DownFilter > ThrobberFilter > Slow FilterFilter > Spin CycleFilter > Comet Trails",{"id":1781,"title":101,"titles":1782,"content":1783,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#new-features",[1763],"Snapshot Support * Helix Native now supports up to eight snapshots per preset. A single snapshot can recall up to 64 parameters and 32 block bypass states.Drag block to clear — Click and drag a block out out of the signal flow view to clear it.Dragging an amp/effect block nudges neighboring blocks out of the way to allow insertionDragging a split/join block reveals insertion points between amp/effect positions (basically the same as previous behavior)Split/join positions can be nudged from any direction at any point along path A",{"id":1785,"title":183,"titles":1786,"content":1787,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#improvementschanges",[1763],"12 of Helix's 17 reverbs originally appeared in M-Class processors and Verbzilla. As such, they've been moved into the new \"Legacy\" subcategory within the Reverb categoryHelix's tempo no longer responds to pressing TAP at tempo lower than 40.0 BPM (Beats Per Minute). This is to ensure that multiple fast tap entries are recognized properly, as previously, they could be seen as one really slow tap entry. You may still manually select a tempo all the way down to 20.0 BPM and your presets can still be saved with tempi down to 20.0 BPM",{"id":1789,"title":81,"titles":1790,"content":1791,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#bug-fixes",[1763],"If its Mid and Bass parameters are set to 0.0, the Cali IV Lead Amp/Amp+Cab model could sometimes exhibit a decrease in gain.The Tempo Host Sync would be lost when reloading a session * FIXED.Pro Tools: Latency Compensation broken when Helix Native plugin is bypassed * FIXED.",{"id":1793,"title":86,"titles":1794,"content":1795,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-50#known-issues",[1763],"Recalling an effect or instrument rack in Ableton Live with Helix Native instantiated can mute the track. Workaround: Uninstantiate and re-instantiate the plug-in.When using two 1024 IR's in a preset, moving the upper IR block before or after a pre/post split block can change the sonic character of the IR block.The copy/paste clipboard may be cleared after closing and reopening Helix Native.",{"id":1797,"title":1798,"titles":1799,"content":1800,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1-80","Release Notes 1.8 - Native",[],"7/18/19",{"id":1802,"title":1803,"titles":1804,"content":1805,"level":9},"/release-notes/native/1-80#native-180","NATIVE 1.80",[],"7/18/19 1.80 utilizes the new Helix Core engine, which unifies all Helix and HX products into the same ecosystem. Because there are tons of changes under the hood, presets created in 1.80 will not be compatible with earlier firmware, which means if you want to return to 1.71 for whatever reason, and you didn't back up before updating to 1.80, your presets will NO LONGER WORK. Therefore, we STRONGLY RECOMMEND everyone back up everything BEFORE updating. Instructions for backing up begin… now.",{"id":1807,"title":1808,"titles":1809,"content":1810,"level":28},"/release-notes/native/1-80#updating-to-180-read-me","Updating to 1.80 (READ ME!)",[1803],"Backing Up Helix Native.\nOpen any instance of YOUR CURRENT VERSION Helix Native (NOT the new Helix Native 1.80) within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Export Bundle.\"\nChoose the destination folder and click \"Save.\"\nTIP: If you want to load the 1.80 factory presets, it's better to manually back up individual setlists, so you can later import them into empty setlists. To do this, from the preset library along the left side, select the setlist you want to back up and click the small yellow \"Export.\" Choose a destination folder and click \"Save.\" Repeat for any other setlists you want to back up.Loading the 1.80 Factory Presets / Templates The following procedure will COMPLETELY ERASE ALL OF YOUR CUSTOM PRESETS! If you want to keep them, make sure you back them up First! (See \"STEP 1: Backing Up Helix Native\" above.) Open any instance of Helix Nativewithin your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Restore Factory Setlists\" Restoring Helix Native from a Backup Open any instance of Helix Native within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nFrom the Presets/IRs tab, click \"Import Bundle.\"\nBrowse to the location chosen in STEP 1 above and click \"Open.\"\nWhew! That wasn't too terrible, now was it? What's that… it was? Sorry. Now that Helix Core is finished, hopefully future update procedures will be less… involved. New Amp Models in 1.80\nFullerton Nrm, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (normal channel) Fullerton Brt, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (bright channel) Fullerton Jump, based on* the classic 1958 Fender® 5C3 Tweed Deluxe (jumped channels) Grammatico Nrm, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (normal channel) Grammatico Brt, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (bright channel) Grammatico Jump, based on* the modern 2016 Grammatico LaGrange (jumped channels) Revv Gen Red, based on* the red (gain 2) channel of the Revv® Generator 120 Ampeg SVT-4 PRO, based on* the Ampeg® SVT-4 PRO NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. That said, the teams at Revv and Grammatico are super cool (and patient!) and you should buy their awesome amps. New Effects Models in 1.80\nDistortion > Dhyana Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Hermida Zendrive Distortion > Heir Apparent (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Analogman Prince of Tone (basically half a King of Tone) Distortion > Tone Sovereign (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Analogman King of Tone V4 (basically two Prince of Tones in one) Distortion > ZeroAmp Bass DI (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Tech 21® SansAmp Bass Driver DI V1 Distortion > Ampeg Scrambler (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Ampeg® Scrambler Bass Overdrive Filter > Asheville Pattrn (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Moog® Moogerfooger® MF-105M MIDI MuRF Filter (with both MuRF and Bass MuRF voicings) EQ > Low/High Shelf (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original EQ > Tilt (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Tilt is a subtle 6dB EQ that boosts high frequencies while simultaneously attenuating low frequencies (or vice versa). Great for quickly making tones a bit brighter or darker. The Center Freq parameter sets the frequency around which the boost and cut pivot NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development. New Features in 1.80\nNOTE: For additional information on Helix Native 1.80, check out the latest Helix Native Pilot's Guides, which is automatically installed with the new 1.80 software. Snapshot Bypass\nThere may be situations where you don't want Helix's snapshots to control a particular block's bypass state; that is, you'd prefer to turn it on and off manually. For example, you may want manual control of a boost pedal at any time without worrying whether a particular snapshot might turn it on or off. Right-click (Mac: control-click) on a processing block and uncheck \"Snapshot Bypass.\" Alternatively, right-click (Mac: control-click) the Bypass button to uncheck \"Snapshot Bypass.\" Hardware Compatibility Mode\nHelix Native can now reflect the signal flow and model set of all Helix and HX hardware devices, so transferring presets to and from your DAW is even easier. In addition, Hardware Compatibility can be disabled entirely, so the simultaneous model count is now limited only by the speed of your computer. Open any instance of Helix Native within your DAW and click the gear icon in the lower left corner to open the Preferences window.\nClick the Hardware Compatibility tab.\nFrom the \"Current Hardware Compatibility Mode\" pull-down menu, select one of the following options:\nOff Disables Hardware Compatibility and lets you add as many blocks (of any type) as your computer's horsepower will allow. Choose this setting if you don't own any Helix or HX hardware Helix Floor /LT / Rack (the default) Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, or Helix LT HX Effects Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into HX Effects. In this mode, no Amp or Cab models will be available HX Stomp Configures Helix Native such that any presets made can be easily loaded into HX Stomp Click OK. Depending on the current Hardware Compatibility Mode, Helix Native may repopulate the preset list to reflect that of the selected hardware. For example, if you choose \"HX Stomp,\" HX Stomp's factory presets will appear and the signal flow will be limited to six blocks\nClick \"Set as Default\" to ensure any new instances of Helix Native open in the selected mode.\nIMPORTANT! Each Hardware Compatibility Mode incorporates its own, independent preset library. Therefore, you will see the Helix Native preset library automatically repopulate to reflect that of the selected hardware. Helix / HX Preset Sharing\nAll Helix and HX hardware and software now live within the same ecosystem. Using multiple instances of Helix Native, both blocks and entire presets can be freely dragged and dropped or copied and pasted between units. Aside from the obvious caveats below, all Helix and HX products can now share the same content. IMPORTANT! Due to the vast differences in how Helix/HX products manage controllers, snapshots, and Command Center messages, there is no guarantee that every single tiny detail of a preset will translate properly. You can now drag / drop, copy / paste, or otherwise load: HX Effects or HX Stomp presets into Helix Floor / Rack / LT and Helix Native. If an HX Effects preset has 9 blocks, the ninth block will be routed to Path 2 Helix Floor / Rack / LT, Helix Native, or HX Stomp presets into HX Effects. However, there are caveats. To avoid an error message, the source preset must: Contain 9 or fewer blocks\nNot contain any Amp+Cab, Amp, Preamp, or Cab blocks\nContain no more than one Split and Merge block\nFit within one path worth of DSP processing\nHelix Floor / Rack/LT, Helix Native, or HX Effects presets into HX Stomp. However, there are caveats. To avoid an error message, the source preset must: Contain 6 or fewer blocks\nContain no more than one Split and Merge block Fit within one path worth of DSP processing\nHelix Floor / Rack/LT, HX Effects, or HX Stomp presets into Helix Native NOTE: A dialog box will appear if the source preset cannot be accommodated by the current Hardware Compatibility Mode (see above). At this point, you may choose to switch the current Hardware Compatibility Mode to that of the source preset, or attempt to translate the preset into the current Hardware Compatibility Mode, given the caveats above. See the Helix Native Pilot's Guide for more information. Click the question mark icon in the lower left corner of the plug-in. Undo/Redo\nHelix Native now supports multiple levels of undo/redo. Click the Undo button to undo the most recent edit.\nClick the Redo button to redo the most recent undo.\nMIDI Learn\nHelix Native can now learn an incoming MIDI CC message and automatically assign it to a parameter. Right-click on a parameter and select Controller > MIDI Learn. A small brain icon flashes. If you change your mind, click the icon to cancel.\nSend Helix Native a MIDI CC message. The parameter is automatically assigned to it.\nTIP: In Helix Native, right-click (Mac: control-click) on a processing block to open a pull-down that lets you manually assign a MIDI CC to block bypass. Right-click (Mac: control-click) on a parameter slider to open a pull-down menu that lets you manually assign a MIDI CC to parameter control. NOTE: Not all DAW software automatically routes incoming MIDI data through to any plug-in, especially those instantiated as an insert on an audio track. See your DAW's documentation for more information. The new MIDI In indicator in the lower right corner flashes if Helix Native receives MIDI data. Other Changes and Improvements in 1.80\nOn a Cab > Dual block, changing the first cab no longer changes the second cab. Impulse Response blocks now display as many IR file name characters as will fit in the inspector header Additional values have been added to recall snapshots remotely via MIDI CC69 Value 8 will select the next snapshot and Value 9 will select the previous snapshot A small indicator in the lower right corner of the plug-in window flashes whenever a MIDI message is received Automation and MIDIcontroller assignments can now be managed together from the AutomationController Assign tab Blocks assigned to controllers or automation now display their category name in brackets. Parameters assigned to controllers or automation display a small icon to the left of their parameter sliders. In addition, pop-up menus now display controller or automation assignments, if any From the Automation/Controller Assign tab, right-click (Mac: control-click) an assignment to open a pull-down menu, letting you clear one or all assignments A new \"Restore Factory Settings\" button has been added to the bottom of the Preferences window Wow, you're still reading this? Congratulations; you're way cooler and better looking than other Helix/HX owners. Celebrate your superiority with some delicious tacos. As Ampeg is now Line 6's sister company, all pre-1.80 Ampeg models have been renamed: Amp > Bass > Tuck n' Go is now called \"Ampeg B-15NF\" Amp > Bass > SV Beast Nrm is now called \"Ampeg SVT Nrm\" Amp > Bass > SV Beast Brt is now called \"Ampeg SVT Brt\" Cab > 1x15 Tuck n' Go is now called \"1x15 Ampeg B-15\" Cab > 4x10 Rhino is now called \"4x10 Ampeg HLF\" Cab > 8x10 SV Beast is now called \"8x10 Ampeg SVT E\" Numerous stability and performance improvements Lots of other little things Known Issues in 1.80\nDowngrading to 1.71 or older will erase ALL preset data. A preset may load blank after dragging a looper block across a split, merge and another block two times. Simply load the preset again and it will load as expected. Undo/Redo does not work when switching between time and note divisions. Save to Library lists presets in \"01A-32D\" setlist format regardless of preferences.",{"id":1812,"title":1813,"titles":1814,"content":8,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix","Helix Manual",[],{"id":1816,"title":1813,"titles":1817,"content":1818,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix#helix-manual",[],"This version of the manual, though mostly still relevant and useful, has been deprecated in favor of the Universal Guide. WelcomeQuick StartSelecting Blocks/Adjusting ParametersThe BlocksTunerSnapshotsBypass AssignController AssignCommand CenterGlobal EQGlobal SettingsReset OptionsMIDI",{"id":1820,"title":1821,"titles":1822,"content":1823,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center","Command Center",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL are world-class master remote controls for your entire touring or studio rig. Each of their Stomp mode footswitches and expression pedals can be used to send a variety of MIDI, CV/expression, or External Amp commands to your guitar amps, vintage pedals, synths, or even other modelers.",{"id":1825,"title":1821,"titles":1826,"content":1827,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#command-center",[],"Helix also just so happens to be a world-class master remote control for your entire touring or studio rig. Each of its Stomp mode footswitches and expression pedals can be used to send a variety of MIDI, CV/expression, or External Amp commands to your guitar amps, vintage pedals, synths, or even other modelers. In addition, up to six \"Instant\" commands can be transmitted automatically when a Helix preset is recalled, for starting your DAW, triggering a MIDI-controlled lighting system, or switching presets on external gear. All Command Center assignments are stored per preset, but they can be copied and pasted to other presets. See \"Copying and Pasting a Command\" The Value parameters of any instant MIDI CC, Bank/Prog, MMC, and CV Out messages, plus the state (dim or lit) of any CC Toggle, CV Toggle, and Ext Amp messages are automatically recalled when selecting a snapshot. All MIDI-based Command Center messages are transmitted via MIDI and USB simultaneously.",{"id":1829,"title":1830,"titles":1831,"content":1832,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#assigning-a-command","Assigning a Command",[1821],"1. Press MENU to open the Menu. 2. Press Knob 3 (Command Center). Any switches, pedals or instant locations with commands assigned appear with turquoise triangles above them: 3. Move the joystick to select the footswitch, pedal, Variax knob, or instant location you wish to use to send the command. 4. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. Not all command sources can send the same types of commands. Select \"None\" to remove any command assignment. 5. Turn Knobs 2-5 to adjust the command's settings, which are determined by the type of command:",{"id":1834,"title":1835,"titles":1836,"content":1837,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#midi-cc-continuous-controller","MIDI CC (Continuous Controller)",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2MIDI ChSets the CC message's MIDI channel (1-16). When set to \"Base\", Helix follows the Global MIDI channel, which is set from the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" page.3CC #Sets the CC number (0-127).4Value Min ValueSets the CC number's value (0-127). For EXP 1-3 and Variax Volume/Tone Knob, sets the minimum CC value controlled by the pedal or knob.5Max ValueFor EXP 1-3 and Variax Volume/Tone Knob, sets the maximum CC value controlled by the pedal or knob.",{"id":1839,"title":1840,"titles":1841,"content":1842,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#cc-toggle","CC Toggle",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2MIDI ChSets the CC messages' MIDI channel (1-16). When set to \"Base\", Helix follows the Global MIDI channel, which is set from the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" page.3CC #Sets the CC number (0-127).4Dim ValueSets the CC number's value (0-127) when the footswitch ring is dim. For Footswitches 7 (MODE) and 12 (TAP), appears as \"Initial Val.\"5Lit ValueSets the CC number's value (0-127) when the footswitch ring is lit. For Footswitches 7 (MODE) and 12 (TAP), appears as \"Toggle Val.\" For CC Toggle commands, one of two values is automatically transmitted upon preset recall, determined by the footswitch's state (dim or lit) when the preset was saved. Subsequent presses of the footswitch toggle between the two states' CC values—Knob 4 (Dim Value) and Knob 5 (Lit Value).",{"id":1844,"title":1845,"titles":1846,"content":1847,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#bankprog","Bank/Prog",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2MIDI ChSets the Bank/Program message's MIDI channel (1-16). When set to \"Base\", Helix follows the Global MIDI channel, which is set from the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" page.3Bank CC00Sets the CC#00 (Bank MSB) value. Select \"Off\" if the receiving device shouldn't respond to Bank MSB.4Bank CC32Sets the CC#32 (Bank LSB) value. Select \"Off\" if the receiving device shouldn't respond to Bank LSB.5ProgramSets the Program Change (PC) value. Select \"Off\" if you only want to send a Bank MSB and/or Bank LSB message.",{"id":1849,"title":1850,"titles":1851,"content":1852,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#note-on","Note On",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2MIDI ChSets the note's MIDI channel (1-16). When set to \"Base,\" Helix follows the Global MIDI channel, which is set from the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" page.3NoteSets the MIDI note value (C-1 ~ G9). Middle C is C3.4VelocitySets the MIDI note's velocity (0-127).5Note OffDetermines whether the MIDI note sustains until pressing the switch again (Latching) or sustains only while the switch is held (Momentary).",{"id":1854,"title":1855,"titles":1856,"content":1857,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#mmc-midi-machine-control","MMC (MIDI Machine Control)",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2MessageDetermines the message type.",{"id":1859,"title":1860,"titles":1861,"content":1862,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#ext-amp","Ext Amp",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2SelectDetermines the Ext Amp connection 1 (Tip-to-sleeve), 2 (Ring-to-sleeve), or both for switching an external amp's channel, reverb, or other functions. Connect EXT AMP 1/2 only to amplifiers that utilize \"short-to-sleeve\" footswitch inputs. Connecting to any other sort of input could cause permanent damage to both your amp and Helix! If you're not sure if your amp has short-to-sleeve inputs, contact the manufacturer. The Helix device's ability to control external amp channel and/or reverb switching has been tested with many popular amps and heads. Unfortunately this does not guarantee compatibility with all products. Note that, depending on the circuitry of the channel switching jack in the guitar amp used, the EXT Amp function may not operate as expected. When an Ext Amp command is assigned to Instant 1-6, the connection determined by Knob 2 (Select) is made when the preset is loaded. When an Ext Amp command is assigned to a footswitch, the footswitch's current state (dim or lit) determines whether or not the External Amp connection is made when the preset is loaded; when dim, no connection is made; when lit, the connection determined by Knob 2 (Select) is made. Subsequent presses of the footswitch toggle the connection on (LED lit) and off (LED dark).",{"id":1864,"title":1865,"titles":1866,"content":1867,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#cv-control-voltage-out","CV (Control Voltage) Out",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2CV Value CV Min ValSets the CV value (1-100) appearing at the Helix device's CV/Expression jack. For EXP 1-3 and Variax Volume/Tone Knob, sets the minimum CV value controlled by the pedal or knob.3CV Max ValFor EXP 1-3 and Variax Volume/Tone Knob, sets the maximum CV value controlled by the pedal or knob.",{"id":1869,"title":1870,"titles":1871,"content":1872,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#cv-control-voltage-toggle","CV (Control Voltage) Toggle",[1821,1830],"KnobParameterDescription2Dim ValueSets the CV value (0-100) when the footswitch ring is dim. For Footswitches 7 (MODE) and 12 (TAP), appears as \"Initial Val.\"3Lit ValueSets the CV value (0-100) when the footswitch ring is lit. For Footswitches 7 (MODE) and 12 (TAP), appears as \"Toggle Val.\" For CV Toggle commands, one of two CV values appears at the CV/Expression output, automatically transmitted upon preset recall, determined by the footswitch's state (dim or lit) when the preset was saved. Subsequent presses of the footswitch toggle between the two states' CV values—Knob 4 (Dim Value) and Knob 5 (Lit Value).",{"id":1874,"title":1875,"titles":1876,"content":1877,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#copying-and-pasting-a-command","Copying and Pasting a Command",[1821],"1. Select the location containing the command you wish to copy and press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 1 (Copy Command). 3. Select the location to which you want to paste the command - even in a different preset — and press ACTION. 4. Press Knob 3 (Paste Command).",{"id":1879,"title":1880,"titles":1881,"content":1882,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#copying-and-pasting-all-commands","Copying and Pasting All Commands",[1821],"Setting up the same or similar set of commands across multiple presets can quickly become tiresome. Fortunately, Helix lets you quickly copy and paste all commands to another preset. 1. From the Command Center page, press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 2 (Copy All Commands). 3. Select the preset to which you want to paste the commands and press ACTION. 4. Press Knob 3 (Paste All Commands).",{"id":1884,"title":1885,"titles":1886,"content":1887,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#clearing-a-command","Clearing a Command",[1821],"1. Select the location containing the command you want to clear and press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 4 (Clear Command).",{"id":1889,"title":1890,"titles":1891,"content":1892,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#clearing-all-commands","Clearing All Commands",[1821],"1. From the Command Center page, press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 5 (Clear All Commands). The following dialog appears: 3. Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":1894,"title":1895,"titles":1896,"content":1897,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#customizing-a-command-footswitch-label","Customizing a Command Footswitch Label",[1821],"1. From the Command Center screen, select Footswitch 1-5, 7-11, or Exp Toe with a command assigned and press Knob 6 (Customize). The Customize screen appears: Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor. Turn the joystick (or move it up/down) to change the selected character. Press Knob 2 (Delete) to delete the selected character and shift all following characters to the left. Press Knob 3 (Insert) to insert a space and shift all following characters to the right. Press the joystick to cycle through A, a, 0, and SPACE. Press Knob 4 (Remove) to remove the custom label, after which the footswitch displays its normal assignment. Remove is grayed out until a custom name is applied. 2. Press Knob 6 (OK). Footswitches can also be customized from the \"Bypass Assign\" screen (or Helix editor application!)",{"id":1899,"title":1900,"titles":1901,"content":1902,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/command-center#customizing-a-command-footswitch-color","Customizing a Command Footswitch Color",[1821],"1. From the Customize screen, turn Knob 5 (Switch LED) to select the desired color (or turn it off). Normally, you should leave this set to \"Auto Color.\" 2. Press Knob 1 (Cancel) or to exit.",{"id":1904,"title":1905,"titles":1906,"content":1907,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign","Controller Assign",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL provide a wide variety of tools for controlling your tone during a performance. The most obvious one is the built-in expression pedal (often assigned to wah or volume), but you may also assign footswitches to toggle between two values of a given parameter or parameters, control a parameter from an external MIDI device, or the volume and tone knobs on a James Tyler Variax or Variax Standard guitar. You can even have parameters instantly change when selecting different snapshots within a preset.",{"id":1909,"title":1905,"titles":1910,"content":1911,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#controller-assign",[],"Helix provides a wide variety of tools for controlling your tone during a performance. The most obvious one is the built-in expression pedal (often assigned to wah or volume), but you may also assign footswitches to toggle between two values of a given parameter or parameters, control a parameter from an external MIDI device, or the volume and tone knobs on a James Tyler Variax or Variax Standard guitar. You can even have parameters instantly change when selecting different snapshots within a preset. If a controller has been assigned to a parameter, the value appears white and in brackets: Adding a Wah or Pitch Wham block automatically assigns it to be controlled by EXP 1. Adding a Volume Pedal or Pan block automatically assigns it to be controlled by EXP 2. Each preset can have up to 64 controller assignments. If you attempt to add a 65th, \"Too many controller assignments!\" appears in the header:In this case, you must clear some controllers to free up assignments. See \"Clearing a Block's Controller Assignment(s)\" or \"Clearing All Controller Assignments\".",{"id":1913,"title":1914,"titles":1915,"content":1916,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#quick-controller-assign","Quick Controller Assign",[1905],"1. From the Home screen, press and hold the knob for the parameter you wish to control. Helix jumps to the Controller Assign page and displays your parameter above Knob 1 (Parameter). 2. Press Knob 6 (Learn Controller). The button's brain icon glows blue and the header reads \"Move/use controller to learn...\": 3. Move the expression pedal, turn the Volume or Tone knob on a connected Variax, step on a Stomp mode footswitch, send a MIDI CC message from your keyboard, etc. The controller name appears above Knob 2 (Controller). Helix has reserved specific MIDI CC messages for global functions; these CCs cannot be used as controllers. If you attempt to learn a CC message reserved for global functions, the following dialog appears:See \"MIDI\" for more information. 4. Press to return to the Home screen. To assign a parameter to the Snapshots controller, it's even easier—just push and turn the parameter's knob. The value appears white and in brackets, indicating it's now assigned to a controller. Hold BYPASS and press a parameter knob to quickly remove any controller assignment (including the Snapshots controller). The value appears without brackets, indicating no controller is assigned to it.",{"id":1918,"title":1919,"titles":1920,"content":1921,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#manual-controller-assign","Manual Controller Assign",[1905],"The Controller Assign screen is where you manually assign parameters to be adjusted in real time by controllers. 1. Press MENU to open the Menu. 2. Press Knob 2 (Controller Assign). The Controller Assign screen looks very similar to the Home screen: 3. Move the joystick to select the block containing the parameter to which you want to assign a controller. The most recently accessed parameter appears above Knob 1 (Parameter). Amp+Cab and Cab > Dual blocks are special in that they represent two models within a single block. To assign controllers to the amp parameters in an Amp+Cab block, press \u003C PAGE until the amp icon is white. To assign controllers to the cab parameters, press PAGE > until the cab icon is white.To assign controllers to the first cab's parameters in a Cab > Dual block, press \u003C PAGE until the left cab icon is white. To assign controllers to the second cab's parameters, press PAGE > until the right cab icon is white. 4. Turn Knob 1 (Parameter) to select the parameter you wish to control. 5. Turn Knob 2 (Controller) to select the desired controller. None - Removes the controller assignment.Exp Pedal 1, 2, or 3 - The most common type of controller. Used to control volume, wah, Pitch Wham, etc.Variax Vol, Variax Tone - If you have a James Tyler Variax or Variax Standard guitar, its volume and tone knobs can be used to adjust a wide variety of parameters in Helix.Footswitch 1-5, 7-11 - Stepping on a Stomp mode footswitch can toggle between a parameter's min and max values. If a footswitch is assigned to one parameter only (no blocks, Command Center messages, or other parameters), the parameter name appears in the scribble strip: Selecting Footswitch 1-5 or 7-11 will display Knob 3 (Type). Turn knob 3 to select \"Momentary\" or \"Latching.\" Momentary means the value will change for as long as you hold the switch. Latching toggles between Min and Max values every time you press the switch. Footswitches can be customized from the \"Command Center\" screen. MIDI CC - Selecting \"MIDI CC\" will display Knob 3 (MIDI CC#). Turn Knob 3 to select the desired MIDI CC number.Snapshots - Although all controller-assigned parameters are updated per snapshot, an additional \"Snapshots\" controller is available when other controllers are already used. Footswitch 1 and 7 can be assigned at any time, but they only appear\nif the Stomp Mode Switches option is set to \"10 switches\" (see \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"). Otherwise, FS1 and FS7 appear as BANK and BANK. Footswitch type (momentary or latching) is determined per footswitch , not per assignment. Some CC#s cannot be selected, as they are reserved for the Helix\nglobal functions. See \"MIDI\" for more information. 6. If desired, turn Knob 4 (Min Value) and Knob 5 (Max Value) to set the range you wish to control. To reverse controller behavior, swap the min and max values. Tips for Creative Controller Assignment If you assign a footswitch to more than one controller or other item, \"MULTIPLE (X)\" on the scribble strip isn't very descriptive. Don't forget to custom label it - See \"Customizing a Command Footswitch Label\"By default, a parameter's Min and Max values will be pretty extreme. It pays to play pretty conservative here, as subtle parameter adjustments go a long wayTo smoothly blend between the tone on parallel paths A and B, select a Split > A/B block and assign the Route To parameter to an expression pedal. By default, a heel-down position means the signal passes fully through Path A. Moving the pedal toward the toe-down position will gradually crossfade into Path B. Alternatively, assign a footswitch to control the Route To parameter, for instantly switching back and forthIf you're looking for a gritty boost for a solo, instead of adding a Distortion block, try assigning a footswitch to increase both the Mid and Channel Volume parameters of an Amp+Cab, Amp, or Preamp blockIf you're looking for an ultra-clean boost, instead of adding a Volume/Pan > Gain block, try assigning a footswitch to increase the Level parameter of a Merge > Mixer or Output blockIf you have a favorite delay or reverb pedal, use an FX Loop block to insert it into your tone. Assign EXP 1, 2, or 3 to control the block's Mix parameter, which will smoothly blend the pedal into your toneFor extreme psychedelic dub delay squeals, assign a footswitch to both increase a Delay's feedback and decrease its timeAssign a footswitch to toggle between two Delay > Time parameter values, such as 1/4 and 1/8 dottedAssign the tone knob on your JTV Variax or Variax Standard guitar to a Pitch Wham block's Position parameter. Watch guitarists in the audience try to figure out how a knob on your guitar generates huge dive bomb effectsAssign multiple Amp+Cab parameters to a single switch. With enough assignments, you could almost treat the switch as an A/B amp channel switcherAssign Mic or IR Select to a footswitch. Set the two mic models or IRs as min and max values. Now you can instantly toggle between two mics or two IRs",{"id":1923,"title":1924,"titles":1925,"content":1926,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#clearing-a-blocks-controller-assignments","Clearing a Block's Controller Assignment(s)",[1905],"1. From the Controller Assign screen, select the block whose controller assignments you want to clear and press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 1 (Clear Controllers).",{"id":1928,"title":1929,"titles":1930,"content":1931,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#clearing-all-controller-assignments","Clearing All Controller Assignments",[1905],"1. From the Controller Assign screen, press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 2 (Clear All Controllers). The following dialog appears: 3. Press Knob 6 (OK). Clearing All Controller Assignments also removes the Wah and Volume assignments from EXP 1 and EXP 2. Use this function with caution!",{"id":1933,"title":1934,"titles":1935,"content":1936,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/controller-assign#customizing-a-controller-footswitch-label","Customizing a Controller Footswitch Label",[1905],"As there's no room for a dedicated Customize button on the Controller Assign page, customizing scribble strips for footswitches only assigned to one or more controllers must be done from the \"Command Center\" page. Once any item has been assigned to a footswitch, touch and hold the footswitch (but don't press), and a Customize button appears above Knob 5.",{"id":1938,"title":1939,"titles":1940,"content":1941,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings","Global Settings",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL include the Global Settings menu which contains additional parameters that apply to all setlists and presets, such as input and output levels, custom footswitch mode settings, etc. The upper right corner displays the Helix device's current firmware version.",{"id":1943,"title":1939,"titles":1944,"content":1945,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings",[],"The Global Settings menu contains additional parameters that apply to all setlists and presets, such as input and output levels, custom footswitch mode settings, etc. The upper right corner displays the Helix device's current firmware version. Visit [line6.com/support][https://line6.com/support) for information on the latest Helix firmware updates. 1. Press MENU to open the Menu. 2. Press Knob 6 (Global Settings). The Global Settings screen appears: 3. Move the joystick to select one of the six submenus. If necessary, press \u003C PAGE/PAGE > to view more parameters.",{"id":1947,"title":1948,"titles":1949,"content":1950,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#resetting-all-global-settings","Resetting All Global Settings",[1939],"Resetting the Helix Global Settings returns them to factory default. Performing this reset does not affect any presets you may have created. 1. From any Global Settings submenu, press ACTION. 2. Press Knob 1 (Factory Settings). The following dialog appears: 3. Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":1952,"title":1953,"titles":1954,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-insouts","Global Settings > Ins/Outs",[1939],{"id":1956,"title":1957,"titles":1958,"content":1959,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#page-1","Page 1",[1939,1953],"KnobParameterDescription1Guitar InPad If your guitar or bass has active or really loud pickups, you may want to turn this on. There's really no rule; use what sounds best.2Mic In48V Phantom When on, Helix provides 48V from the XLR Mic In jack to power studio condenser microphones.3Mic In GainSets analog gain for the XLR Mic In jack.4Mic In Low CutSets the frequency of the Mic In's dedicated, variable low-cut filter. Turn fully counter clockwise (or push) to disable.5USB In 1/2 DestinationIf you like to jam along with iTunes®, YouTube™ or your DAW, this setting determines from which of the Helix outputs your computer or iPad primary stereo audio stream will be heard. USB In 1/2 bypasses all Helix processing; USB 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8 can be selected as input blocks for processing DAW tracks or re-amping. Normally, you should choose \"Multi,\" which sends USB In 1/2 directly to the 1/4\", XLR, and Digital outputs. See \"USB Audio\".6USB In 1/2 TrimSets the level of incoming audio from USB 1/2, which bypasses all Helix processing. Normally, this should be left at 0.0dB.",{"id":1961,"title":1962,"titles":1963,"content":1964,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#page-2","Page 2",[1939,1953],"KnobParameterDescription11/4\" OutputsChoose \"Instrument\" when connecting the Helix 1/4\" outputs to stompboxes or the front of guitar amps; choose \"Line\" when connecting to mixers, studio monitors, or standalone recorders. When using a single amp or speaker, connect only the LEFT/MONO 1/4\" jack.2XLR OutputsChoose \"Mic\" when connecting the Helix XLR outputs to standalone mic preamps or the XLR mic inputs on mixers; choose \"Line\" when connecting to studio monitors or the line inputs on mixers. When using a mono playback system, connect only the LEFT/MONO XLR jack.3, 4, 5, 6Send/Return 1, Send/Return 2, Send/Return 3, Send/Return 4Choose \"Instrument\" when using a Send/Return pair as an FX loop for stompboxes; choose \"Line\" when using a Send/Return pair as an FX loop for line-level rack processors, or as additional inputs and outputs for connecting keyboards, drum machines, mixers, and other gear.",{"id":1966,"title":1967,"titles":1968,"content":1969,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#page-3","Page 3",[1939,1953],"KnobParameterDescription1, 2Re-amp Src (USB 7), Re-amp Src (USB 8)USB out 7 and 8 are dedicated for recording a DI signal which can be used for re-amping; choose which two inputs will be sent dry (unprocessed) to your DAW. See \"USB Audio\".3Volume Knob ControlsDetermines which output(s) are affected when turning the top panel VOLUME knob. For example, you may want to control the level sent from the 1/4\" outputs to your stage monitor without affecting the XLR level sent to the front-of-house mixer.4Headphones MonitorDetermines which signal(s) are heard from the PHONES output. Normally you would set this to Multi (1/4\" + XLR + Digital+ USB 1/2), but there may be a situation where you only want to hear what's sent from the 1/4\" or XLR outs, particularly if they are being fed different signals (or band members!)5Digital OutputOne digital output can be active at a time; choose S/PDIF or AES/EBU. Connecting an L6 LINK device to Helix automatically disables S/PDIF out. USB audio is not affected by this setting. Also see \"Output\".6Digital Out LevelSets the S/PDIF and AES/EBU output level. Normally, this should be left at 0.0dB.",{"id":1971,"title":1972,"titles":1973,"content":1974,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#page-4","Page 4",[1939,1953],"KnobParameterDescription1Sample RateDetermines the sample rate of the Helix S/PDIF and AES/EBU outputs; choose 44.1 kHz (the default), 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz. When connecting to another device's S/PDIF or AES/EBU input, make sure both units are set to the same sample rate. Note that this setting does not affect Helix USB audio sample rate operation.",{"id":1976,"title":1977,"titles":1978,"content":1979,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-preferences","Global Settings > Preferences",[1939],"KnobParameterDescription1Snapshot EditsDetermines whether or not any edits made to a snapshot (block on/off, parameter control Command Center, tempo) are remembered when returning to that snapshot. When set to \"Recall,\" any snapshot edits are recalled when jumping from snapshot to snapshot, and appear as you last left them. When set to \"Discard,\" any snapshot edits are discarded when jumping from snapshot to snapshot, and appear as the preset was last saved. If you want to save changes made to a snapshot while Snapshot Edits is set to \"Discard,\" press SAVE twice before selecting another. The camera icon on the home screen shows you the Snapshot Edits setting at a glance—When set to \"Recall,\" the camera is gray; when set to \"Discard,\" the camera is red. At any time, hold BYPASS and press SAVE to toggle this setting. Also see \"Determining Snapshot Edit Behavior\"2Tap Tempo PitchDetermines how delay repeats behave when repeatedly pressing TAP. \"Accurate\" respects the natural pitch fluctuations inherent when changing a real delay pedal's time knob; \"Transparent\" minimizes these artifacts.3Preset NumberingDetermines whether each setlist's presets appear as 32 banks of four (A B C D) or are numbered 000-127 (convenient when recalling presets via MIDI program change messages).",{"id":1981,"title":1982,"titles":1983,"content":1984,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-miditempo","Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo",[1939],"KnobParameterDescription1MIDI Base ChannelSets the system base MIDI channel that Helix uses for both receiving and sending MIDI communication via MIDI and USB. Note that MIDI messages assigned from the Command Center page can be set to any MIDI channel.2MIDI ThruWhen on, MIDI OUT also acts as a MIDI THRU; that is, it passes through any MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN jack.3MIDI Over USBWhen on, Helix receives and transmits MIDI data via USB in the same capacity as its MIDI jacks.4MIDI PC Send/ReceiveDetermines whether or not Helix automatically sends MIDI program change (PC messages when selecting presets. This setting does not affect any MIDI commands manually assigned from the Command Center page. Also determines whether or not Helix responds to program changes.5Tempo SelectThe \"Speed\" or \"Time\" parameters of all tempo-based FX can be set to a note value that follows Tap Tempo or the tempo set with Knob 6 (Snapshot BPM/Preset BPM/Global BPM). Choose whether the Helix tempo is stored and recalled with each snapshot, recalled with each preset, or is applied globally across all presets and snapshots.6Snapshot BPM/Preset BPM/Global BPMThis is an alternative way to set the Helix tempo, as opposed to stepping repeatedly on the TAP footswitch. Depending on the Knob 5 (Tempo Select) setting, this value is saved per snapshot, per preset, or globally. The Helix device's tempo has a resolution of 0.1 BPM (beats per minute). You can also quickly access this parameter at any time by briefly touching the TAP footswitch.",{"id":1986,"title":1987,"titles":1988,"content":1989,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-footswitches","Global Settings > Footswitches",[1939],"KnobParameterDescription1Touch SelectIf you don't want Helix to automatically select assigned blocks or items when you touch a switch top, or engage Quick Bypass Assign when you touch a switch top for 2 seconds, set this to \"Off.\" If you play barefoot, you might want to turn this off as well.2Preset Mode SwitchesBy default, Preset footswitch mode displays eight presets (four on each row). Choose from \"8 Presets,\" \"Preset/Stomp\" (one bank of presets on the top row, switches from stomp mode on the bottom row), \"Stomp/Preset\" (switches from stomp mode on the top row, one bank of presets on the bottom row), \"Preset/Snap\" (one bank of presets on the top row, Snapshots 1-4 on the bottom row), \"Snap/Preset\" (Snapshots 1-4 on the top row, one bank of presets on the bottom row), \"Snap/Stomp\" (Snapshots 1-4 on the top row, switches from stomp mode on the bottom row), \"Stomp/Snap\" (switches from stomp mode on the top row, Snapshots 1-4 on the bottom row), and \"8 Snapshots\" (Snapshots 1-8).3Stomp Mode SwitchesWhen set to \"10 switches,\" FS1 (BANK ) and FS7 (BANK ) are re-purposed as additional Stomp switches. This is only for Stomp footswitch mode; while in Preset, Snapshot, or Looper footswitch modes, BANK and BANK are retained.4Snapshot Mode SwitchesWhen set to \"Auto Return,\" Helix returns to the previous footswitch mode after selecting a snapshot. When set to \"Manual Return,\" Helix stays in Snapshot footswitch mode until you press FS6 (CANCEL).5Up/Down SwitchesWhen set to \"Presets\" or \"Snapshots,\" FS1 (BANK ) and FS7 (BANK ) change to PRESET / or SNAPSHOT / , where pressing either switch instantly selects the next/previous preset or snapshot without a bank queue. This is useful if you've programmed a fixed setlist for your show, and just want to increment through all your presets or snapshots. You can also cycle through all three switch types by pressing and holding both the and switches for two seconds. At any time, press and hold both FS1 and FS7 to cycle through BANK / , PRESET / , and SNAPSHOT /.",{"id":1991,"title":1992,"titles":1993,"content":1994,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-exp-pedals","Global Settings > EXP Pedals",[1939],"KnobParameterDescription1, 2, 3EXP 1, 2, 3 PolarityIf your external expression pedal appears to work backwards—for example, a Volume pedal block is loudest with the heel all the way down—set this to \"Inverted.\"4EXP 1, 2, 3 Pedal PositionDetermines whether the Helix expression pedal positions are recalled per snapshot, per preset, or applied globally. If you want a Volume Pedal or Wah to maintain its position when switching presets, set this to \"Global.\"",{"id":1996,"title":1997,"titles":1998,"content":1999,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#global-settings-displays","Global Settings > Displays",[1939],"KnobParameterDescription1LED Ring BrightnessDetermines whether the Stomp mode footswitches' colored LED rings appear dim when bypassed, or off when bypassed. When playing in bright sunlight, you may want to set this to \"Off/Bright\" to increase contrast.2Tap Tempo LEDIf you'd prefer to not see the FS12 (TAP) red LED constantly flashing, you can turn it  off.",{"id":2001,"title":2002,"titles":2003,"content":2004,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#usb-audio","USB Audio",[1939],"Helix functions as a USB 2.0, multiple-input/output, 24-bit - 96kHz, low-latency audio interface for Windows® and Mac® computers, as well as for iPad and iPhone (with optional Apple Camera Connection Kit adapter), and is compatible with all major DAW software. For USB audio operation on Windows® computers, it is necessary to download and install the Line 6 Helix ASIO® driver (see page 56)For Mac® computers, it is only necessary to download and install the Line 6 Mac® Core Audio driver if you desire audio sample rate operation at rates other than 48kHz. These drivers are available from [line6.com/software][https://line6.com/software). There is no driver installation necessary for an Apple iPad or iPhone. With the Helix default \"Multi\" Input and Output block settings in use, you'll automatically hear audio software playback on USB 1/2 routed directly to the Helix XLR, 1/4\" and Phones outputs. This lets you jam along with YouTube™, iTunes®, or your DAW tracks without hearing them through a bunch of amps and effects. If you set your DAW software track to record from Helix USB 1/2, you'll capture your Helix-processed input signal in the DAW track - with zero-latency monitoring, since you are hearing your input from the Helix hardware outputs before it is routed through your software. The additional Helix USB Inputs and Outputs are available within the Helix Input and Output blocks, and within your DAW software track menus, which can be utilized for numerous routing configurations, all without patching extra cables - see the following examples.",{"id":2006,"title":2007,"titles":2008,"content":2009,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#hardware-monitoring-vs-daw-software-monitoring","Hardware Monitoring vs. DAW Software Monitoring",[1939],"Use of the Helix default \"Multi\" settings for both the Input and Output blocks provides hardware monitoring, which allows you to hear your live input signal at all times, independent of your DAW software's monitor settings. Hardware monitoring can be desirable since it allows you to hear your live guitar or mic input with Helix processing added and essentially \"latency-free,\" since the monitor signal is not routed through your DAW software. In some DAW recording scenarios, it may be preferable to utilize your recording application's \"input monitoring\" or \"software monitoring\" feature, which routes your live input signal through the armed recording track, thus allowing you to monitor the input\neffected by any plug-ins you may have inserted on the track. The one downside of DAW software monitoring, however, is that your live input signal will be delayed slightly due to being routed through the software and back to the Helix outputs, which is referred to as \"latency.\" Helix is designed to provide very low latency operation - see \"ASIO® Driver Settings (Windows® only)\" for info and settings. When a DAW track's software monitoring is active, you'll likely not want to simultaneously hear the Helix hardware monitoring signal. To achieve this, you can set the Helix Output block to USB Out 3/4 or 5/6. These Output block options will route your Helix-processed, stereo signal out to your DAW software without also providing the Helix hardware monitoring to USB 1/2. You'll then need to set your DAW track to receive from the same selected Helix USB Out to record the Helix-processed signal into the track - or, you can optionally set the DAW track input to Helix USB 7 or USB 8 to record a dry DI signal - see the next section. Keep the Helix Input block set to \"Multi\" and your DAW software's main, Master output to Helix USB 1/2 to also hear playback of your full DAW mix.",{"id":2011,"title":2012,"titles":2013,"content":2014,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#di-recording-and-re-amplification","DI Recording and Re-amplification",[1939],"A common DAW recording technique is to record a dry DI (Direct Input) signal, such as the unprocessed signal from your guitar, Variax or mic, along with your mic'ed or processed tone. This allows you to process the DI track later with plug-ins (such as the\nLine 6 POD® Farm Plug-In), and/or \"re-amplify\" the DI track through an amp or other outboard gear. Helix has handy options built right in for recording DI tracks, as well as for easy re-amplification of DI tracks back through your own Helix tones, all without extra hardware or cabling! Helix offers two special DI outputs, USB Outs 7 and 8, which appear as available options within your DAW software track input menus. These two dedicated USB Outs are tapped directly from the Helix input sources of your choice. To configure the Helix input source for each, go to Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Re-amp Src (USB 7) and Re-amp Src (USB 8), where you can select Guitar, Aux, Variax, Variax Mags or Mic:",{"id":2016,"title":2017,"titles":2018,"content":2019,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#recording-a-dry-di-track","Recording a Dry DI Track",[1939,2012],"For this example, we'll record guitar into two DAW tracks simultaneously, with one capturing the Helix-processed tone and the other the unprocessed DI guitar. 1. In the Helix Global Settings>Ins/Outs>Page 3 screen, set Re-amp Src (USB 7) to \"Guitar\" (as shown above).2. Dial in your desired Helix tone, while keeping the Helix Input and Output blocks both set to the default \"Multi\" setting.3. Create two new audio tracks in your DAW software project: Create one mono track to record the dry DI guitar, and set the track's input to Helix USB 7. Create one stereo track to record your full, stereo Helix-processed tone and set the track's input to Helix USB 1/2. 4. Set both tracks' outputs, as well as the DAW Master output, to Helix USB 1/2 to allow all tracks to play back through Helix. Setting the stereo track's output to Helix USB 1/2 allows you to hear your Helix-processed tone via the Helix hardware monitoring while recording. For this configuration, disable software monitoring on all DAW tracks. 5. Arm both these DAW audio tracks, hit the Record button and start laying down your guitar performance! Now you have your Helix-processed track to hear with the project, and a separate DI track with which you can further experiment at any time with DAW plug-ins and/or re-amping (see the next section).",{"id":2021,"title":2022,"titles":2023,"content":2024,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#re-amping-through-helix","Re-amping Through Helix",[1939,2012],"If your DAW software provides options for routing individual audio tracks to outputs other than just the main Helix USB Out 1/2, then you can use these steps for re-amping a dry recorded DI track back through Helix. 1. In your DAW software, set the DI track's Output setting to a Helix stereo USB Out other than USB Out 1/2. For this example we'll use Helix USB Out 3/4.2. Create a new stereo track in your DAW project and set this track's Input and Output both to USB 1/2 - Let's name this track \"Re-amped.\" Arm the track for recording. In some DAW software it may be necessary to also activate the software monitoring feature on this \"re-amped\" track to monitor the Helix-processed signal when playing back your project. See your software's documentation. 3. On Helix, select the Input block and set it to receive from the same USB stereo pair (USB In 3/4) and keep the Output block set to \"Multi.\" Load your choice of amps and effects on the current Helix preset. 4. Now play your DAW project and you'll hear the DI track \"re-amped\" through your Helix! Adjust the DI track's volume slider to make sure the signal feeding into Helix is not too hot. Tweak your Helix amp & effects as desired while listening with the playback of your project mix. 5. Once you have your re-amplified guitar tone they way you like it, Solo both the DI and re-amped tracks, rewind to the start of the project and hit the DAW Record button, allowing it to capture the signal into the new re-amped track in real-time. Allow the DI track to play to the end, stop recording and you've created your new re-amped guitar track! Note that you still have your original Guitar DI track, and you can repeat this process to create additional re-amped tracks with different Helix settings, add plug-ins, blend with your original guitar track and more.",{"id":2026,"title":2027,"titles":2028,"content":2029,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#asio-driver-settings-windows-only","ASIO® Driver Settings (Windows® only)",[1939],"When using Helix as an audio interface for Windows® DAW applications, it is highly recommended to configure the software to utilize the \"ASIO®\" Helix driver. The Line 6 ASIO® driver offers the superior, low-latency audio performance required for DAW recording. This driver selection is typically found in your DAW software's Preferences or Options dialog - see your software's documentation. Download and install the latest Line 6 Helix ASIO® driver from line6.com/software. Once the ASIO® Helix driver has been selected in your DAW software, you'll also see a button in the same dialog for \"ASIO® Settings\" (or with a similar title). Press this button to launch the Helix Control Panel, which is where you make the following Helix driver settings. Sound Control Panel - This button launches the Windows® Sound Control Panel, which is where you can optionally configure Helix to be the audio playback device for multi-media applications (such as Windows® Media Player, iTunes®, etc.) These settings are not relevant for your DAW software, since these applications utilize the standard Windows® driver.Default Bit Depth - Select the Bit Depth at which Helix will operate for recording and playback with your DAW software. 24 bit or 32 bit are recommended for quality audio production.ASIO® Buffer Size - Your goal is to achieve the lowest latency possible in your DAW software, but with glitch-free audio performance. Smaller buffer size results in lower latency, however, also increases the demands on your computer, which can result in clicks, pops or other audio artifacts. Start with a lower slider setting here and, if you encounter audio performance issues, come back to this panel and move this slider to the right incrementally to remedy the problem. Click the Apply and OK buttons when your Helix Control Panel settings are complete to return to your DAW software. Please also refer to your DAW software's documentation for more about its own specific audio device, buffer and project settings.",{"id":2031,"title":2032,"titles":2033,"content":2034,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/global-settings#core-audio-driver-settings-mac-os-x-only","Core Audio Driver Settings (Mac® OS X only)",[1939],"To use Helix as an audio interface for Mac® applications, it is not necessary to install any additional driver. Helix will utilize the Mac® computer's \"Class Compliant\" USB driver automatically simply by connecting to your USB port. Helix will then appear as a selectable Core Audio device within the Mac® Utilities > Audio MIDI Setup panel and/or directly within your audio and multimedia applications. However, note that this Apple Class Compliant driver offers strictly 48kHz native sample rate operation. If you prefer to use a different native sample rate (or if your particular DAW application requires it), you can optionally download and install the Line 6 Mac® Core Audio driver from [line6.com/software][https://line6.com/software). This Line 6 driver offers 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88kHz or 96kHz sample rate operation.",{"id":2036,"title":2037,"titles":2038,"content":2039,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start","Quick Start",[],"Helix Help is the unofficial guide for the Line 6 HX family of products. Get started to find models, blocks, amps, effects, distortions, dynamics, modulations, pitch effects, cabs, mics, reference guides, notable users, release notes, and tips.",{"id":2041,"title":2037,"titles":2042,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#quick-start",[],{"id":2044,"title":2045,"titles":2046,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#helix-cheat-sheet","Helix Cheat Sheet",[2037],{"id":2048,"title":2049,"titles":2050,"content":2051,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#selecting-presets-and-setlists","Selecting Presets and Setlists",[2037],"1. Turn PRESET to select presets within the current setlist. Helix stores eight setlists, each containing 32 banks of four presets (A, B, C, and D). As we promised, no math - that's a grand total of 1,024 preset locations. If that's not enough, your cover band should be asking for more money. 2. Press PRESET to open the Setlist menu: Navigating the Setlist menu is straight forward: Turn the joystick (or move it up and down) to select items in a list.From the Setlist column, press the joystick (or move it right) to load its first preset.From the Preset column, move the joystick left to go back to the Setlist column.Turn Knob 3 (Reorder Preset) to move the selected preset up and down the list. 3. Use the joystick to select Setlist 8 TEMPLATES > Preset 01A The dark text above Knob 2 displays the required MIDI messages for recalling the Helix device's setlists, presets, and/or snapshots from external MIDI devices or software. In the illustration above, the FACTORY 1 setlist is recalled with a CC32 message of 007, the 16B Bottle Message preset is recalled with a PC (program change) message of 005, and SNAPSHOT 1 is recalled with a CC69 message of 000. 4. Press HOME to return to the Home screen. You should see something like this:",{"id":2053,"title":2054,"titles":2055,"content":2056,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#preset-footswitch-mode","Preset Footswitch Mode",[2037],"Preset mode is used to navigate presets in the current setlist. 1. If not already there, press FS6 (MODE) to select Preset mode.\nThe middle eight switches display two banks of presets and the active preset appears with a red LED ring and white scribble strip: 2. Press BANK or BANK to choose the desired banks. The banks' presets flash, indicating they're ready to load. 3. Press one of the eight preset switches to load the preset. Footswitch behavior can be customized. See \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"",{"id":2058,"title":2059,"titles":2060,"content":2061,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#stomp-footswitch-mode","Stomp Footswitch Mode",[2037],"While in Stomp mode, each of the middle eight footswitches can do a number of things: Toggle one or more blocks on and offToggle between two values of one or more parametersGenerate a MIDI, External Amp control, or CV/Expression messageAll of the above, even simultaneously If not already there, press FS6 (MODE) to select Stomp mode. The middle eight footswitches display blocks' model names, parameter names, Command Center messages, and/or customized labels: If a switch is assigned to multiple blocks or items, its scribble strip reads \"MULTIPLE (X),\" where X is the number of assignments, and stepping on the switch turns them all on and off. If some blocks are on and some are bypassed, stepping on the switch toggles each block's bypass state. While in Stomp mode, stepping on BANK or BANK temporarily enters Preset mode. Once you've selected a preset, Helix returns to Stomp mode.",{"id":2063,"title":2064,"titles":2065,"content":2066,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#snapshot-footswitch-mode","Snapshot Footswitch Mode",[2037],"Similar to the snapshots feature in some high end digital mixers, each of the Helix device's eight snapshots stores and recalls the state of certain elements in the current preset, including: Block Bypass — The bypass (on/off) state of all processing blocks (except Looper), independent of any footswitch assignments. Also see \"Snapshots > Block Bypass\")Parameter Control —The values of any parameters assigned to controllers (up to 64 per preset). Also see \"Snapshots > Parameter Control\"Command Center —The values of any instant MIDI CC, Bank/Prog, MMC, and CV Out messages, plus the state (dim or lit) of any CC Toggle, CV Toggle, and Ext Amp messages. Also see \"Command Center\"\n- Tempo —The current system tempo, if \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" > Tempo Select is set to \"Per Snapshot.\" (By default, it's set to \"Per Preset\") 1. Press BANK and BANK simultaneously to enter Snapshot mode. The middle eight switches flash, indicating a snapshot is ready to be selected. 2. Press one of the eight snapshot switches to select it. Snapshots are powerful enough to warrant their own chapter. See \"Snapshots\" for more information. If you don't want Snapshot footswitches to disappear after selecting one, set \"Global Settings > Footswitches\" > Knob 4 (Snapshot Mode Switches) to \"Manual Return.\" In this case, Helix stays in Snapshot footswitch mode until you press FS6 (CANCEL).",{"id":2068,"title":2069,"titles":2070,"content":2071,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#looper-footswitch-mode","Looper Footswitch Mode",[2037],"Looper mode is only available if a Looper block has been assigned to a footswitch in Stomp mode. Nearly all factory presets in Helix have a Looper block assigned to a footswitch, but your custom presets may not. Looper TypeMax. Loop Length (1/2 Speed)Max. Loop Length (Full Speed)Mono120 seconds60 secondsStereo60 seconds30 seconds 1. From Stomp mode, press the footswitch labeled \"Looper\" (if available). Looper mode appears: If you press while loop playback is stopped, this will always record a new loop, and any previous recording will be discarded. You may change presets while looping, but loop playback will stop unless the preset you select includes the same type of looper block (mono or stereo) on the same path (1 or 2) and is assigned to a footswitch. While in Looper mode, stepping on BANK or BANK temporarily enters Preset mode. Once you've selected a preset, Helix returns to Looper mode. 2. To return to the previous mode, press FS6 (EXIT).",{"id":2073,"title":2074,"titles":2075,"content":2076,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/quick-start#pedal-edit-mode","Pedal Edit Mode",[2037],"Most blocks can be edited without taking your hands off the guitar; if you hate having to reach down and twist knobs, Pedal Edit mode will be your new best friend. Although Pedal Edit is not intended to replace proper controller assignment, in a pinch, it can also be used to tweak one parameter at a time during a performance. 1. Hold FS6 (MODE) for two seconds. The preset's processing blocks appear on the footswitches, flashing: If the preset has more than ten processing blocks, you may not see the block you want. Press FS6 (MORE...) one or more times until you do. Selecting a block in Pedal Edit mode has no correlation to any footswitch assignment it may have. 2. Press the footswitch displaying the block you want to edit. The block's first page of parameters appear at FS1—FS6. If the block has more than one page of parameters, press FS8 (\u003C PAGE) or FS (PAGE >) until you find the parameter. 3. Press the footswitch displaying the parameter you want to adjust. Press and hold a Time or Speed switch to toggle between setting the value in ms or Hz and note divisions (1/4-note, dotted 1/8-note, etc.). 4. Use the expression pedal to adjust the parameter. For fine adjustment, press FS10 (VALUE–) and FS11 (VALUE+). Hold FS (VALUE–) or FS11 (VALUE +) for faster adjustments. To select a different block, press FS7 (BACK). 5. When finished, press FS12 (EXIT). If you want to save any changes made to the preset, hold FS12 (EXIT) for two seconds.",{"id":2078,"title":2079,"titles":2080,"content":2081,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params","Selecting Blocks/Adjusting Parameters",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL include blocks that are objects that represent various elements of a preset, such as amps, cabs, effects, splits, loopers, and even inputs and outputs.",{"id":2083,"title":2079,"titles":2084,"content":2085,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#selecting-blocksadjusting-parameters",[],"Blocks are objects that represent various elements of a preset, such as amps, cabs, effects, splits, loopers, and even inputs and outputs. 1. From Stomp footswitch mode, briefly touch (but don't press) the footswitch assigned to the desired block. The selected block appears with a white box on both the main LCD and the scribble strip: If multiple blocks are assigned to a footswitch, its scribble strip reads \"MULTIPLE (X).\" Touch the top of the switch repeatedly until the desired block is selected. Repeatedly touching a \"MULTIPLE (X)\" switch may jump to completely different screens, depending on its assignments. For example, if a switch is assigned to an effect block, an effect parameter, and a Command Center MIDI message, repeated touches will cycle through all three items on the Home, Controller Assign, and Command Center screens, respectively. Basically, anything on the switch is only a touch away. Alternatively, move the joystick to select a block. Press to quickly select the Amp+Cab, Amp, or Preamp block and its tonestack parameters (Gain, Bass, Mid, Treble, etc.) appear. If a preset has more than one of these blocks, press repeatedly to cycle through all tonestacks. 2. Turn Knobs 1-6 below the screen.\nSome blocks have more than one page of parameters, in which case dots on the right side of the inspector indicate the current page. For example, the dots below indicate that page 1 parameters are visible (the colored dot) and a total of four pages of parameters are available: 3. Press \u003C PAGE/PAGE > to access more parameters (if available).",{"id":2087,"title":2088,"titles":2089,"content":2090,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#bypassing-a-block","Bypassing a Block",[2079],"If a footswitch is assigned to the block, press the switch. Alternatively, select the block and press BYPASS to toggle the block on and off. Bypassed blocks appear semi transparent and, if assigned to a footswitch, its LED ring dims and scribble strip label grays out: The switch's LED ring and scribble strip label reflect the color and bypass state of its most recently selected block or item, even if other blocks assigned to the same switch are enabled.",{"id":2092,"title":2093,"titles":2094,"content":2095,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#choosing-a-blocks-model","Choosing a Block's Model",[2079],"To change an existing block's model, select the block and turn the joystick. To create a new block, select an empty location and turn the joystick. Selecting models within the same category can be very quick. However, as Helix has hundreds of items to choose from, using this method to, say, change a mono distortion block (beginning of the list) into a stereo FX Loop block (end of the list) is very slow. Instead, you should open the model list: 1. Press the joystick to open the model list: Most model categories include subcategories. For example, effects can generally be mono or stereo (stereo models display the icon). Amp+Cab and Amp models have Guitar and Bass subcategories. Cab models have single and dual subcategories. Turn the joystick (or move it up and down) to select items in a list. Press the joystick (or move it right) to view a category or subcategory's contents. Move the joystick left to go back one column. If you encounter items in the list that are grayed out or unavailable, this means the current path (1 or 2) cannot accommodate that\ncategory, subcategory, or model. See \"Dynamic DSP\" 2. Using the joystick, select the desired category, subcategory, and model. Amp+Cab and Cab > Dual blocks are special in that they represent two models within a single block. To change the amp model in an Amp+Cab block, press \u003C PAGE until the amp icon is white and turn the joystick. To change the cab model, press PAGE > until the cab icon is white and turn the joystick.To change the first cab model in a Cab > Dual block, press \u003C PAGE until the left cab icon is white and turn the joystick. To change the second cab model, press PAGE > until the right cab icon is white and turn the joystick. 3. To close the model list, select an item in the far right column and press the joystick again (or press HOME).",{"id":2097,"title":2098,"titles":2099,"content":2100,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#choosing-an-input","Choosing an Input",[2079],"Move the joystick left to select an Input block and turn the joystick. Normally you should select \"Multi,\" which includes three simultaneous inputs: Guitar, Aux, and Variax. To view a list of available inputs, press the joystick. From any Input block, joystick left to jump to the Output block.From any Output block, joystick right to jump to the Input block. We call this the \"Pac Man Shortcut.\"",{"id":2102,"title":2103,"titles":2104,"content":2105,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#choosing-an-output","Choosing an Output",[2079],"Move the joystick right to select an Output block and turn the joystick. Normally you should select \"Multi,\" which includes four simultaneous pairs of outputs: 1/4\", XLR, Digital, and USB 1/2. If Path 1 doesn't have enough block locations or DSP to accommodate your tone, it can be routed to Path 2: Select Path 1's output block and turn the joystick to select Path Path 2's Input block displays an arrow, indicating it is being fed by Path 1. If Path 2 has two input blocks, you may select either Path 2A or 2B, or even split your signal further to both 2A and 2B. See \"2 into 1\" for an example. To view a list of available outputs, press the joystick.",{"id":2107,"title":2108,"titles":2109,"content":2110,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#moving-blocks","Moving Blocks",[2079],"1. Select any block (other than Input or Output) and press ACTION.\nThe block appears \"picked up\" and the action panel appears. The inspector's icon shows you the directions in which the block can be moved. 2. Move the joystick left or right to move the block.\nMoving the joystick down moves the block to a new parallel B path. See \"Serial vs. Parallel Routing\" for details. A block on Path 1 cannot be moved to Path 2 (and vice versa). You can, however, copy and paste a block from one path to the other. See next section. 3. Press ACTION again (or ) to close the action panel.",{"id":2112,"title":2113,"titles":2114,"content":2115,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#copying-and-pasting-a-block","Copying and Pasting a Block",[2079],"Blocks from one path can be copied and then pasted into the same path, the other path, or a path in an entirely different preset. Select the block you wish to copy and press ACTION.Press Knob 1 (Copy Block).Select the location you wish to paste the block—even in a different preset—and press ACTION.Press Knob 2 (Paste Block). Inputs, Outputs, Splits, Merges, and Loopers can also be copied and pasted. However, if you, for example, try pasting the Looper into the Split block's location, Knob 2 (Paste Block) will be grayed out. Furthermore, if the destination path's DSP cannot accommodate the copied block, the header will briefly read \"Cannot Paste—Path 1 or 2 DSP full!\" See \"Dynamic DSP\"",{"id":2117,"title":2118,"titles":2119,"content":2120,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#clearing-a-block","Clearing a Block",[2079],"Select the block you wish to clear and press ACTION.Press Knob 3 (Clear Block).",{"id":2122,"title":2123,"titles":2124,"content":2125,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#clearing-all-blocks","Clearing All Blocks",[2079],"Clearing all blocks removes all processing blocks (including the Looper) and resets both Path 1 and 2 to serial. It does not affect Path 1A or Path 2A Input and Output blocks, nor does it affect the \"Command Center\". Press ACTION.Press Knob 4 (Clear All Blocks). The following dialog appears: Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":2127,"title":2128,"titles":2129,"content":2130,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#savingnaming-a-preset","Saving/Naming a Preset",[2079],"1. Press SAVE to open the Save Preset screen: Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor. Turn the joystick (or move it up/down) to change the selected character. Press Knob 2 (Delete) to delete the selected character and shift all following characters to the left. Press Knob 3 (Insert) to insert a space and shift all following characters to the right. Press the joystick to cycle through A, a, 0, and SPACE. 2. Turn Knob 4 (Setlist) and Knob 5 (Destination) to choose the Setlist and Preset location you wish to overwrite. Any of the Helix 1,024 presets can be overwritten.3. Press SAVE again or Knob 6 (Save).",{"id":2132,"title":2133,"titles":2134,"content":2135,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#serial-vs-parallel-routing","Serial vs. Parallel Routing",[2079],"For many guitar tones, a serial (one stereo path) signal flow is more than adequate. For example, our 8 TEMPLATES > 01A Quick Start preset has a volume pedal, wah pedal, Amp+Cab, reverb, and looper, but there's still room for distortion, modulation, and delay blocks: For more sophisticated tones, a parallel (two stereo paths) signal flow can be created. This lets one split the signal into two stereo paths, process them separately, and mix the two paths back together. 1. Select the Amp+Cab block and press ACTION to pick it up.2. Move the joystick down. The Amp+Cab block is moved to a newly created parallel path B (lower). In the illustration above: Our guitar signal goes into the Volume and Wah blocks.The signal is split to path 1A (upper) and path 1B (lower).Stereo path 1A (upper) is sent to the Reverb and Looper blocks and Stereo path 1B (lower) is sent to the Amp+Cab block.Stereo paths 1A and 1B are merged together after the Looper block and sent to the Multi Output. 3. Press ACTION again to drop the Amp+Cab block. This preset probably doesn't sound ideal. A more appropriate tone may have paths 1A\nand 1B each with an Amp+Cab block, only to merge again before the Reverb... ...or maybe a single Amp block splitting into two separate Cab blocks... ...or two separate Amp and two separate Cab blocks... ...or two separate Amp blocks merging into a Cab > Dual block. Remember, this is only half of your tone. You still have Paths 2A and 2B to play with!",{"id":2137,"title":2138,"titles":2139,"content":2140,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#removing-parallel-path-b","Removing Parallel Path B",[2079],"To remove path B, simply clear any blocks on path B (lower) or move them all back up to path A (upper).",{"id":2142,"title":2143,"titles":2144,"content":2145,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#moving-split-merge-blocks-for-more-parallel","Moving Split & Merge Blocks for More Parallel",[2079],"1. Use the joystick to select the point where paths A and B split \"Split\" and \"Merge\" blocks only appear when selected, but can be adjusted and moved like any other processing block. 2. Press ACTION to pick up the Split or Merge block for moving. Choose one of the following parallel routing options:",{"id":2147,"title":2148,"titles":2149,"content":2150,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#dynamic-dsp","Dynamic DSP",[2079],"Like nearly all modern audio processors, the Helix engine is based on DSP (Digital Signal Processing). Some models require many times more DSP horsepower than others, so it makes logical sense that fewer of those models could exist in a tone. To work around this, some processors restrict you to one amp, one reverb, one delay, etc. With Helix, we feel it's important to let you keep adding whatever you want to your tone, even if you may eventually run out of DSP. That said, there are some rules governing the number of certain types of blocks you can add to a preset: Block TypeTotal CountAmp+Cab, Amp, or Preamp blocksAny combination, up to four (two per path)Cab blocks (includes Amp+Cab blocks)Up to four (two per path; Cab > Dual blocks are considered two)Impulse Response blocksUp to four 1024-point IRs (two per path) or two 2048-point IRs (one per path)Looper blockOne To see which models can be added to the current path, press the joystick to open the Model List. Grayed out items cannot be accommodated and are skipped over - See \"Selecting Blocks/Adjusting Parameters\": Tips to Optimize DSP Each of the Helix device's two primary paths utilizes its own DSP. If all of your blocks are on paths 1A and 1B, you're only using half its horsepower! If you plan on creating tones with two or more amps and more than a handful of effects, expect to use both paths 1 and 2Some block types use much more DSP than others, such as amps, cabs, IRs, and pitch shifters. Not surprisingly, the Amp+Cab block uses the most. EQ, Dynamics, Volume/Pan, and Send/Return blocks use relatively littleSome models may use more DSP than others in the same category. This is especially true with amp modelsInstead of a parallel path with two Amp+Cab blocks or two separate Amps and Cabs, try adding a single Amp block followed by a single Cab > Dual block (mixing two different Cabs can provide some substantial variations)The stereo version of an effects block will use roughly twice as much DSP as a mono version of the same block. Likewise, the dual version of a cab block will use roughly twice as much DSP as the single versionSome model categories have \"Simple\" blocks, which utilize less DSP than othersInstead of toggling between two of the same amp or effects blocks (with different settings), use controllers or snapshots to instantly adjust parameters within a single block.",{"id":2152,"title":2153,"titles":2154,"content":2155,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/selecting-blocks-adjusting-params#block-order-and-stereo-imaging","Block Order and Stereo Imaging",[2079],"Most of the Helix effects models have both mono and stereo versions. A stereo block displays after its model name in the inspector. The stereo imaging—or how wide your tone appears with stereo speakers or headphones—is highly dependent on the type of blocks you add and in what order. Keep the following things in mind when building tones: All Amp+Cab, Amp, and Preamp blocks are mono, so any stereo signal sent into these will be collapsed to mono. As such, it's a good idea to add only mono blocks before amps and preampsAdding a mono effects block will collapse any preceding stereo blocks on the same path to monoIf you're only ever connecting Helix to the front of a single guitar amp or PA/FRFR speaker, there may be no need to use stereo models at all (except, of course, for models that are only offered as stereo!)",{"id":2157,"title":2158,"titles":2159,"content":2160,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots","Snapshots",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL include snapshots which conveniently change multiple effects and settings with a single tap of a footswitch. With Helix firmware 2.0 or higher, you'll see a camera icon in the upper right corner of the screen. The number indicates the current snapshot.",{"id":2162,"title":2158,"titles":2163,"content":2164,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#snapshots",[],"With Helix firmware 2.0 or higher, you'll see a camera icon in the upper right corner of the screen. The number indicates the current snapshot. Why should I care about snapshots? To be honest, maybe you shouldn't. Ask yourself these questions: Hey self, when performing live, does the small gap when switching tones drive me nuts?If my delay repeats and reverb trails don't seamlessly spill over when switching tones, does it drive me nuts?Do I secretly wish I were an octopus, so I can constantly change amp and effects settings throughout a song? If you answered \"M'eh\" or \"Huh?,\" stop reading this now, go play guitar, completely ignore the camera icon, and you'll never have to worry about snapshots again. Seriously. However, if you answered \"Yes!\" to any of these questions, keep reading. Okay, I'm still reading There's always going to be a small audible gap when switching presets in any box with the Helix device's level of dynamic model allocation and routing complexity; that's just how advanced DSP works. However, snapshots allow for a surprising amount of tonal control from within the same preset, and every change happens instantly and seamlessly. Similar to the snapshots feature in some high end digital mixers, each of the Helix device's eight snapshots stores and recalls the state of certain elements in the current preset, including: Block Bypass — The bypass (on/off) state of all processing blocks (except Looper), independent of any footswitch assignments. Also see \"Snapshots > Block Bypass\"Parameter Control — The values of any parameters assigned to controllers (up to 64 per preset). Also see \"Snapshots > Parameter Control\"Command Center — The values of any instant MIDI CC, Bank/Prog, MMC, and CV Out messages, plus the state (dim or lit) of any CC Toggle, CV Toggle, and Ext Amp messages. Also see \"Command Center\"Tempo — The current system tempo, if \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" > Tempo Select is set to \"Per Snapshot.\" (By default, it's set to \"Per Preset\") Depending on how you set them up, snapshots can act as eight variations of the same tone, eight drastically different tones, or any combination thereof—all within the same preset. In many cases, a single preset's snapshots may accommodate all the various tones required for a song.",{"id":2166,"title":2167,"titles":2168,"content":2169,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#snapshots-block-bypass","Snapshots > Block Bypass",[2158],"Snapshots store and recall the current bypass (on/off) state for all processing blocks. For example, Snapshot 1—INTRO could have Distortion 1, Amp 1, Cab, Mod 1, and Delay 1 on: Snapshot 2—VERSE could have Dynamics, Distortion 2, Filter, FX Loop 1, Amp 2, Cab, Delay 2, and Reverb on: Snapshot 3—BRIDGE could have Dynamics, FX Loop 2, Amp 2, IR, EQ, Mod 2, and Delay 2 on: Snapshot 4—CHORUS could have everything on: And Snapshot 5—INTERLUDE could just be Amp 1 and the IR: Note that all snapshots in a particular preset share the same models; you cannot, for example, add a US Deluxe Amp block in Snapshot 1 and switch its model to Essex A30 in Snapshot 2. However, if Helix has enough available DSP, you can load both amps into the same preset and snapshots can enable neither, one, or both of them. Snapshots make it easy for multiple blocks assigned to the same footswitch to end up in unexpected states. For example, if FS2 toggles between Delay (ON) and Reverb (OFF) blocks and a snapshot turns the Reverb on, FS2 will suddenly turn both blocks on and off together. See \"Using Snapshots\" for more information.",{"id":2171,"title":2172,"titles":2173,"content":2174,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#snapshots-parameter-control","Snapshots > Parameter Control",[2158],"In addition, parameters can be set to jump to specific values with each snapshot. Here's an example where seven parameters (out of a possible 64) are updated instantly with each snapshot: SnapshotVariax ModelAmp GainDelay MixSplit A/BPitchIR SelectOutput Level1 INTROSpank-14.535%Path A 1000#27-7.2dB2 VERSESpank-14.535%Path A 100+5#270.0dB3 BRIDGELester-55.243%Path B 100+3#103+0.8dB4 CHORUSLester-54.550%Path B 1000#103+1.5dB5 INTERLUDESpank-13.98%Even Split+5#270.0dB6 SOLOLester-58.772%Path B 100+12#103+2.6dB7 BREAKDOWNAcous-32.046%Path B 47-12#120.0dB8 OUTROSpank-14.535%Path A 1000#41-3.6dB In the table above, we see that when switching from Snapshot 2—VERSE to Snapshot 3—BRIDGE: The connected Variax guitar switches from the Spank-1 guitar model to the Lester-5 guitar modelThe Amp block's gain increases from 4.5 to 5.2The Delay block's Mix increases from 35% to 43%The Split block routes your guitar from Path A to Path BThe Pitch block's Interval lowers from +5 to +3 semitonesThe IR changes from #27 to #103The Output block's Level increases from 0.0dB to +0.8dB If you want a parameter to be automatically updated with each snapshot, a controller (such as the Snapshots controller) must first be assigned to it. Quick Assigning the Snapshots Controller To adjust a parameter AND have it automatically update persnapshot, press and turn the knob. The parameter's value appears white and in brackets, indicating a controller's assigned to it—in this case, the Snapshots controller: To adjust a parameter WITHOUT it automatically updating persnapshot, just turn the knob like you normally would. As long as a parameter is not assigned to any controller, its value is maintained across snapshots. Hold BYPASS and press a parameter knob to quickly remove any controller assignment (including the Snapshots controller). The value appears without brackets, indicating no controller is assigned to it. See \"Using Snapshots\" for more information. Manually Assigning the Snapshots Controller 1. From the Home screen, press and hold the knob for the parameter you want to update with each snapshot.\nHelix jumps to the Controller Assign page and displays your parameter above Knob 1 (Parameter). 2. Turn Knob 2 (Controller) to select \"Snapshots.\" Actually, it doesn't matter which controller you assign the parameter to, as all controller-assigned parameters automatically update with each snapshot. The exception is any parameters controlled by EXP Pedal 1, 2, or 3 (such as Volume, Wah, and Pitch Wham, which are only updated per snapshot if \"Global Settings > EXP Pedals\" > EXP 1/2/3 Pedal Position is set to \"Per Snapshot.\" 3. Press to return to the Home screen. Each preset can have up to 64 controller assignments, including parameters controlled by Snapshots. If you attempt to add a 65th, \"Too many controller assignments!\" appears in the header:In this case, you must clear some controllers to free up assignments. See \"Clearing a Block's Controller Assignment(s)\" or \"Clearing All Controller Assignments\"",{"id":2176,"title":2177,"titles":2178,"content":2179,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#snapshots-command-center","Snapshots > Command Center",[2158],"Snapshots also store and recall the following MIDI, CV, and Ext Amp messages sent to external devices from the Command Center: The value of any Instant MIDI CC, Bank/Prog, MMC, and CV Out messagesThe state (dim value or lit value) of any CC Toggle or CV Toggle messages assigned to footswitchesThe state (dim or lit ) of any Ext Amp messages assigned to footswitches For example, say you have a MIDI-controllable reverb pedal connected to the Helix device's MIDI OUT, an external guitar amp connected to the EXT AMP jack, and DAW software connected via USB. SnapshotExternal Reverb Type (Instant CC)External Reverb Mix (CC Toggle)Amp Channel (Ext Amp)DAW Control (Instant MMC)1 INTROSwell50%1Play2 VERSESwell50%1Play3 BRIDGEShimmer40%2Play4 CHORUSShimmer40%2Play5 INTERLUDEBloom50%1Play6 SOLOShimmer40%2Play7 BREAKDOWNBloom40%1Play8 OUTROSwell50%2Stop In the table above, we see that when switching from Snapshot 7—BREAKDOWN to\nSnapshot 8—OUTRO : The external reverb pedal's effect type switches from Bloom to SwellThe external reverb pedal's mix increases from 40% to 50%The external amp switches from Channel 1 to Channel 2The connected DAW software's playback stops A Command Center message is only transmitted if its value changes. In the table above, Helix is smart enough to not transmit duplicate MMC > Play messages for every snapshot; it will, however, transmit MMC with Snapshot 8, because its value changes from Play to Stop. For more information, see \"Command Center\".",{"id":2181,"title":2182,"titles":2183,"content":2184,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#using-snapshots","Using Snapshots",[2158],"Okay, sick of reading and ready to jump into snapshots? Here we go... 1. Press BANK and BANK simultaneously to enter Snapshot footswitch mode. The middle eight switches flash, indicating a snapshot is ready to be selected. The current snapshot's footswitch lights red and its camera lens appears inverted. 2. Press one of the eight snapshot switches to select a different snapshot. If you don't want Snapshot footswitches to disappear after selecting one, set \"Global Settings > Footswitches\" > Knob 4 (Snapshot Mode Switches) to \"Manual Return.\" In this case, Helix stays in Snapshot footswitch mode until you press FS6 (CANCEL). Alternatively, press the PRESETS knob and turn Knob 5 (Select Snapshot). If you select a snapshot that hasn't yet been altered, it appears the same as the snapshot you came from. As soon as you alter a new snapshot (say, by enabling or bypassing an amp or effect block), the snapshot becomes \"active\" and remembers any changes. 3. Adjust the preset by doing one or more of the following: Turn several blocks on or off by pressing stomp mode footswitches and/or the BYPASS buttonPush-turn a few knobs to automatically assign their parameters to the Snapshots controller (their values appear white and in brackets)On the Command Center page, adjust the values of any Instant messages or press a footswitch assigned to CC Toggle, CV Toggle, or Ext Amp 4. Switch back to the snapshot you started with. Helix instantly and seamlessly returns to its previous state. If you've changed \"Global Settings > Preferences\" > Snapshot Edits to \"Discard,\" you must save the preset before selecting a different snapshot; otherwise any edits will be discarded!",{"id":2186,"title":2187,"titles":2188,"content":2189,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#copyingpasting-a-snapshot","Copying/Pasting a Snapshot",[2158],"Instead of creating a new snapshot from scratch, you may want to copy an existing one to another snapshot location and tweak just a few things. There are actually two ways to do this: Quick Copy/Paste Snapshot from Footswitches 1. Press BANK UP and BANK DOWN simultaneously to enter Snapshot footswitch mode. 2. While touch-holding the footswitch for the snapshot you want to copy, briefly touch and release the footswitch for the snapshot you want to overwrite. A dialog panel appears: 3. Press Knob 6 (OK). Copying/Pasting a Snapshot from the Front Panel 1. Press PRESETS to open the Setlist menu and turn Knob 5 (Select Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to copy. 2. Press ACTION and then Knob 1 (Copy Snapshot). Helix returns to the Setlist menu. 3. Turn Knob 5 (Select Snapshot) to choose the snapshot you want to overwrite. 4. Press ACTION and then Knob 2 (Paste Snapshot). 5. Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":2191,"title":2192,"titles":2193,"content":2194,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#swapping-snapshots","Swapping Snapshots",[2158],"1. Touch (but don't press) the two snapshot switches you want to swap until the following dialog appears: 2. Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":2196,"title":2197,"titles":2198,"content":2199,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#renaming-a-snapshot","Renaming a Snapshot",[2158],"Instead of having to remember the difference between \"SNAPSHOT 1\" and \"SNAPSHOT 2,\" it's helpful to rename your snapshots something descriptive, such as \"VERSE,\" \"BIG SOLO,\" or \"D. IGLOO.\" 1. Press PRESETS to open the Setlist menu. Press Knob 6 (Rename Snapshot).** The Rename Snapshot screen appears: Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor. Snapshot names are limited to 10 characters. Turn the joystick (or move it up/down) to change the selected character. Press Knob 2 (Delete) to delete the selected character and shift all following characters to the left. Press Knob 3 (Insert) to insert a space and shift all following characters to the right. Press the joystick to cycle through A, a, 0, and SPACE. Press Knob 4 (Remove) to remove the custom name. Remove is grayed out until a custom name is applied. 3. Press Knob 6 (OK).\nSnapshot names are only retained if you save the preset. See below.",{"id":2201,"title":2202,"titles":2203,"content":2204,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#saving-snapshots","Saving Snapshots",[2158],"Press SAVE twice to save the preset. Saving a preset stores all of its 8 snapshots automatically. Selecting a preset recalls the Snapshot that was active when the preset was saved.",{"id":2206,"title":2207,"titles":2208,"content":2209,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#determining-snapshot-edit-behavior","Determining Snapshot Edit Behavior",[2158],"Say you're on Snapshot 2 (VERSE) and you change a few things—switch a delay block on, switch a mod block off, tweak an Amp's Gain parameter from your Variax Tone knob, etc. If you switch to Snapshot 4 (CHORUS) and then back to Snapshot 2 for the second verse, should Helix recall those changes or return Snapshot 2 to its state when the preset was last saved? There's no right answer, and Helix lets you choose. 1. Press MENU and then Knob 6 (Global Settings). 2. Move the joystick to select the Preferences submenu. 3. Turn Knob 1 (Snapshot Edits) to set snapshot edit behavior: Recall — Any snapshot edits are recalled when jumping from snapshot to snapshot, and appear as you last left them (the default)Discard — Any snapshot edits are discarded when jumping from snapshot to snapshot, and appear as the preset was last saved. If you want to save changes made to a snapshot while Snapshot Edits is set to \"Discard,\" press SAVE twice before selecting another snapshot The camera icon on the home screen shows you the Snapshot Edits setting at a glance—When set to \"Recall,\" the camera is gray; when set to \"Discard,\" the camera is red. At any time, hold BYPASS and press SAVE to toggle this setting.",{"id":2211,"title":2212,"titles":2213,"content":2214,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/snapshots#arranging-preset-snapshot-and-stomp-switches","Arranging Preset, Snapshot, and Stomp Switches",[2158],"1. Press MENU and then Knob 6 (Global Settings). 2. Move the joystick to select the Footswitches submenu. 3. Turn Knob 2 (Preset Mode Switches) to customize the middle eight switches: 8 Presets—Two banks of presets (the default)Preset/Stomp—One bank of presets on the top row, switches from stomp mode on the bottom rowStomp/Preset—Switches from stomp mode on the top row, one bank of presets on the bottom rowPreset/Snap—One bank of presets on the top row, Snapshots 1-4 on the bottom rowSnap/Preset—Snapshots 1-4 on the top row, one bank of presets on the bottom rowSnap/Stomp—Snapshots 1-4 on the top row, switches from stomp mode on the bottom row (see image below)Stomp/Snap—Switches from stomp mode on the top row, Snapshots 1-4 on the bottom row8 Snapshots—Snapshots 1-8 4. Turn Knob 5 (Up/Down Switches) to customize FS1 and FS7 on the far left. Select Banks (Bank Queue), Presets, or Snapshots (see image above). At any time, press and hold both FS1 and FS7 to cycle through BANK UP/DOWN , PRESET UP/DOWN , and SNAPSHOT UP/DOWN. Tips for Creative Snapshot Use The obvious use case for snapshots is designating them to specific sections of your song. For example, Snapshot 1 would be the Intro, Snapshot 2 would be Verse 1, Snapshot 3 might be the Chorus, and so onTurn any Delay, Reverb, and/or FX Loops blocks' Trails parameter to \"On\" for seamless spillover between snapshots\"SNAPSHOT (X)\" on the scribble strip isn't very descriptive. Don't forget to name your snapshots—See \"Renaming a Snapshot\"Worried that further tweaking might make your tone worse, not better? Snapshots are a great way to compare minor changes between tones without having to take your hands off the guitar.Want to switch channels on your external amp but don't want to waste a stomp footswitch on it? Command Center MIDI, CV, and Ext Amp Instant messages are automatically transmitted when a Snapshot is recalled.Set different keys in Harmony Delay blocks or intervals in Pitch blocks per snapshotSet different Variax models (or tuning!) per snapshotHaving difficulty maintaining consistent volume throughout a song? Set the Output block's Level parameter per snapshot",{"id":2216,"title":2217,"titles":2218,"content":2219,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks","The Blocks",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL use blocks to modify your signal path to produce your desired sound. Lets take a deep dive.",{"id":2221,"title":2217,"titles":2222,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#the-blocks",[],{"id":2224,"title":2225,"titles":2226,"content":2227,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#input","Input",[2217],"Each preset can have up to four Input blocks (one or two per path). BlockDescriptionNoneDisables (mutes) the input block. Only available on Path 2.MultiGuitar, Aux, and Variax inputs are all active simultaneously. Normally, you should choose Multi.GuitarGuitar in only.AuxAux in only. (^10 kΩ input for an active-pickup equipped guitar or bass.)VariaxWith a James Tyler® Variax® (JTV) or Variax® Standard guitar, the \"Variax\" Input source receives the Model or Magnetic signal, depending on the guitar's Model switch setting.Variax MagneticsReceives only the JTV or Variax Standard's magnetic pickup signal.MicMic in only.Return 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4Returns 1, 2, 3, and 4 can act as additional mono input blocks. Returns 1/2 and 3/4 can act as additional stereo input blocks for processing keyboards, drum machines, or even other modelers. If a Return or FX Loop processing block exists in the preset, the utilized Return input will be non-selectable. See \"Send/Return\"S/PDIFS/PDIF digital in only. If a Variax input (or Multi input, which includes Variax) exists on another Input block within the preset, S/PDIF in will be non-selectable.USB 3/4, 5/6, 7/8USB inputs 3/4, 5/6, and 7/8 can all be used for processing tracks from your Mac® or Windows® DAW software. See \"USB Audio\". Helix also receives input from USB 1/2, but it's dedicated for monitoring audio from your computer (or iPad) and bypasses all processing blocks. As such, it's not available as an input block source. All input blocks have a dedicated noise gate. Threshold and Decay parameters are\ngrayed out unless the Input Gate parameter is turned on: Input > Multi and Input > Guitar blocks have an additional Guitar In-Z parameter. Helix has an impedance circuit on its Guitar Input that affects tone a nd feel by loading your guitar's pickups as they would by an effect pedal or amplifier. A lower value will typically result in some high frequency attenuation, lower gain, and an overall \"softer\" feel. A higher value provides full frequency response, higher gain, and an overall \"tighter\" feel. Multi and Variax input blocks have additional pages for Variax parameters:",{"id":2229,"title":2230,"titles":2231,"content":2232,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#output","Output",[2217],"Each preset can have up to four Output blocks (one or two per path). BlockDescriptionMulti1/4\", XLR, Digital, and USB 1/2 outputs are all active simultaneously. Normally, you should choose Multi.Path 2A, 2B, or 2A+BThese outputs only appear for Path 1 output blocks, and are used to route Path 1 into Path 2.1/4\"1/4\" outs only.XLRXLR outs only.Send 1/2, Send 3/4Send 1/2 and 3/4 can act as additional output blocks.Digital S/PDIF, AES/EBU, L6 LINKOnly one digital output can be active at a time; choose S/PDIF or AES/EBU and the desired sample rate in the \"Global Settings > Ins/Outs\". The Global Ins/Outs settings are not necessary for L6 LINK - see \"L6 LINK Output\" for more info.USB 1/2, USB 3/4, USB 5/6USB 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6 can act as additional output blocks for routing paths to your computer, iPad, or iPhone (with optional Apple Camera Connection Kit). USB 7 and 8 are dedicated for re-amping, and are not available as output block destinations. See \"USB Audio\" for details. All output blocks display Knob 1 (Pan) and Knob 2 (Level): Press Knob 1 (Pan) to return Pan to center. Press Knob 2 (Level) to return Level to unity (0.0dB). Use Knob 2 (Level) to set the path's overall level, which is important to ensure all of your presets maintain a consistent volume throughout your set.",{"id":2234,"title":2235,"titles":2236,"content":2237,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#l6-link-output","L6 LINK Output",[2217,2230],"Alternatively, the digital XLR connector can be used for L6 LINK output (use of a 110Ω XLR cable is recommended). L6 LINK provides easy digital audio connectivity between Helix and Line 6 StageSource speakers and/or DT-Series amplifiers. Two StageSource speakers or DT amps can also be connected in series via L6 LINK and your stereo Helix signal is intelligently split, with the left channel going to the first StageSource/DT and the right channel to the second. If you have one StageSource/DT connected, the Helix output is collapsed to mono and fed to the StageSource/DT. Connecting an L6 LINK device to Helix automatically disables S/PDIF out and routes audio out the digital XLR connector - no adjustments of the Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Digital Audio or Sample Rate options are necessary. With an L6 LINK connection to a DT-Series amp, often the Helix Preamp models are a better choice than Amp or Amp+Cab models. Manually configure the analog power amp options on the DT amp for more sonic possibilities! It is possible to use Helix to remotely control several parameters on your DT-Series amp (channel select, power amp topology, reverb, etc.) via MIDI. Connect a 5-pin MIDI cable from Helix Rack's MIDI Out to the DT amp's MIDI In and use the Helix \"Command Center\" to configure the desired MIDI commands for any preset.Start by loading the Helix TEMPLATES > 04D DT25-DT50 Remote preset since it has several handy DT commands already mapped to Helix switches for you. You can customize this template and create your own sets of controls to add to your Helix presets. Also see the DT MIDI Implementation Guide for a complete list of MIDI commands, available from Line 6 manuals",{"id":2239,"title":1626,"titles":2240,"content":2241,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#effects",[2217],"Many Helix effects blocks can be either mono or stereo. Stereo effects display after the model name. Select an effects block and turn the joystick to change its model.",{"id":2243,"title":2244,"titles":2245,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#distortion-models","Distortion Models",[2217,1626],"Go to the Models page to see all available models.",{"id":2248,"title":2249,"titles":2250,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#dynamics-models","Dynamics Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2252,"title":2253,"titles":2254,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#eq-models","EQ Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2256,"title":2257,"titles":2258,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#modulation-models","Modulation Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2260,"title":2261,"titles":2262,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#delay-models","Delay Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2264,"title":2265,"titles":2266,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#reverb-models","Reverb Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2268,"title":2269,"titles":2270,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#pitchsynth-models","Pitch/Synth Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2272,"title":2273,"titles":2274,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#filter-models","Filter Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2276,"title":2277,"titles":2278,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#wah-models","Wah Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2280,"title":2281,"titles":2282,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#volumepan-models","Volume/Pan Models",[2217,1626],{"id":2284,"title":2285,"titles":2286,"content":2287,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#looper-models","Looper Models",[2217,1626],"Go to the Models page to see all available models. Using the 1 Switch Looper: Add a Looper > 1 Switch Looper block to your preset and assign it to a stomp footswitch. (Adding a 1 Switch Looper to HX Effects from Stomp view automatically assigns it to the selected footswitch.)Press the 1 Switch Looper switch. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again. The LED lights green, indicating the loop is playing back.Press the 1 Switch Looper switch again. The LED lights amber, indicating the loop is in overdub mode. Subsequent presses of the switch toggle between play and overdub mode.While the 1 Switch Looper is in play or overdub mode, press and hold the switch for 1 second. The most recent recording is undone. Holding the switch again will redo the recording. On Helix, Helix Rack/Control, and HX Effects, \"UNDO\" or \"REDO\" briefly appears on the scribble strip. On Helix LT, \"UNDO\" or \"REDO\" briefly appears in Performance view.Quickly double-press the 1 Switch Looper switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory.While Looper playback/recording is stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.",{"id":2289,"title":2290,"titles":2291,"content":2292,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#ampcab","Amp+Cab",[2217],"Amp+Cab blocks are convenient in that when you select an Amp model, its matching Cab model is automatically loaded. To change the amp model in an Amp+Cab block, press \u003C PAGE until the amp icon is white and turn the joystick.To change the cab model, press PAGE > until the cab icon is white and turn the joystick. The first page of Amp+Cab parameters is called the tonestack, and represents the knobs you would see on the real amp's panel: Press to quickly select the Amp+Cab, Amp, or Preamp block and access its tonestack parameters (Gain, Bass, Mid, Treble, etc.). If a preset has more than one of these blocks, press repeatedly to cycle through all tonestacks.",{"id":2294,"title":2295,"titles":2296,"content":2297,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#amp-models","Amp Models",[2217,2290],"Go to the Models page to see all available models. Tonestack and deeper amp parameters found on subsequent pages may differ depending on the amp model selected.",{"id":2299,"title":2300,"titles":2301,"content":2302,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#amp","Amp",[2217],"Amp blocks are identical to Amp+Cab blocks, except they contain no matched cab model.",{"id":2304,"title":2305,"titles":2306,"content":2307,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#preamp","Preamp",[2217],"We've also included a complete set of Preamp versions of each Amp model, which provide the tone of just the preamp stage of the amp—recommended when feeding Helix into an external amplifier (either via 1/4\" to your traditional amp or via L6 LINK to a Line 6 DT25 or DT50). Preamp blocks require less DSP than a full Amp block.",{"id":2309,"title":2310,"titles":2311,"content":2312,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#cab","Cab",[2217],"There are two subcategories of Cab blocks—Single and Dual. Not surprisingly, dual Cabs take twice as much DSP as single Cabs. To change the first cab model in a Cab > Dual block, press \u003C PAGE until the left cab icon is white and turn the joystick. To change the second cab, press PAGE > until the right cab icon is white and turn the joystick.",{"id":2314,"title":2315,"titles":2316,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#cab-models","Cab Models",[2217,2310],{"id":2318,"title":2319,"titles":2320,"content":2246,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#mic-models","Mic Models",[2217,2310],{"id":2322,"title":2323,"titles":2324,"content":2325,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#cab-settings","Cab Settings",[2217,2310],"KnobParameterDescription1MicSelects one of the 16 available mic models.2DistanceSets the distance (1 inch to 12 inches) between the mic and the speaker grille.3, 4Low Cut, HighCutFilters a portion of the cab's bass and/or treble frequencies which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness.5EarlyReflcSets the amount of \"early reflections.\" Higher values add more reflective room sound to your Amp tone.6LevelAdjusts the overall output level of the Cab.",{"id":2327,"title":2328,"titles":2329,"content":2330,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#impulse-response-ir","Impulse Response (IR)",[2217],"Impulse Responses are mathematical functions representing the sonic measurements of specific audio systems (for Helix, speaker cabinet and microphone combinations). Helix can load and store up to 128 custom or third-party IRs at a time.",{"id":2332,"title":2333,"titles":2334,"content":2335,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#loading-custom-irs","Loading Custom IRs",[2217,2328],"Loading custom impulse responses requires connecting to the Helix application in your Mac® or Windows® computer. The Helix application is available as a free download from [line6.com/software][https://line6.com/software). 1. Connect Helix to your computer via USB and open the Helix application.\n2. Click the Impulses tab.\n3. Drag one or more IR files from the desktop or any Finder window directly into the Helix app's Impulses list. The Helix app updates the Helix hardware's IR list automatically. Helix can load and store up to 128 IRs at a time. 48kHz, 16-bit, mono, .WAV type IRs of up to 2,048 samples are natively supported. But the Helix app allows you to import IR. WAV files of different sample rate, bit depth, length and stereo format, and the app will convert these attributes automatically before sending to the Helix hardware. Go to the Helix app's Preferences to set the preferred behavior for importing Stereo WAV IRs - there you can choose to import the left or right channel data of the file, or a mix of both channels for the Helix (mono) IR.The imported IR is automatically shortened (or lengthened) to 2,048 samples. You may optionally choose a 1,024-sample version from the model list to save DSP, which fades out the IR halfway through. Prior to firmware 2.90, Impulse Response blocks referenced an IR number, not the actual IR file. For example, if you happened to replace or delete \"IR 12\" from the Helix application, it affected any presets containing IR blocks with \"IR 12\" selected.If you have firmware 2.90 and above, Impulse Response blocks reference each IR file by waveform instead of index number. This means that when presets are shared and the recipient has the same IRs, they'll appear in the right place without having to manually reorder all IRs to match.",{"id":2337,"title":2338,"titles":2339,"content":2340,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#impulse-response-settings","Impulse Response Settings",[2217,2328],"KnobParameterDescription1IR SelectSelects one of the 128 available IR locations. If a location contains an IR, the inspector header displays its name; otherwise, it reads \"\u003C EMPTY >.\"2, 3Low Cut, High CutFilters a portion of the IR's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness.4MixBlends the IR signal with the dry signal passed through the IR block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the IR completely. When set to 100%, the entire path is fed through the IR, and no dry signal is heard.5LevelAdjusts the overall output level of the IR block.",{"id":2342,"title":2343,"titles":2344,"content":2345,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#sendreturn","Send/Return",[2217],"Each of the Helix four sends and returns can be used independently, or used together as an FX loop. FX loops let you dynamically insert your favorite external stompboxes (or rack effects) into any location in your tone. Each send and return pair can be set for instrument (for inserting stompboxes) or line-level operation. See \"Global Settings > Ins/Outs\". Each return can be used only once in a preset. For example, if you add a Return 1 block (or assign one of the input blocks to Return 1), Return 1/2, FX Loop 1, and FX Loop 1/2 items will all appear grayed out in the model list, as they also utilize Return 1.",{"id":2347,"title":2348,"titles":2349,"content":2350,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#send-settings","Send Settings",[2217,2343],"KnobParameterDescription1SendAdjusts the level sent to your external devices.2Dry ThruAdjusts the level of the signal passed through the Send block,independent of the Knob 1 (Send) level. Normally, this should be set to 0.0dB.",{"id":2352,"title":2353,"titles":2354,"content":2355,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#return-settings","Return Settings",[2217,2343],"KnobParameterDescription1ReturnAdjusts the level received at the Return jack.2MixBlends the Return signal vs. the dry signal passed through the Return block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the Return completely. When set to 100%, the entire signal is fed from the Return, and no dry thru signal is heard.",{"id":2357,"title":2358,"titles":2359,"content":2360,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#fx-loop-settings","FX Loop Settings",[2217,2343],"KnobParameterDescription1SendAdjusts the level sent to your external device.2ReturnAdjusts the level received at the Return jack.3MixBlends the FX loop signal vs. the dry signal passed through the FX Loop block. When set to 0%, the path bypasses the FX loop completely. When set to 100%, the entire path is fed through the FX loop, and no dry thru signal is heard.4TrailsTrails Off: An external stompbox would be instantly muted when the FX Loop block is bypassed. Trails On: An external delay or reverb stompbox would continue to decay naturally when the FX Loop block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected.",{"id":2362,"title":2363,"titles":2364,"content":2365,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#looper","Looper",[2217],"Helix can add one mono or stereo Looper block per preset. The Looper can exist anywhere on either Path 1 or Path 2. Also see \"Looper Footswitch Mode\".",{"id":2367,"title":2368,"titles":2369,"content":2370,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#looper-settings","Looper Settings",[2217,2363],"KnobParameterDescription1PlaybackAdjusts looper playback level. You may find it useful to turn this down a bit so your live guitar can be slightly louder.2OverdubRelatively sets the level of your loop while overdubbing. For example, if your Overdub Level is set to 90%, each time your loop repeats, its volume will be reduced by 10%, sounding quieter and quieter with each overdub pass.3, 4Low Cut, High CutFilters a portion of the loop's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can improve the mix with your live guitar.",{"id":2372,"title":2373,"titles":2374,"content":2375,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#split","Split",[2217],"A Split block appears any time a parallel path is created, but is visible only when selected: Helix has three different types of Split blocks: Y Both the left and right sides of the signal are sent evenly to Paths A (upper) and B (lower). By default, a Split > Y appears any time a parallel path is created. There are no settings to adjust. A/B The signal can be sent in different amounts to Paths A (upper) and B (lower). Crossover Treble frequencies are sent to Path A (upper) and bass frequencies are sent to Path B (lower).",{"id":2377,"title":2378,"titles":2379,"content":2380,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#split-ab-settings","Split > A/B Settings",[2217,2373],"KnobParameterDescription1Route ToDetermines the amount of the signal sent to Path A vs. Path B. Press the knob to set to Even Split.",{"id":2382,"title":2383,"titles":2384,"content":2385,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#split-crossover-settings","Split > Crossover Settings",[2217,2373],"KnobParameterDescription1FrequencyAny signal above this frequency is sent to Path A (upper); any signal below this frequency is sent to Path B (lower).2ReverseWhen on, reverses the path assignments (any signal above the crossover frequency is sent to Path B, any signal below the crossover frequency is sent to Path A).",{"id":2387,"title":2388,"titles":2389,"content":2390,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/the-blocks#merge","Merge",[2217],"A Merge > Mixer block appears any time a parallel path is created, but is visible only\nwhen selected: KnobParameterDescription1A LevelAdjusts the output level of Path A (upper).2A PanAdjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path A.3B LevelAdjusts the output level of Path B (lower).4B PanAdjusts the left/right stereo balance of Path B.5B PolarityInverts the polarity of Path B. Typically, this should be set to \"Normal.\"6LevelAdjusts the overall output level of the Merge block.",{"id":2392,"title":2393,"titles":2394,"content":2039,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome","Welcome",[],{"id":2396,"title":2397,"titles":2398,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#welcome-to-helix","Welcome to Helix",[],{"id":2400,"title":2401,"titles":2402,"content":2403,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#introduction","Introduction",[2397],"Although Helix may appear complicated at first glance, it's designed in such a way that once you learn a few basic concepts and shortcuts, you'll be able to construct both simple and complex tones at nearly the speed of thought, with very little menu diving required. You're likely anxious to rip open the plastic and plug in, wait! At the very least, check out the big color Helix Cheat Sheet that came in the box, and keep it handy. Then read the \"Quick Start\" chapter of this manual and we'll have you up and shredding in no time. If you prefer to edit tones from your Mac® or PC, download the free Helix editor application from line6.com/software. Be sure to also visit line6.com/videos where we're always adding new video tutorials covering the latest Line 6 gear!",{"id":2405,"title":2406,"titles":2407,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#common-terminology","Common Terminology",[2397],{"id":2409,"title":2410,"titles":2411,"content":2412,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#block","Block",[2397,2406],"Blocks are objects that represent various elements of your tone, such as amps, cabs, effects, splits, loopers, inputs, outputs, and impulse responses. The HX Stomp pedal can accommodate up to eight simultaneous amp, cab, IR, effects, and/or looper blocks, DSP permitting.",{"id":2414,"title":2415,"titles":2416,"content":2417,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#controller","Controller",[2397,2406],"Controllers are used to adjust various parameters in real-time. For example, an external expression pedal can be used to control wah, or the mod wheel on your MIDI keyboard can be used to control delay feedback and reverb depth.",{"id":2419,"title":2420,"titles":2421,"content":2422,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#daw","DAW",[2397,2406],"DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) refers to any computer (iPad or iPhone mobile devices) used for audio recording. The components of a DAW include an audio interface, audio recording software (such as Cubase®, Logic, GarageBand, Pro Tools®, etc.), and a monitoring system (amplifier & speakers or headphones). Helix functions as a high-performance USB 2.0 audio interface with all major DAW software",{"id":2424,"title":2425,"titles":2426,"content":2427,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#frfr","FRFR",[2397,2406],"FRFR (Full Range, Flat Response) speakers have the ability to amplify a modeler without adversely affecting its tone, ensuring great detail, a wide sweet spot, predictability, and consistency from studio to stage. You could almost think of FRFR monitors as very loud, gig-ready studio monitors.",{"id":2429,"title":2430,"titles":2431,"content":2432,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#home","Home",[2397,2406],"The Home screen is your primary workspace for creating and editing tones. If you ever get lost, press the home button to return to the Home screen. HX Effects has no home screen.",{"id":2434,"title":2435,"titles":2436,"content":2437,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#ir","IR",[2397,2406],"IRs (Impulse Responses) are mathematical functions representing the sonic measurements of audio systems. HX Stomp can store up to 128 custom or third-party IRs at a time.",{"id":2439,"title":2440,"titles":2441,"content":2442,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#l6-link","L6 LINK",[2397,2406],"L6 LINK provides easy, single-cable, digital audio connectivity and remote control ability between Helix and Line 6 Powercab® active guitar speaker systems and DT-Series amplifiers.",{"id":2444,"title":2445,"titles":2446,"content":2447,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#model","Model",[2397,2406],"Each processing block can accommodate one model (or, in some cases, two models). Helix, LT, Rack, and HX Stomp includes over 80 guitar and bass amps, over 40 cabs, and over 220 effects models. HX Effects excludes amp and cab models.",{"id":2449,"title":2450,"titles":2451,"content":2452,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#path","Path",[2397,2406],"A path represents the signal flow of your tone. HX Stomp as a single path while Helix, LT, and Rack have two separate paths. Each path has its own input(s) and output(s). Paths can be serial (single) or parallel (dual). Path 1 can be routed into path 2 (if available) for more sophisticated tones.",{"id":2454,"title":2455,"titles":2456,"content":2457,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#preset","Preset",[2397,2406],"A preset is a collection of blocks. It consists of all effects, snapshots, footswitch assignments, controller assignments, and Command Center messages.",{"id":2459,"title":2343,"titles":2460,"content":2461,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#sendreturn",[2397,2406],"Sends and Returns are used to connect additional equipment for effects loops, processing multiple instruments simultaneously, connecting to your guitar amp via 4-Cable Method. Helix and Rack have four mono sends and returns, but adjacent pairs can be selected for stereo operation. Helix LT and HX Effects have two mono sends and returns, which can also be paired for stereo operation. HX Stomp has a stereo TRS send and separate left and right returns.",{"id":2463,"title":2464,"titles":2465,"content":2466,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#setlist","Setlist",[2397,2406],"A setlist is a collection of presets. Helix, LT, and Rack have eight setlists containing 128 presets each.",{"id":2468,"title":2469,"titles":2470,"content":2471,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#variax","Variax",[2397,2406],"Variax isn’t just a great guitar, it also contains special electronics that recreate the sound of other specific guitars and instruments and allow for instant retuning of each string. Helix and Variax communicate with one another in unique and powerful ways.",{"id":2473,"title":2474,"titles":2475,"content":2476,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#top-panel","Top Panel",[2397],"1. Main Display This large color LCD is your window into the power of Helix. 2. PRESET Turn this knob to select a preset. Press the knob to open the Setlist menu. See \"Selecting Presets and Setlists\" 3. SAVE Press this button to rename and save changes to a preset. 4. MENU Press this button to dive a bit deeper into Helix, and you'll find Command Center, Global EQ, Global Settings, and other menus. 5. HOME If you ever get lost, press this button to return to the main Home screen. 6. AMP Press this button once, or multiple times, to quickly jump to the tonestack parameters (Gain, Bass, Mid, Treble, etc.) of any Amp+Cab, Amp, and Preamp models in the current preset. 7. JOYSTICK Move the joystick to navigate the main display. On the Home screen, move the joystick to select a block. Press ACTION and move the joystick to move the selected block. Turn the joystick to change the selected block's model. Press the joystick to open the model list. Yeah, the joystick does a lot. 8. BYPASS Press this button to turn the selected block on and off. Press and hold BYPASS to turn Global EQ on and off. 9. ACTION Press this button to open the action panel for the selected block or screen. From the Home screen, the action panel lets you move, copy, paste, and clear blocks. Other screens may have unique action panels; for example, the Global Settings action panel lets you reset all global settings at once. 10. \u003C PAGE/PAGE > If the selected block or item has more than one page of parameters, dots appear to the right of the item's name. Press \u003C PAGE or PAGE > to view more parameters. 11. Knobs 1-6 Turn one of the six knobs below the main display to adjust the parameter's value above; press the knob to reset the parameter's value. If a rectangular button appears above a knob, press the knob to engage its function. For most time-based parameters such as delay time or modulation speed, press the knob to toggle between setting the value in ms or Hz and note divisions (1/4-note, dotted 1/8-note, etc.). Controllers can be assigned to most parameters. Press and hold a parameter's knob to quickly jump to the \"Controller Assign\" page for that parameter. 12. VOLUME Turn this knob to control the Helix device's main output volume. 13. PHONES Turn this knob to control volume from the PHONES output. 14. Scribble Strips The thirteen Helix LCD scribble strips tell each footswitch's current assignment, so there are never any surprises during a show. If a particular footswitch has more than one block or item assigned, the scribble strip may read \"MULTIPLE (X),\" where X is the number of assignments. You can custom label scribble strips - see \"Customizing a Footswitch Label\" 15. Footswitches The capacitive, touch-sensitive footswitches have colored LED rings that tell you the current state of the assigned block or item. While in Stomp footswitch mode, touch (but don't press) a footswitch to quickly select the assigned block or item. Touch the switch repeatedly to cycle through multiple assigned items. See \"Stomp Footswitch Mode\" While in Stomp footswitch mode, touch (but don't press) a footswitch for two seconds to assign that switch to the selected block. While in Stomp footswitch mode, touch and hold (but don't press) two switches to swap all assignments between them (including any custom scribble strip names or LED colors). Touch (but don't press) TAP to briefly display the tempo panel. This lets you quickly fine-tune the current tempo without navigating to the Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo menu. The \"Touch-Select\" feature can optionally be turned off, and other footswitch settings customized - See \"Global Settings > Footswitches\" 16. Expression Pedal Move the expression pedal to control volume, wah, or a combination of amp and/or effects parameters. Activate the hidden toe switch to toggle between EXP 1 and EXP 2. (The scribble strip above tells you which one is\nactive.) If an external pedal is connected to the rear panel EXP 2 jack, the built-in pedal becomes EXP 1 only. See \"Controller Assign\" Adding a Wah or Pitch Wham block automatically assigns it to EXPAdding a Volume Pedal or Pan block automatically assigns it to EXP 2.",{"id":2478,"title":2479,"titles":2480,"content":2481,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#back-panel","Back Panel",[2397],"17. EXP 2 and 3 Two additional expression pedals can be connected to Helix and assigned to adjust a wide variety of parameters. See \"Controller Assign\" 18. EXT AMP 1/2 Connect to your traditional guitar amp to switch its channels or turn its reverb on and off. Use a TRS cable for dual operation (1=tip, 2=ring). 19. CV/Expression Out Connect to the expression pedal input on stompboxes or CV (Control Voltage) input on vintage pedals or synths. 20. GUITAR IN Connect your primary guitar or bass guitar here. This jack provides impedance selection and a switchable pad. 21. AUX IN (10kΩ) Connect a secondary, active-pickup equipped guitar or bass here. 22. MIC IN Plug your microphone in here for processing your vocals or recording to your computer via USB. This XLR jack provides 48V phantom power for studio condenser mics and a variable low cut filter. 23. SENDS/RETURNS 1-4 These 1/4\" ins and outs can be used as FX loops for inserting external stompboxes into your tone or as additional inputs and outputs for connecting keyboards, drum machines, mixers, and other gear. See \"Send/Return\" 24. Ground Lift Switch If you are experiencing hums and buzzes, press this button in to eliminate ground loops between your equipment. 25. XLR OUT Use balanced XLR cables to connect to your studio gear or the house mixer, PA or FRFR speaker(s) when playing live. When using a mono playback system, connect only the LEFT/MONO XLR jack. Never connect the Helix device's XLR outputs to a device whose XLR inputs have 48V phantom power enabled! 26. 1/4\" OUT Use unbalanced 1/4\" TS cables to connect to your guitar amp, FRFR speaker(s), studio monitors, or other playback system. When using a single amp or speaker, connect only the LEFT/MONO 1/4\" jack. 27. PHONES Out (12Ω) Connect stereo headphones here; turn the top panel PHONES knob to adjust volume. Helix provides plenty of gain for high impedance headphones. With lower impedance headphones, you may notice a bit of distortion if the PHONES knob is turned all the way up. This is normal. 28. VARIAX Input This input provides power, digital audio, effects control, and instant recall between Helix and a Line 6 Variax guitar. 29. MIDI IN, OUT/THRU Connect Helix to your MIDI gear for sending and receiving program changes, continuous controllers, and other MIDI messages. 30. S/PDIF IN/OUT Digitally connect Helix to your studio equipment via S/PDIF (75-ohm RCA) cables. S/PDIF and AES/EBU cannot be active at the same time. See \"Global Settings > Ins/Outs\" 31. AES/EBU, L6 LINK L6 LINK provides easy digital audio connectivity between Helix and Line 6 Stage Source monitors and/or DT-Series amplifiers. Alternatively, digitally connect Helix to your studio equipment via an AES/EBU (110Ω XLR) cable. See \"L6 LINK Output\" 32. USB Helix also functions as a high quality, multi-in/out, 24-bit/96kHz audio interface for Mac® and Windows® computers, with DI, Re-amping and MIDI functionality built right in. Helix can also record to an Apple iPad (with optional Apple Camera Connection Kit). Use of a USB 2.0 or 3.0 port is required - Do not use an external USB hub. See \"USB Audio\" 33. AC In Connect Helix to a grounded AC power outlet. 34. POWER switch It's alive!",{"id":2483,"title":2484,"titles":2485,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/helix/welcome#home-screen","Home Screen",[2397],{"id":2487,"title":2488,"titles":2489,"content":8,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides","Line 6 Helix Tips & Guides",[],{"id":2491,"title":2492,"titles":2493,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides#helix-tips-guides","Helix Tips & Guides",[],{"id":2495,"title":2496,"titles":2497,"content":2498,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides#universal-guide","Universal Guide",[2492],"This is under active development. It will be expanded and improved upon over time. The HX family has grown from the original Line 6 Helix Floor and Helix Rack to multiple different iterations and form factors. Helix Help does its best to provide a manual that combines every product via a Universal Guide. Bypass AssignCommon Amp SettingsCommon Effect SettingsCommon TerminologyGlobal EQMIDIReset OptionsTunerUSB Audio",{"id":2500,"title":2501,"titles":2502,"content":2503,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides#official-line-6-manuals","Official Line 6 Manuals",[2492],"Helix ManualsHelix Rack ManualsHelix Native ManualsHelix LT ManualsHX Effects ManualsHX Stomp ManualsHX Stomp XL Manuals",{"id":2505,"title":1813,"titles":2506,"content":2507,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides#helix-manual",[2492],"This version of the manual, though mostly still relevant and useful, has been deprecated in favor of the Universal Guide. The original Helix Help manual made, specifically, for the Helix Floor. Go to the Helix Manual.",{"id":2509,"title":2510,"titles":2511,"content":2512,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides#additional-resources","Additional Resources",[2492],"Download additional Help documentation covering Helix family devices and software from the Line 6 website at Line 6 Product Manuals.Check out the Line 6 Support page for access to helpful tips, videos, discussion forums, or to contact Line 6 Technical Support.Stay up to date with the latest updated version of HX Edit, Helix Native, and all your other Line 6 applications, available from the Line 6 Software Downloads page.Visit the Line 6 CustomTone site where you can share your Helix presets with the world, and download free presets created by Line 6 and other users just like you.Check out the ever-growing selection of premium add-ons for the family of Helix products available on Helix Marketplace.Can’t get enough Line 6 Gear & accessories? Head on over to the Line 6 Store.Check out Sweetwater's Helix family setup guide.\nAnother nice Sweetwater article: Creative Ways to Get Even More out of HX StompAfter Audio has some great musings related to the Helix such as how to sync your DAW to a HelixHow to lookup your Helix serial number",{"id":2514,"title":2515,"titles":2516,"content":2517,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign","Bypass Assign",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL provide a varieity of methods for turning blocks on and off.",{"id":2519,"title":2515,"titles":2520,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#bypass-assign",[],{"id":2522,"title":2523,"titles":2524,"content":2525,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#helix-rack-lt","Helix, Rack, LT",[2515],"Aside from the BYPASS button, there are a variety of additional methods for turning blocks on and off.",{"id":2527,"title":2528,"titles":2529,"content":2530,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#quick-bypass-assign","Quick Bypass Assign",[2515,2523],"From the Home screen, use the joystick to select the block you wish to assign to a footswitch. Input, Output, and Merge blocks cannot be assigned to footswitches. Any Split block type can be assigned to a footswitch; when bypassed, the signal is split and routed equally to Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). Step on FS6 (MODE) to select Stomp mode (if not already there).Touch and hold (but don't press) the desired footswitch until the following dialog appears: If you want to replace any other blocks that may already be assigned to the footswitch, turn Knob 3 (Assign) to \"Replace.\" Otherwise, leave it set to \"Merge,\" which allows for multiple blocks to be assigned to the same switch. If you want to change the way the switch behaves, turn Knob 4 (Type) to \"Momentary\" or \"Latching.\" Momentary - The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the switch.Latching -  The block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) every time you press the switch. This is the default. Press Knob 6 (OK). This \"touch\" behavior for footswitches can be disabled using the Stomp Select option in \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"",{"id":2532,"title":2533,"titles":2534,"content":2535,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#manual-bypass-assign","Manual Bypass Assign",[2515,2523],"A Stomp mode footswitch is the most obvious method for turning blocks on and off, but you can also engage or bypass a block automatically when moving an expression pedal or the Volume or Tone knob on a Variax guitar. For example, moving EXP 1 forward past the heel down position can enable a Wah or Poly Wham block, and returning EXP 1 to the heel position will bypass it again. Press MENU to open the Menu.Press Knob 1 (Bypass Assign). The Bypass Assign screen looks very similar to the Home screen: Move the joystick to select the block you want to bypass. Input, Output, and Merge blocks cannot be bypassed or bypass assigned. Any Processing or Split block type can be bypassed or bypass assigned; when a Split block is bypassed, the signal is split and routed equally to both Path A (upper) and Path B (lower). Turn Knob 1 (Switch) to select the desired footswitch, expression pedal, or Variax knob. (Optionally, you can also use Knob 4 to control the block's bypass via MIDI—see step 5.) ParameterDescriptionNoneRemoves the bypass assignment.Footswitch 2~11Stepping on the Stomp mode footswitch turns the block on and off.Selecting Footswitch 2-5 or 8-11 displays Knob 2 (Type).. Turn knob 2 to select \"Momentary\" or \"Latching.\" When set to Momentary, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the switch. When set to Latching, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) every time you press the switch.NOTE: Footswitch type (momentary or latching) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment.EXP ToeYou can also choose to assign a block's bypass to the EXP Toe Switch. However, its behavior is always \"Latching.\"NOTE: Adding a Volume Pedal, Pan, Wah, Pitch Wham, or Poly Wham block automatically assigns it to \"EXP Toe.\"EXP Pedal 1, 2, or 3Moving the expression pedal automatically enables (or bypasses) the block.Selecting EXP Pedal 1, 2, or 3 displays Knob 2 (Position) and Knob 3 (Wait). Position determines at which point within the expression pedal's travel the block is enabled or bypassed. 0% is heel down; 99% is toe down. Wait determines how long Helix waits before bypassing the block; for example, you wouldn't want the wah to turn off every time you touched the heel down position in your big funk wah solo.Variax Vol, Variax ToneMoving the Variax Volume or Tone knob automatically enables (or bypasses) the block.Selecting Variax Vol or Variax Tone displays Knob 2 (Position) and Knob 3 (Wait). Position determines where in the knob's travel the block is enabled or bypassed. 0% is all the way down (counterclockwise), and 99% is all the way up (clockwise). Wait determines how long Helix, Rack, or LT waits before bypassing the block. Footswitch 1 and 7 can be assigned at any time, but they only appear if the Stomp Mode Switches option is set to \"10 switches\" (see \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"). Otherwise, FS1 and FS7 appear as BANK UP and BANK DOWN. Each footswitch can have up to 8 assignments. If you attempt to add a ninth, \"Can't assign any more blocks to this footswitch!\" appears in the header: To reverse bypass behavior, press BYPASS. In such case, the block will be bypassed when moving the expression pedal or Variax knob past the Position location. Since multiple blocks can be assigned to an expression pedal, moving the pedal can turn some blocks on and others off at different positions in the pedal's travel. If desired, turn Knob 4 (MIDI In) to assign an incoming MIDI CC message to turn the block on and off. Incoming CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected— see \"MIDI\" on page 74. Alternatively, press Knob 6 (Learn) and then send , Rack, or LT a MIDI CC message. The incoming message is automatically selected. See \"Controller Assign\" for more info.",{"id":2537,"title":2538,"titles":2539,"content":2540,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#clearing-bypass-assignments","Clearing Bypass Assignment(s)",[2515,2523],"While in the Bypass Assign screen, press ACTION and then press Knob 1 to clear the currently selected block's assignment(s). Or, press Knob 2 to clear all the assignments from all blocks within the preset.",{"id":2542,"title":2543,"titles":2544,"content":2545,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#customizing-a-footswitch-label","Customizing a Footswitch Label",[2515,2523],"From the Bypass Assign screen, use the joystick to select a block whose bypass is assigned to a footswitch and press Knob 5 (Customize). The Customize screen appears: Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor.Turn the joystick (or move it up/down) to change the selected character.Press Knob 2 (Delete) to delete the selected character and shift all following characters to the left.Press Knob 3 (Insert) to insert a space and shift all following characters to the right. Press the joystick to cycle through A, a, 0, and  SPACE. Press Knob 4 (Remove) to remove the custom label, after which the footswitch label displays its normal assignment. Remove is grayed out until a custom name is applied. To customize the footswitch's LED color, turn Knob 5 (Switch LED) to select the desired color (or turn it off). Normally, you should leave this set to \"Auto Color\". Press Knob 6 (OK). Once any item has been assigned to a footswitch, touch and hold (but don't press) the footswitch, and a duplicate Customize button appears above Knob 5. Footswitches can also be customized from the \"Command Center\" screen (or HX Edit application!).",{"id":2547,"title":2548,"titles":2549,"content":2550,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#swapping-footswitches","Swapping Footswitches",[2515,2523],"If you want to change the location of Stomp mode footswitches (especially those with multiple items assigned or custom labels and LED ring colors), instead of manually reassigning everything, you can quickly swap all assignments between two footswitches. Touch (but don't press) any two Stomp mode footswitches until the following dialog appears: Press Knob 6 (OK). This \"touch\" behavior for footswitches can be disabled using the Stomp Select option in \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"",{"id":2552,"title":2553,"titles":2554,"content":2555,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl","HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL",[2515],"Aside from pressing the Upper Knob from Edit view, HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL have a variety of additional methods for turning blocks on and off: Pressing a Stomp mode footswitchMoving a connected expression pedal (sometimes called \"auto-engage\")Sending a MIDI CC message to the device's MIDI In (or via USB)",{"id":2557,"title":2558,"titles":2559,"content":2560,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#quick-footswitch-assign","Quick Footswitch Assign",[2515,2553],"While in Edit view, turn the Upper Knob to select the block you wish to assign to a footswitch.While in Stomp footswitch mode, touch and hold FS1 or FS2 (or FS3 if Global Settings > Footswitches > FS3 Function is set to \"Stomp 3\") until the following dialog appears: If you want to replace any other blocks that may already be assigned to the footswitch, turn Knob 2 (Assign) to \"Replace.\" Otherwise, leave it set to \"Merge,\" which allows for multiple blocks to be assigned to the same switch. Press Knob 3 (OK). This \"touch\" behavior for footswitches can be disabled using the Stomp Select option in \"Global Settings > Footswitches\"",{"id":2562,"title":2533,"titles":2563,"content":2564,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#manual-bypass-assign-1",[2515,2553],"A Stomp mode footswitch is the most obvious method for turning blocks on and off but HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL can also engage or bypass a block automatically when moving an expression pedal or via external MIDI. For example, moving EXP 1 forward past the heel down position can enable a Wah or Poly Wham block, and returning EXP 1 to the heel position will bypass it again. Press \u003C PAGE and PAGE > together to open the Menu.Press Knob 1 (Bypass Assign).\nThe Bypass Assign screen looks very similar to the Edit screen: Turn the Upper Knob to select the block you want to bypass.\nInput, Output, and Merge blocks cannot be bypassed or bypass assigned. Any Processing or Split block type can be bypassed or bypass assigned; when a Split block is bypassed, the signal is split and routed equally to both Path A (upper) and Path B (lower).Turn Knob 1 (Switch) to select the desired footswitch or expression pedal.\nOptionally, you can also use Knob 4 to control the block’s bypass via MIDI—see step 5.) ParameterDescriptionNoneRemoves the bypass assignment.FS1-FS5, FS6-FS8 (HX Stomp XL)HX Stomp:Stepping on the Stomp mode footswitch turns the block on and off. Note that, FS3, FS4 or FS5 won’t function unless \"Global Settings > Footswitches\" > FS3 FS4, FS5 Function is set to \"Stomp 3 Stomp 4, Stomp 5.\"Selecting a footswitch displays Knob 2 (Type). Turn Knob 2 to select \"Momentary\" or \"Latching\" behavior. When set to Momentary, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the switch. When set to Latching, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) every time you press the switch. NOTE: Footswitch type (momentary or latching) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment.HX Stomp XL:Stepping on the Stomp mode footswitch turns the block on and off. Note that FS7 or FS8 won’t function via connected footswitches unless the \"Global Settings > Preferences\" > EXP/FS Tip is set to \"FS7\" and EXP/FS Ring is set to \"FS8\" respectively, and the \"Global Settings > Footswitches\" > FS7 Function and FS8 Function parameters are set to \"Stomp 7\" and \"Stomp 8,\" respectively.Selecting a footswitch displays Knob 2 (Type). Turn Knob 2 to select \"Momentary\" or \"Latching\" behavior. When set to Momentary, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) for as long as you hold the switch. When set to Latching, the block is bypassed (or enabled, if already bypassed) every time you press the switch. NOTE: Footswitch type (momentary or latching) is determined per footswitch, not per assignment.EXP1, EXP2Moving the expression pedal automatically enables (or bypasses) the block.Selecting EXP 1 or 2 displays Knob 2 (Position) and Knob 3 (Wait). Position determines at which point within the expression pedal’s travel the block is enabled or bypassed. 0% is heel down; 99% is toe down. Wait determines how long HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL wait before bypassing the block; for example, you wouldn’t want the wah to turn off every time you touched the heel down position in your big funk wah solo.* By default, bypass toggling for the block via EXP 1 or EXP 2 is configured for \"heel down = off\" behavior. To reverse bypass behavior, press the Upper Knob (bypass). In such a case, the block will be bypassed when moving the expression pedal past the configured Position location. Since it is possible to configure the bypass of multiple blocks to be assigned to an expression pedal, you can set each block’s Position value differently - thereby allowing the pedal to turn some blocks on and others off at different positions in the pedal’s travel. Press Knob 3 (Learn) and then either move the desired expression pedal or send the desired MIDI CC message from your MIDI controller. HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL automatically select it. If desired, press PAGE > and turn Knob 1 (MIDI In) to assign an incoming MIDI CC message to turn the block on and off. Incoming CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected - see \"MIDI CC\".",{"id":2566,"title":2567,"titles":2568,"content":2569,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#clearing-bypass-assignments-1","Clearing Bypass Assignments",[2515,2553],"From the Bypass Assign screen, select the block whose bypass assignment you want to clear and press ACTION.Press Knob 1 (Clear Assignments).",{"id":2571,"title":2572,"titles":2573,"content":2574,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#clearing-all-bypass-assignments","Clearing All Bypass Assignments",[2515,2553],"From the Bypass Assign screen, press ACTION.Press Knob 2 (Clear All Assignments) to clear all blocks’ Bypass assignments. The following dialog appears: Press Knob 3 (OK).",{"id":2576,"title":2577,"titles":2578,"content":2579,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#swapping-stomp-footswitches","Swapping Stomp Footswitches",[2515,2553],"If you want to change the location of Stomp mode footswitches (especially those with multiple items assigned), instead of manually reassigning everything, you can quickly swap all assignments between two stomp footswitches. Touch (but don’t press) any two Stomp footswitches until the following dialog appears: Press Knob 3 (OK).",{"id":2581,"title":2582,"titles":2583,"content":2584,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/bypass-assign#tips-for-creative-bypass-assignment","Tips for Creative Bypass Assignment",[2515],"If you assign a footswitch to more than one block or other item, \"MULTIPLE (X)\" isn't very descriptive. Don't forget to custom label it - See \"Customizing a Footswitch Label\"If you find yourself constantly toggling one switch off and another on, assign both blocks to the same footswitch, and while one is selected, press BYPASS. Now pressing the footswitch will toggle one off and the other on simultaneously. A footswitch can have up to simultaneous eight blocks assigned.Assign a Wah block to be engaged only when moving an expression pedal past 1%. Set the Wait time long enough so that natural foot movements don't turn the wah off every time you reach the heel-down position.Different blocks can be enabled or bypassed at different locations of an expression pedal or Variax knob's travel. Experiment with turning on multiple overdrive blocks—one at Position 5%, another at Position 30%, another at Position 70%, and so on.When using a footswitch to toggle between two Amp or Amp+Cab blocks, the amp models may sound notably different from one another (just like real amps!). Use an EQ block to make one Amp block sound a bit closer to the other Amp block and assign its bypass to the same footswitch.Assign a delay block with very high feedback to be turned on only when reaching the toe position of an expression pedal (or fully clockwise Variax knob). Squeals galore.",{"id":2586,"title":2587,"titles":2588,"content":2589,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings","Common Amp Settings",[],"This is a list of the most commonly used settings found across various amps in the Line 6 Helix, Helix Rack, Helix LT, and HX Stomp.",{"id":2591,"title":2587,"titles":2592,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#common-amp-settings",[],{"id":2594,"title":2595,"titles":2596,"content":2589,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#parameters","Parameters",[2587],{"id":2598,"title":2599,"titles":2600,"content":2601,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#master","Master",[2587,2595],"Adjusts the amount of power amp distortion. This parameter is highly interactive with all other power amp parameters—the lower the Master is set, the less effect the other controls will have.",{"id":2603,"title":2604,"titles":2605,"content":2606,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#sag","Sag",[2587,2595],"Lower Sag values offer a \"tighter\" responsiveness for metal and djent playing; higher values provide more touch dynamics & sustain for blues and classic rock riffs.",{"id":2608,"title":2609,"titles":2610,"content":2611,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#hum-ripple","Hum, Ripple",[2587,2595],"Controls how much heater hum and AC ripple interacts with your tone. At higher settings, things get freaky.",{"id":2613,"title":2614,"titles":2615,"content":2616,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#bias","Bias",[2587,2595],"Changes the Bias of the power tubes. Lower values achieve a \"colder\" Class AB biasing. At maximum, the amp is operating in Class A.",{"id":2618,"title":2619,"titles":2620,"content":2621,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#bias-x","Bias X",[2587,2595],"Determines how the power amp tubes' voicing reacts when pushed hard. Set low for a tighter feel. Set high for more tube compression. This parameter is highly reactive with the Drive and Master settings.",{"id":2623,"title":2624,"titles":2625,"content":2626,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#quick-notes","Quick Notes",[2587],"Invented control starting point for neutral settings (setting to simulate the real stuff, without those invented parameters. But you can play with this values, it's up to you (no limits):Presence for No Presence amps should be zero (all the way counterclockwise). Exception Jazz Rivet (P: 50%).Eq bonus controls to noon (50%) for No Mid, No Bass, No Treble amps.Master parameter for no master amps to 100%.Real amps with Volume means Gain in Helix. Volume in Helix is like a mixer to compensate final modeled output level (obviusly it doesn't exist in any of the real amps).To attenuate \"Crossover Distortion\", the best parameter in Helix is \"Bias\", increase it from 6 to 8 as general rule just in case you need to mitigate it.The default Line 6 amp settings parameters for Helix, when you open a modeled amp, are also a good starting point, normally they are close or exactly in concordance with this. Tip : double click in the parameter to come back to the default one.For Pre Amps models in Helix, some power amp related parameters (i.e presence in general ; or cut tone with Vox amp )are not present, but they modeled also Master and Sag with PreAmps.All amps are modeled on the Input 1 (High). If you want simulate Input 2 (low), then use a gain block to take 6dB off the signal, and change the input impedance to something lower; somewhere between 68k and 150k.",{"id":2628,"title":2629,"titles":2630,"content":2631,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#further-tone-control","Further Tone Control",[2587],"Originally posted by Ben Adrian here. I'll do my best to answer this while also playing it safe and not giving away anything that might get me a stern talking-to.",{"id":2633,"title":2634,"titles":2635,"content":2636,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#bias-on-cathode-biased-amps","Bias on cathode biased amps",[2587,2629],"Many people have an association that cathode biased = class A. This is usually not true. However, most cathode biased amps are running the tubes hotter than most fixed bias amps. The Bias control affects the balance of distortion between saturation and cutoff in the power tubes. Proportion changes depending on the idling state of a power tube; if it's idling hot, then there will be more saturation and less cutoff, and if it's cold there will be more cutoff and less saturation. The bias control affects where the idling state of the tube is \"located\"; if it's hot or cold. Another way of putting it might be that we can virtually change the value of the cathode bias resistor in a cathode bias amp.",{"id":2638,"title":2639,"titles":2640,"content":2641,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-amp-settings#all-these-extra-knobs","All these extra knobs",[2587,2629],"If an amp has a small number of knobs, then we will invent the knobs in a way that makes the most sense to us. First, let me say that the Channel Volume (ChVol) knob is ALWAYS a flat response, post amp model level control. This is like a fader on a console. It's in the amp model, but it's not tied to the tonality of the amp model. It's how I level different presets so that they play well together. The Drive knob corresponds with the Drive or Gain knob on master volume amps. With amps that don't have a master volume, it corresponds with the Volume knob. So, on the Deluxe model that you reference, the Drive knob is the Volume control on the front panel. The Master Volume knobs in Helix map to the Master volume knobs on amps with Master Volume controls. If the amp does not have a master volume control, then we add one similar to where an amp tech might add one to an amp if the amp was having one installed. In the case of the Deluxe, this is between the preamp and the power amp. This can be thought of as a passive volume reduction. Master @ 10 is like it's not in the circuit. As it is turned down, the level from the preamp into the power amp is reduced. Tone controls. We try to make them fit the character of the amp. In the Deluxe Reverb, the tone controls are exactly like that or a twin reverb except the 10k linear midrange knob is replaced with a fixed 6.8k resistor. If you want to match the model to the actual amp, set the model between 6.1 and 6.8 (values drift in the real amps. My idea, though, was to make the midrange knob on the deluxe behave like the midrange knob on other black-face fender circuits that have a midrange control. In other amps, tone controls gets invented on a per-amp basis. In the tweed champ, the bass and treble are after the amp modeling, but the midrange control is between the two preamp gain stages. The midrange knob can become a cool drive feature. In some amps, the invented controls come between the preamp and the power amp. In short, we tried to make it sound good, and we tried to respect what is happening in similar classic amp circuits. Cheers! Thank you amsdenj of the Helix community for providing further information about the Common Amp Settings and duncann for providing the link to Ben Adrian's information regarding tone controls.",{"id":2643,"title":2644,"titles":2645,"content":2646,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings","Common Effect Settings",[],"This is a list of the most commonly used settings found across various effects in the Line 6 Helix, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL, and HX Effect.",{"id":2648,"title":2644,"titles":2649,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#common-effect-settings",[],{"id":2651,"title":2595,"titles":2652,"content":2646,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#parameters",[2644],{"id":2654,"title":2655,"titles":2656,"content":2657,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#drive","Drive",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the amount of overdrive, distortion, or fuzz.",{"id":2659,"title":2660,"titles":2661,"content":2662,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#bass","Bass",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the bass level.",{"id":2664,"title":2665,"titles":2666,"content":2667,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#mid","Mid",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the midrange level.",{"id":2669,"title":2670,"titles":2671,"content":2672,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#treble","Treble",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the treble level.",{"id":2674,"title":2675,"titles":2676,"content":2677,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#speed","Speed",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the speed of the effect, with higher settings providing faster rates. Press the knob to toggle between Hz and note values. Choosing a Hz value provides a specific modulation speed in cycles per second; choosing a note value provides a time based on the current tempo. Not all Speed parameters can be synced to note values, as they may be non-linear and highly interactive.",{"id":2679,"title":2680,"titles":2681,"content":2682,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#rate","Rate",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the rate of the effect, with higher settings providing faster rates. Press the knob to toggle between numeric and note values. Not all Rate parameters can be synced to note values, as they may be non-linear and highly interactive.",{"id":2684,"title":2685,"titles":2686,"content":2687,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#time","Time",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the delay/repeat time, with higher settings providing longer delays. Press the knob to toggle between ms and note values. Choosing a ms value provides a specific time in milliseconds; choosing a Note Division value provides a time based on the current tempo. With a note division value, this parameter's value is retained when changing models.",{"id":2689,"title":2690,"titles":2691,"content":2692,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#scale","Scale",[2644,2595],"Delay models with multiple taps have a Scale parameter for each tap, which adjusts its time relative to the main Time value. For example, if the Time parameter is set to 500ms, setting the T1 Scale to \"50%\" will mean that tap will be at 250ms. If you then adjust the Time parameter, the timing of all the taps will scale accordingly.",{"id":2694,"title":2695,"titles":2696,"content":2697,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#depth","Depth",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the intensity of the modulation. Higher settings result in more extreme pitch bending, wobble, or throb depending on the effect.",{"id":2699,"title":2700,"titles":2701,"content":2702,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#feedback","Feedback",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the amount of delayed signal fed back into the effect. Higher settings can provide more dramatic textures.",{"id":2704,"title":2705,"titles":2706,"content":2707,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#decay","Decay",[2644,2595],"Sets the length of time the reverb effect sustains.",{"id":2709,"title":2710,"titles":2711,"content":2712,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#predelay","Predelay",[2644,2595],"Determines the time before the reverb effect is heard.",{"id":2714,"title":2715,"titles":2716,"content":2717,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#spread","Spread",[2644,2595],"Spread differs slightly among stereo delay effects. For most delays, it adjusts how widely the repeats bounce left and right. For example, with the Ping Pong Delay, 0 is in the middle (mono), and 10 is full left to right panning for the repeats. For modulated stereo delays, Spread affects the LFOs’ (low frequency oscillators) stereo modulation behavior. At 0, the LFOs are in sync. At 10, the two LFOs are 180 degrees out of sync, so that when one side is modulating up, the other side is modulating down.",{"id":2719,"title":2720,"titles":2721,"content":2722,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#headroom","Headroom",[2644,2595],"Some mod and delay pedals' internal signal paths exhibit a bit of grit, especially when placed after a high-gain amp block. Negative values increase the perceived amount of grit; positive values clean things up a bit. At 0dB, the model behaves like the original pedal.",{"id":2724,"title":2725,"titles":2726,"content":2727,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#low-cut-high-cut","Low Cut, High Cut",[2644,2595],"Filters a portion of the block's bass and/or treble frequencies, which can help remove rumble and/or high-end harshness.",{"id":2729,"title":2730,"titles":2731,"content":2732,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#mix","Mix",[2644,2595],"Blends the effected \"wet\" signal vs. the \"dry\" signal passed through the block. When set to 0% the path bypasses the effect completely. When set to 100%, the entire path is fed through the effect, and no dry thru signal is heard.",{"id":2734,"title":2735,"titles":2736,"content":2737,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#level","Level",[2644,2595],"Adjusts the overall output level of the effects block. Be careful not to boost this parameter too high on multiple blocks, as digital clipping could occur. You should typically leave this at 0.0dB for most blocks. Where the original pedal's level or volume knob behavior doesn't really apply to dB values, 0.0-10 may be used.",{"id":2739,"title":2740,"titles":2741,"content":2742,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-fx-settings#trails","Trails",[2644,2595],"Trails Off: Any delay repeats or reverb decays are instantly muted when the block is bypassed. Trails On: Any delay repeats or reverb decays continue to decay naturally when the block is bypassed or a different snapshot is selected.",{"id":2744,"title":2406,"titles":2745,"content":2746,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology",[],"This is a list of the most commonly used terminology found in the manuals for the Line 6 Helix, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL, and HX Effect.",{"id":2748,"title":2406,"titles":2749,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#common-terminology",[],{"id":2751,"title":2752,"titles":2753,"content":2746,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#terminology","Terminology",[2406],{"id":2755,"title":2410,"titles":2756,"content":2412,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#block",[2406,2752],{"id":2758,"title":2415,"titles":2759,"content":2417,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#controller",[2406,2752],{"id":2761,"title":2420,"titles":2762,"content":2422,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#daw",[2406,2752],{"id":2764,"title":2425,"titles":2765,"content":2427,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#frfr",[2406,2752],{"id":2767,"title":2430,"titles":2768,"content":2432,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#home",[2406,2752],{"id":2770,"title":2435,"titles":2771,"content":2437,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#ir",[2406,2752],{"id":2773,"title":2440,"titles":2774,"content":2442,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#l6-link",[2406,2752],{"id":2776,"title":2445,"titles":2777,"content":2447,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#model",[2406,2752],{"id":2779,"title":2450,"titles":2780,"content":2452,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#path",[2406,2752],{"id":2782,"title":2455,"titles":2783,"content":2457,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#preset",[2406,2752],{"id":2785,"title":2343,"titles":2786,"content":2461,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#sendreturn",[2406,2752],{"id":2788,"title":2464,"titles":2789,"content":2466,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#setlist",[2406,2752],{"id":2791,"title":2469,"titles":2792,"content":2471,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/common-terminology#variax",[2406,2752],{"id":2794,"title":2795,"titles":2796,"content":2797,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq","Global EQ",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL device’s Global EQ has three fully parametric bands plus variable low and high cut filters and is used for compensating for the wide disparity in acoustic environments on tour or when traveling from studio to studio. Global EQ is applied to all setlists and presets and can be heard from the 1/4\" outputs, XLR outputs, or both.",{"id":2799,"title":2795,"titles":2800,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#global-eq",[],{"id":2802,"title":2803,"titles":2804,"content":2805,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#using-global-eq","Using Global EQ",[2795],"Global EQ is never heard from Send, Digital, or USB outputs.",{"id":2807,"title":2523,"titles":2808,"content":2809,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#helix-rack-lt",[2795,2803],"The Helix, Rack, and LT device’s Global EQ has three fully parametric bands plus variable low and high cut filters and is used for compensating for the wide disparity in acoustic environments on tour or when traveling from studio to studio. Global EQ is applied to all setlists and presets and can be heard from the 1/4\" outputs, XLR outputs, or both. When Global EQ is active, the Home screen shows the Global EQ icon to the left of the snapshots icon: Press MENU to open the Menu.Press Knob 5 (Global EQ). The Global EQ screen appears: Press BYPASS to turn Global EQ on and off. From the Home screen, press and hold BYPASS to turn Global EQ on and off without navigating to the Global EQ page. Press PAGE > to view page 3 of parameters and turn Knob 1 (Apply EQ) to apply the Global EQ to only the 1/4\" outputs, only the XLR outputs, or both.",{"id":2811,"title":2553,"titles":2812,"content":2813,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl",[2795,2803],"The Global EQ built into HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL has three fully parametric bands plus variable low and high cut filters, and is used for compensating for the wide disparity in acoustic environments on tour or when traveling from studio to studio. Global EQ is applied to all presets. Press \u003C PAGE and PAGE > together to open the MenuPress Knob 3 (Global EQ). The Global EQ screen appears: Press the Upper Knob to turn Global EQ on and off.Turn the Upper Knob to select the desired EQ band—Low Cut, Low, Mid, High, or High Cut.Turn Knobs 1-3 to adjust the selected EQ band.",{"id":2815,"title":2816,"titles":2817,"content":2818,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#resetting-global-eq","Resetting Global EQ",[2795],"Resetting the Global EQ returns its settings to factory default (flat).",{"id":2820,"title":2523,"titles":2821,"content":2822,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#helix-rack-lt-1",[2795,2816],"From the Global EQ screen, press ACTION.Press Knob 1 (Reset Global EQ). The following dialog appears: Press Knob 6 (OK).",{"id":2824,"title":2553,"titles":2825,"content":2826,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/global-eq#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl-1",[2795,2816],"Resetting the Global EQ returns its settings to factory default (flat). From the Global EQ screen, press ACTION.Press Knob 1 (Reset EQ). The following dialog appears: Press Knob 3 (OK).",{"id":2828,"title":2829,"titles":2830,"content":2831,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi","MIDI",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL transmits and responds to MIDI messages over USB in the same manner as via its MIDI connectors.",{"id":2833,"title":2829,"titles":2834,"content":2835,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi",[],"Helix transmits and responds to MIDI messages over USB in the same manner as via its MIDI connectors. For USB MIDI operation on Windows® computers, it is necessary to download and install the Line 6 Helix ASIO® driver, available from [line6.com/software][https://line6.com/software). There is no driver installation necessary for an Apple Mac computer, iPad or iPhone.",{"id":2837,"title":2523,"titles":2838,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#helix-rack-lt",[2829],{"id":2840,"title":2841,"titles":2842,"content":2843,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-bankprogram-changes","MIDI Bank/Program Changes",[2829,2523],"Helix responds to traditional MIDI CC and Program change messages from an external MIDI device (or from MIDI software via USB) and will recall setlists, presets, and/or snapshots accordingly.",{"id":2845,"title":2846,"titles":2847,"content":2848,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#remotely-selecting-a-setlist-preset-andor-snapshot","Remotely Selecting a Setlist, Preset, and/or Snapshot",[2829,2523,2841],"Press PRESETS to open the Setlist menu: The dark text above Knob 2 displays the required MIDI messages for recalling the Helix device's setlists, presets, and/or snapshots from external MIDI devices or software. In the illustration above, the FACTORY 1 setlist is recalled with a CC32\nmessage of 007, the 16B Bottle Message preset is recalled with a PC (program change) message of 005, and SNAPSHOT 1 is recalled with a CC69 message of 000. When navigating Presets from the Helix hardware (PRESETS encoder, preset footswitches, PRESET / PRESET , etc.), Helix automatically transmits a MIDI Program Change message corresponding to the selected preset. If you'd prefer Helix to not automatically transmit or receive PC messages, turn \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" > Knob 4 (MIDI PC Send/Receive) off.",{"id":2850,"title":2851,"titles":2852,"content":2853,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-clock-send-and-receive","MIDI Clock Send and Receive",[2829,2523],"Helix can send and receive MIDI clock via its MIDI 5-pin in/out, as well as via USB. MIDI Clock options can be enabled and configured within the \"Global Settings > MIDI/ Tempo\" options. MIDI Clock Send: Transmit MIDI clock to synchronize the tempo of external pedals, rack gear, and software to the current Helix TAP Tempo rate. MIDI Clock Receive: Synchronize the Helix time-based effects (such as delay and modulation) to incoming MIDI clock from external DAW software, drum machines, keyboard workstations, or other modelers. Note that the Helix TAP footswitch will flash blue (instead of the default red) to indicate the incoming tempo rate when receiving MIDI clock.",{"id":2855,"title":2856,"titles":2857,"content":2858,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-cc","MIDI CC",[2829,2523],"Helix has reserved specific MIDI CC messages for global functions; these CCs cannot be used as controllers. If you attempt to learn a CC message reserved for global functions (see \"Controller Assign\"), the following dialog appears:",{"id":2860,"title":2861,"titles":2862,"content":2863,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#pedal-and-footswitch-assignments","Pedal and Footswitch Assignments",[2829,2523,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction10-127Emulates EXP 1 Pedal20-127Emulates EXP 2 Pedal30-127Emulates EXP 3 Pedal490-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS1500-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS2510-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS3520-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS4530-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS5540-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS7550-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS8560-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS9570-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS10580-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode's FS11590-127Emulates EXP Toe switch",{"id":2865,"title":2866,"titles":2867,"content":2868,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#looper-controls","Looper Controls",[2829,2523,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction600-63: Overdub; 64-127: RecordLooper Record/Overdub switch (FS8)610-63: Stop; 64-127: PlayLooper Play/Stop switch (FS9)6264-127Looper Play Once switch (FS3)6364-127Looper Undo switch (FS2)650-63: Forward; 64-127: ReverseLooper Forward/Reverse switch (FS11)660-63: Full; 64-127: HalfLooper Full/Half Speed switch (FS10)670-63: Off; 64-127: OnLooper block on/off (if available); also enters/exits Looper footswitch mode",{"id":2870,"title":2871,"titles":2872,"content":2873,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#additional-controls","Additional Controls",[2829,2523,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction00-7Bank MSB320-7Bank LSB—Setlist select6464-127Tap Tempo680-127Tuner screen on/off690-7Snapshot select720-63, 64-127Previous Preset, Next Preset70-71, 73-760-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)1280-63: Oh; 64-127: NoooHelix achieves self-awareness and starts poking fun of that face you make during the solo",{"id":2875,"title":2876,"titles":2877,"content":2878,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#block-bypass-via-midi-helix-lt","Block Bypass via MIDI (Helix LT)",[2829,2523],"If desired, turn Knob 4 (MIDI In) to assign an incoming MIDI CC message to turn the block on and off.\nIncoming CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected. Alternatively, press Knob 6 (Learn) and then send Helix LT a MIDI CC message. The incoming message is automatically selected. See \"Controller Assign\" for more information.",{"id":2880,"title":2553,"titles":2881,"content":492,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl",[2829],{"id":2883,"title":2884,"titles":2885,"content":2886,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#preset-and-snapshot-recall-via-midi","Preset and Snapshot Recall via MIDI",[2829,2553],"MIDI can be frustrating enough as it is without having to slog through a manual to figure out what messages your particular device needs to change presets. Conveniently enough, HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL have handy helper text to tell you exactly which MIDI messages will recall the current preset and snapshot. If not already there, press HOME VIEW to select Play view.Press the Upper Knob to open the Preset list: The dark text above Knob 3 displays the required MIDI messages for recalling presets and/or snapshots from external MIDI devices or software. In the illustration above, the 16B Pastor of Muppets preset is recalled with a PC (program change) message of 061, and Snapshot 1 is recalled with a CC69 message of 000. HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL respond to MIDI channel 1 by default, but this can be changed from \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\". When selecting different presets, HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL automatically transmit a MIDI Program Change message corresponding to the selected preset. If you'd prefer not to automatically transmit PC messages, set \"Global Settings > MIDI/ Tempo\" > MIDI PC Tx to \"Off.\"",{"id":2888,"title":2889,"titles":2890,"content":2891,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#block-bypass-via-midi","Block Bypass via MIDI",[2829,2553],"Press \u003C PAGE and PAGE > together to open the Menu.Press Knob 1 (Bypass Assign).Turn the Upper Knob to select the block whose bypass you want to assign to incoming MIDI.Press PAGE > and then Knob 3 (Learn). Send a MIDI CC message from your foot controller, keyboard, etc. The CC number appears above Knob 1 (MIDI In). Incoming CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected (see \"MIDI CC\"). To manually select a MIDI CC, instead of step 4 above, press PAGE > and turn Knob 1 (MIDI In) to select the desired MIDI CC number.",{"id":2893,"title":2894,"titles":2895,"content":2896,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#parameter-control-via-midi","Parameter Control via MIDI",[2829,2553],"From Edit view, press and hold the knob for the parameter you wish to control. HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL jump to the Controller Assign page and displays your parameter at Knob 1 (Parameter). Press PAGE > and then Knob 3 (Learn). Send a MIDI CC message from your foot controller, keyboard, etc. The CC number appears above Knob 3 (CC#). To manually select a MIDI CC, turn Knob 2 (Controller) to select \"MIDI CC\" and Knob 3 to the desired MIDI CC number. If desired, press PAGE > and turn Knob 1 (Min Value) and Knob 2 (Max Value) to set the range you wish to control. To reverse controller behavior, swap the min and max values. Press HOME when finished. Remember to save your preset to retain all assignments!",{"id":2898,"title":2899,"titles":2900,"content":2901,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#synchronizing-tempo-via-midi","Synchronizing Tempo via MIDI",[2829,2553],"Certain Delay and Modulation parameters such as Time and Speed can be represented with fixed numeric values (ms or Hz) or note values (1/4-note, dotted 1/8-note, etc.). When set to note values, the parameter will follow Tap Tempo or incoming MIDI clock. Press the parameter knob to toggle between ms (or Hz) and note values. By default, HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL respond to MIDI clock received from external gear (or your DAW software via USB). HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL can also transmit MIDI clock to external gear or software (transmit is disabled by default). MIDI clock reception (Rx) and transmission (Tx) can be enabled or disabled from the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" menu. In addition, certain modulation effects have distinct rhythmic elements; for example, a tremolo set to a square wave (sometimes called a \"slicer\") not only has a tempo but a beat, where the upswing of the wave lands with relation to your song. That is, the effect may be in perfect tempo-sync with your song, but its \"downbeat\" may be shifted ahead or behind of your drummer's-or in the studio-your recorded song's downbeat.",{"id":2903,"title":2904,"titles":2905,"content":2906,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#press-tap-once-on-the-downbeat-of-your-song","Press TAP once on the downbeat of your song.",[2829,2553,2899],"Any beat sync-based (sometimes called \"LFO\") effects reset from the beginning.",{"id":2908,"title":2856,"titles":2909,"content":2910,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-cc-1",[2829,2553],"HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL have reserved specific MIDI CC messages for global functions; these CCs cannot be used as controllers. If you attempt to learn a CC message reserved for global functions (see \"Controller Assign\"), the following dialog appears:",{"id":2912,"title":2861,"titles":2913,"content":2914,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#pedal-and-footswitch-assignments-1",[2829,2553,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunctionDevice10-127Emulates EXP 1 PedalBoth20-127Emulates EXP 2 PedalBoth490-127Emulates FS1Both500-127Emulates FS2Both510-127Emulates FS3Both520-127Emulates FS4Both530-127Emulates FS5Both540-127Emulates FS6HX Stomp XL550-127Emulates FS7HX Stomp XL560-127Emulates FS8HX Stomp XL",{"id":2916,"title":2917,"titles":2918,"content":2919,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#one-switch-looper-controls","One Switch Looper Controls",[2829,2553,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction600-63: Overdub; 64-127: Record1 Switch Looper Record/Overdub610-63: Stop; 64-127: Play1 Switch Looper Play/Stop6264-1271 Switch Looper Play Once6364-1271 Switch Looper Undo/Redo650-63: Forward; 64-127: Reverse1 Switch Looper Forward/Reverse660-63: Full; 64-127: HalfLooper Full/Half Speed",{"id":2921,"title":2871,"titles":2922,"content":2923,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#additional-controls-1",[2829,2553,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction0N/ABank MSB (unused but reserved)30-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)32N/ABank LSB (unused but reserved)54-590-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)6464-127Tap Tempo670-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)680-127Tuner screen on/off690-2, 8 and 9Snapshot select (0=Snapshot 1, 1=Snapshot 2, 2=Snapshot 3, 8=Next snapshot, 9=Previous snapshot)700-63: Bypass; 64-127: OnAll Bypass710-5Footswitch Mode (0=Stomp, 1=Scroll, 2=Preset, 3=Snapshot, 4=Next footswitch mode, 5=Previous footswitch mode)720-63, 64-127Previous Preset, Next Preset73-760-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)1280-63: Jealous; 128 64-127: CodependentHX Stomp and HX Stomp XL send late-night texts to all of your ex-significant others, professing your undying love to them and their cats",{"id":2925,"title":2926,"titles":2927,"content":2928,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#hx-effects","HX Effects",[2829],"The HX Effects device receives and transmits MIDI messages via its 5-pin MIDI In & Out connectors, as well as via USB, providing functionality with just about any MIDI hardware or software gear you may want to use with it. USB MIDI operation is functional with Mac & Windows computers, as well as with iPad or iPhone mobile devices.* Also see \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" for MIDI device options.",{"id":2930,"title":2931,"titles":2932,"content":2933,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#preset-recall-via-midi","Preset Recall via MIDI",[2829,2926],"To recall a preset, send a program change (PC) message to your HX Effects device on MIDI channel 1, according to the table below. BankPreset APreset BPreset CPreset D01PC:000PC:001PC:002PC:00302PC:004PC:005PC:006PC:00703PC:008PC:009PC:010PC:01104PC:012PC:013PC:014PC:01505PC:016PC:017PC:018PC:01906PC:020PC:021PC:022PC:02307PC:024PC:025PC:026PC:02708PC:028PC:029PC:030PC:03109PC:032PC:033PC:034PC:03510PC:036PC:037PC:038PC:03911PC:040PC:041PC:042PC:04312PC:044PC:045PC:046PC:04713PC:048PC:049PC:050PC:05114PC:052PC:053PC:054PC:05515PC:056PC:057PC:058PC:05916PC:060PC:061PC:062PC:06317PC:064PC:065PC:066PC:06718PC:068PC:069PC:070PC:07119PC:072PC:073PC:074PC:07520PC:0076PC:077PC:078PC:07921PC:080PC:081PC:082PC:08322PC:084PC:085PC:086PC:08723PC:088PC:089PC:090PC:09124PC:092PC:093PC:094PC:09525PC:096PC:097PC:098PC:09926PC:100PC:101PC:102PC:10327PC:104PC:105PC:106PC:10728PC:108PC:109PC:110PC:11129PC:112PC:113PC:114PC:11530PC:116PC:117PC:118PC:11931PC:120PC:121PC:122PC:12332PC:124PC:124PC:126PC:127 When navigating Presets from the HX Effects hardware (PRESETS encoder, preset footswitches, PRESET UP / PRESET DOWN, etc.), the HX Effects device automatically transmits a MIDI Program Change message corresponding to the selected preset. If you’d prefer not to automatically transmit PC messages, set \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" > MIDI PC Tx to \"Off.\"",{"id":2935,"title":2936,"titles":2937,"content":2938,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#snapshot-recall-via-midi","Snapshot Recall via MIDI",[2829,2926],"To recall a snapshot, send the HX Effects hardware a CC69 message according to the table below. SnapshotMIDI CC#Value169000269001369002469003Next69008Previous69009",{"id":2940,"title":2889,"titles":2941,"content":2942,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#block-bypass-via-midi-1",[2829,2926],"Press to open MENU.Press the SIGNAL FLOW switch.Turn the Big Knob to select the block for which its bypass you want to assign to incoming MIDI.Press > and turn Knob 3 (MIDI Bypass) to assign an incoming MIDI CC message to turn the block on and off. Incoming CC values 0-63 turn the block off; values 64-127 turn the block on. Note that some MIDI CCs are reserved for global functions and cannot be selected.",{"id":2944,"title":2894,"titles":2945,"content":2946,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#parameter-control-via-midi-1",[2829,2926],"From Stomp mode, press and hold the knob 1~3 for the parameter you wish to control. The HX Effects device jumps to the Controller Assign page and displays your parameter at Knob 1 (Parameter). Press the LEARN switch and then send a MIDI CC message from your foot controller, keyboard, etc. The CC number appears above Knob 3 (CC#). To manually select a MIDI CC, turn Knob 2 (Controller) to select \"MIDI CC\" and Knob 3 to the desired MIDI CC number. If desired, press and turn Knob 1 (Min Value) and Knob 2 (Max Value) to set the range you wish to control. To reverse controller behavior, swap the min and max values. Press HOME to return to the Home screen.",{"id":2948,"title":2851,"titles":2949,"content":2950,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-clock-send-and-receive-1",[2829,2926],"HX Effects is able to send and receive MIDI clock via its MIDI 5-pin in/out, as well as via USB. MIDI Clock options can be enabled and configured within the \"Global Settings > MIDI/Tempo\" options. MIDI Clock Send: Transmit MIDI clock to synchronize the tempo of external pedals, rack gear, and software to the current HX Effects TAP Tempo rate. MIDI Clock Receive: Synchronize the HX Effects time-based effects (such as delay and modulation) to incoming MIDI clock from external DAW software, drum machines, keyboard workstations, or other modelers. Note that the HX Effects TAP footswitch will flash blue (instead of the default red) to indicate the incoming tempo rate when receiving MIDI clock.",{"id":2952,"title":2856,"titles":2953,"content":2954,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#midi-cc-2",[2829,2926],"The HX Effects hardware has reserved specific MIDI CC messages for global functions; these CCs cannot be used as controllers. If you attempt to learn a CC message reserved for global functions (see \"Controller Assign\"), the following dialog appears:",{"id":2956,"title":2861,"titles":2957,"content":2958,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#pedal-and-footswitch-assignments-2",[2829,2926,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction10-127Emulates EXP 1 Pedal20-127Emulates EXP 2 Pedal490-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS1500-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS2510-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS3520-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS4530-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS5540-127Emulates Stomp footswitch mode’s FS6",{"id":2960,"title":2866,"titles":2961,"content":2962,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#looper-controls-1",[2829,2926,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction600-63: Overdub; 64-127: RecordLooper Record/Overdub switch (FS4)610-63: Stop; 64-127: PlayLooper Play/Stop switch (FS5)6264-127Looper Play Once switch (FS6)6364-127Looper Undo switch (FS1)650-63: Forward; 64-127: ReverseLooper Forward/Reverse switch (FS3)660-63: Full; 64-127: HalfLooper Full/Half Speed switch (FS2)670-63: Off; 64-127: OnLooper block on/off (if available); also enters/exits Looper footswitch mode",{"id":2964,"title":2871,"titles":2965,"content":2966,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/midi#additional-controls-2",[2829,2926,2856],"MIDI CC#ValueFunction6464-127\"Tap\" in a Tap Tempo value680-127Tuner screen on/off690-3, 8 and 9Snapshot select (0=Snapshot 1, 1=Snapshot 2, 2=Snapshot 3, 3=Snapshot 4, 8=Next snapshot, 9=Previous snapshot)700-63: Bypass; 64-127: OnAll Bypass720-63, 64-127Previous Preset, Next Preset71, 73-760-127Additional global MIDI commands (reserved for future use)1280-63: Guilt; 128 64-127: RegretThe HX Effects hardware calls your family and informs them of every single poor life decision you’ve ever made",{"id":2968,"title":2969,"titles":2970,"content":2971,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options","Reset Options",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL include convenient reset options that provide different functionality based on footswitch button combinations.",{"id":2973,"title":2969,"titles":2974,"content":2975,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options#reset-options",[],"To use Reset Options: Power off the deviceHold the desired button combinationPower on the deviceRelease the button combination Please note: Buttons are numbered from top left to bottom right.",{"id":2977,"title":2978,"titles":2979,"content":2980,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options#helix-floorlt","Helix Floor/LT",[2969],"Button CombinationDescription2LED light Fun3 & 4Test Mode5 & 6Global reset7 & 8Reset setlists to factory, Keep IRs8 & 9Reset setlists to factory, Clear IRs9 & 10Reset setlists to factory, Global reset, Clear IRs10 & 11Upgrades existing presets to latest format11 & 12Clear current preset5 & 12Clear setlists, clear IRs, Return system settings to default6 & 12Safe boot mode",{"id":2982,"title":2983,"titles":2984,"content":2985,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options#helix-rack","Helix Rack",[2969],"Since the rack doesn't have footswitches, you'll instead hold down a combination of the 6 encoders that are below the main LCD screen as you're booting up. Button CombinationDescriptionENC2 & ENC3Reset globalsENC3 & ENC4Restore stock presets and setlistsENC4 & ENC5Restore stock presets, setlists, and IRsENC5 & ENC6Reset globals and restore presets, setlists, and IRs (entire factory restore)ENC1 & ENC3Rebuild all presetsENC1 & ENC5Clear all presets, setlists, and IRsENC1 & ENC6Will enter Update Mode (This feature is only available on firmware v1.06.5 and higher)",{"id":2987,"title":2926,"titles":2988,"content":2989,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options#hx-effects",[2969],"Button CombinationDescriptionHolding FS3 & MODEWill clear all Presets and IRsHolding FS4 & FS5Reset Global SettingsHolding FS5 & FS6Reset Presets onlyHolding FS6 & TAPFactory restore (reset, Globals, IRs, and Presets)Holding the right arrow \">\"Will put the unit in a fail safe update mode. Use this when the HX Effects is in an un-recoverable state",{"id":2991,"title":2992,"titles":2993,"content":2994,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/reset-options#hx-stomphx-stomp-xl","HX Stomp/HX Stomp XL",[2969],"Button CombinationDescriptionPage >Update modeFS2 & FS3Factory ResetFS1 & FS2Reset PresetsUpper & Lower KnobsRebuild presetsFS1, 2 & 3Clear all presets/IRs/everything",{"id":2996,"title":2997,"titles":2998,"content":2999,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner","Tuner",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL have a tuner that includes three different modes, fine, course, and strobe. The Tuner accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string basses.",{"id":3001,"title":2997,"titles":3002,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#tuner",[],{"id":3004,"title":3005,"titles":3006,"content":3007,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#tuner-types","Tuner Types",[2997],"There are three tuner types: Fine: Color-changing, needle tuner with fine-tuning bar, the default.Coarse: Color-changing needle tuner with no fine-tuning bar.Strobe: Colors cycle left and right at a rate related to the frequency of the audio being analyzed. When the lights stops moving, your string matches the desired note. These types are selectable from Knob 4 (or Knob 3 on HX Stomp or HX Stomp XL) of the Tuner Settings. The Tuner accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string basses.",{"id":3009,"title":3010,"titles":3011,"content":3012,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#using-the-tuner","Using the Tuner",[2997],"Activate the Tuner On Helix, LT, Helix Control, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL:\nHold the TAP footswitch until the Tuner screen appears.On Helix Rack:\nhold TAP/TUNER until the Tuner screen appears. On HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL, you can also use ACTION + PAGE > to access the Tuner. Pluck an individual string on your guitar.\nWhen a box left of the center is lit red or yellow, your string is flat. When a box right of center is lit red or yellow, your string is sharp. When one of the center boxes on the lower row is lit green, the top row of smaller bars can be used for more precision. When both arrows are illuminated, your string is perfectly in tune.To exit the Tuner, step on any footswitch. All tuner settings are global. If you have a favorite pedal or rack tuner and wish to use it instead of the Helix tunerHelix and Rack: connect Send 1, 2, 3, or 4 to your tuner's input and turn Knob 2 (Tuner Out) to select that Send. This way, every time you hold the TAP footswitch, Helix will automatically route the signal to your favorite tuner.Helix LT: connect Send 1 or 2 to your tuner's input and turn Knob 2 (Tuner Out) to select Send 1/2. This way, every time you hold the TAP footswitch, Helix LT will automatically route the signal to your favorite tuner.HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL: connect the device's Send output to your tuner's input and turn Knob 1 (Output) to select \"Send L/R.\" This way, every time you hold the TAP footswitch, the device will automatically route the signal to your favorite tuner.",{"id":3014,"title":3015,"titles":3016,"content":3017,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#tuner-settings","Tuner Settings",[2997],"Some guitarists feel that tuning certain strings slightly sharp or flat in relation to concert tuning can improve intonation. String offsets calibrate the tuner so that these slightly out-of-tune pitches appear as in tune. String 6 is low E, and String 1 is high E.Tuning offsets (which are found after the settings listed below) won't be applied unless the Offsets option is turned on.",{"id":3019,"title":2523,"titles":3020,"content":3021,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#helix-rack-lt",[2997,3015],"PageKnobParameterDescription11Tuner InDetermines which input the tuner will listen to. Normally, it's best to choose \"Multi,\" which listens to the Guitar, Aux, and Variax inputs simultaneously.12Tuner OutDetermines the active output while the Tuner screen is active. If you prefer to hear nothing while tuning, choose \"Mute.\" Normally, it's best to choose \"Multi,\" which routes the input to 1/4\", XLR, Digital, and USB 1/2.13ReferenceIf you'd like to tune to a reference other than standard 440 Hz, select from 425 to 455 Hz.14TypeChoose between three Tuner types: Fine (color-changing, needle tuner with fine-tuning bar, the default), Coarse (color-changing needle tuner with no fine-tuning bar), or Strobe. The Tuner accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string basses.16OffsetsEnables the Tuner string offsets.",{"id":3023,"title":2553,"titles":3024,"content":3025,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl",[2997,3015],"PageKnobParameterDescription11OutputDetermines the active output while the Tuner screen is active. If you prefer to hear nothing while tuning, choose \"Mute.\" Normally, you should choose \"Main L/R.\".12RefrncIf you'd like to tune to a reference other than standard 440 Hz, select from 425 to 455 Hz.13TypeChoose between three Tuner types: Fine (color-changing, needle tuner with fine-tuning bar, the default), Coarse (color-changing needle tuner with no fine-tuning bar), or Strobe. The Tuner accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string basses.21OffsetsEnables the Tuner string offsets.",{"id":3027,"title":2926,"titles":3028,"content":3029,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/tuner#hx-effects",[2997,3015],"PageKnobParameterDescription11Tuner OutputDetermines the active output while the Tuner screen is active. If you prefer to hear nothing while tuning, choose \"Mute.\" Optionally, choose \"L/R\" to hear your unprocessed signal from the Main Left/Right outputs, or \"Send12\" to hear it from the Send 1/2 outputs.12ReferenceIf you'd like to tune to a reference other than standard 440 Hz, select from 425 to 455 Hz.13Display TypeChoose between three Tuner types: Fine (color-changing, needle tuner with fine-tuning bar, the default), Coarse (color-changing needle tuner with no fine-tuning bar), or Strobe. The Tuner accurately tunes notes down to 21.83 Hz (low F) for 5-string basses.21OffsetsEnables the Tuner string offsets.",{"id":3031,"title":2002,"titles":3032,"content":3033,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio",[],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL function as a USB 2.0, multiple-input/output, 24-bit-96kHz, low-latency audio interface for Windows and Mac computers, as well as for iPad or iPhone mobile devices (with optional Apple Camera Connection Kit adapter), and is compatible with all major DAW software.",{"id":3035,"title":2002,"titles":3036,"content":492,"level":9},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#usb-audio",[],{"id":3038,"title":3039,"titles":3040,"content":3041,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#operation","Operation",[2002],"Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL function as a USB 2.0, multiple-input/output, 24-bit-96kHz, low-latency audio interface for Windows and Mac computers, as well as for iPad or iPhone mobile devices (with optional Apple Camera Connection Kit adapter), and is compatible with all major DAW software. For USB audio operation:For Windows computers, it is necessary to download and install the Line 6 Helix ASIO driver.For Mac computers, it is only necessary to download and install the Line 6 Mac Core Audio driver if you desire audio sample rate operation at rates other than 48kHz.For iPad or iPhone mobile devices, there is no driver installation necessary.All drivers are available from line6.com/software. Please refer to the firmware Release Notes for driver support specific to the latest Windows and Mac operating systems. With the default Input and Output block settings in use, you'll automatically hear audio software playback on USB 1/2 routed directly to the XLR (if applicable), 1/4\" and Phones outputs. This lets you jam along with YouTube, iTunes, or your DAW tracks without hearing them through a bunch of amps and effects. If you set your DAW software track to record from USB 1/2, you'll capture your processed input signal in the DAW track-with zero-latency monitoring, since you hear your input from the hardware outputs before it is routed through your software. The additional USB Inputs and Outputs are available within the Input and Output blocks, and within your DAW software track menus. You can utilize these USB ins and outs for numerous routing configurations, all without patching extra cables-see the following examples.",{"id":3043,"title":3044,"titles":3045,"content":492,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#helix-and-rack","Helix and Rack",[2002,3039],{"id":3047,"title":3048,"titles":3049,"content":492,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#helix-lt","Helix LT",[2002,3039],{"id":3051,"title":2553,"titles":3052,"content":492,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl",[2002,3039],{"id":3054,"title":2007,"titles":3055,"content":3056,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#hardware-monitoring-vs-daw-software-monitoring",[2002],"Use of the default \"Multi\" settings for both the Input and Output blocks provides hardware monitoring, which allows you to hear your live input signal at all times, independent of your DAW software's monitor settings. Hardware monitoring can be desirable since it allows you to hear your live guitar with processing added and essentially \"latency-free,\" since the monitor signal is not routed through your DAW software. In some DAW recording scenarios, it may be preferable to utilize your recording application's \"input monitoring\" or \"software monitoring\" feature. This routes your live input signal through the armed recording track, thus allowing you to monitor the input effected by any plugins you may have inserted on the track. However, the one downside of DAW software monitoring is that your live input signal is delayed slightly due to being routed through the software and back to the outputs. This is referred to as \"latency.\" Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL are designed to provide very low latency operation-see \"ASIO Driver Settings (Windows)\" for info and settings.",{"id":3058,"title":2523,"titles":3059,"content":3060,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#helix-rack-lt",[2002,2007],"When a DAW track's software monitoring is active, you'll likely not want to hear the hardware monitoring signal simultaneously. To achieve this, you can set the Output block to USB Out 3/4 or 5/6. These Output block options will route your processed, stereo signal out to your DAW software without also providing the hardware monitoring to USB 1/2. You'll then need to set your DAW track to receive from the same selected USB Out to record the processed signal into the track - or, you can optionally set the DAW track input to USB 7 or USB 8 to record a dry DI signal-see the next section.",{"id":3062,"title":2553,"titles":3063,"content":3064,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl-1",[2002,2007],"When a DAW track's software monitoring is active, you'll likely not want to hear the device's hardware monitoring signal simultaneously. To achieve this, it is best to use the device's USB 5/6 inputs as your DAW audio track's input source and select the Main L/R Output block on the device's and turn its Level all the way down. This configuration allows you to hear and record only the dry, DI signal from the device into your audio track. (See the next section for more on recording a DI track.)",{"id":3066,"title":2012,"titles":3067,"content":3068,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#di-recording-and-re-amplification",[2002],"A common DAW recording technique is to record a dry DI (Direct Input) signal, such as the unprocessed signal from your guitar, Variax, or mic, along with your mic'ed or processed tone. This allows you to process the DI track later with plugins (such as the Line 6 Helix Native plugin) and/or \"re-amplify\" the DI track through an amp or other outboard gear. Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, and HX Stomp XL have handy options built right in for recording DI tracks, as well as for easy re-amplification of DI tracks back through your own tones, all without extra hardware or cabling!",{"id":3070,"title":2523,"titles":3071,"content":3072,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#helix-rack-lt-1",[2002,2012],"Helix, Rack, and LT offers two special DI outputs, USB Outs 7 and 8, which appear as available options within your DAW software track input menus. These two dedicated USB Outs are tapped directly from the Helix input sources of your choice. To configure the Helix input source for each, go to Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Re-amp Src (USB 7) and Re-amp Src (USB 8), where you can select Guitar, Aux, Variax, Variax Mags, or Mic (where applicable).",{"id":3074,"title":2017,"titles":3075,"content":3076,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#recording-a-dry-di-track",[2002,2012,2523],"For this example, we'll record guitar into two DAW tracks simultaneously, with one capturing the Helix-processed tone and the other the unprocessed DI guitar. In the Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Page 3 (page 2 for LT) screen, set Re-amp Src (USB 7) to \"Guitar\".Dial in your desired tone, while keeping the Input and Output blocks both set to the default \"Multi\" setting.Create two new audio tracks in your DAW software project: Create one mono track to record the dry DI guitar, and set the track's input to USB 7.Create one stereo track to record your full, stereo-processed tone and set the track's input to USB 1/2. Set both tracks' outputs, as well as the DAW Master output, to USB 1/2 to allow all tracks to play back through Helix, Rack, or LT. Setting the stereo track's output to USB 1/2 allows you to hear your processed tone via hardware monitoring while recording. For this configuration, disable software monitoring on all DAW tracks. Arm both these DAW audio tracks, hit the Record button and start laying down your guitar performance! Now you have your processed track to hear with the project and a separate DI track with which you can further experiment at any time with DAW plugins and/or re-amping.",{"id":3078,"title":3079,"titles":3080,"content":3081,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#re-amping","Re-amping",[2002,2012,2523],"If your DAW software provides options for routing individual audio tracks to outputs other than just the main USB Out 1/2, then you can use these steps for re-amping a dry recorded DI track back through Helix, Rack, or LT. In your DAW software, set the DI track's Output setting to a stereo USB Out other than USB Out 1/2. For this example we'll use USB Out 3/4.Create a new stereo track in your DAW project and set this track's Input and Output both to USB 1/2 - Let's name this track \"Re-amped.\" Arm the track for recording. In some DAW software, it may be necessary to also activate the software monitoring feature on this \"re-amped\" track to monitor the processed signal when playing back your project. See your software's documentation. On Helix, Rack, or LT, select the Input block and set it to receive from the same USB stereo pair (USB In 3/4) and keep the Output block set to \"Multi.\" Load your choice of amps and effects on the current Helix preset. Now play your DAW project and you'll hear the DI track \"re-amped\" through your Helix, Rack, or LT! Adjust the DI track's volume slider to make sure the signal feeding into Helix, Rack, or LT is not too hot. Tweak your amp & effects as desired while listening with the playback of your project mix.Once you have your re-amplified guitar tone they way you like it, Solo both the DI and re-amped tracks, rewind to the start of the project and hit the DAW Record button, allowing it to capture the signal into the new re-amped track in real-time. Allow the DI track to play to the end, stop recording, and you've created your new re-amped guitar track! Note that you still have your original Guitar DI track, and you can repeat this process to create additional re-amped tracks with different settings, add plugins, blend with your original guitar track, and more.",{"id":3083,"title":2553,"titles":3084,"content":3085,"level":497},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#hx-stomp-hx-stomp-xl-2",[2002,2012],"HX Stomp and HX Stomp XL offer two special DI outputs-USB Outs 5 and 6, which are fed directly from the Main L/MONO and RIGHT inputs. Also, note that USB Outs 7 and 8 are fed directly (unprocessed) from the Return/Aux In L/MONO and RIGHT inputs for simultaneously tracking a stereo digital piano, synth, drum machine, or other device.",{"id":3087,"title":2017,"titles":3088,"content":3089,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#recording-a-dry-di-track-1",[2002,2012,2553],"For this example, we'll record guitar into two DAW tracks simultaneously, with one capturing the processed tone and the other the unprocessed DI guitar. Create two new audio tracks in your DAW software project: Create one mono track to record the dry DI guitar, and set the track's input to the device's USB 5.Create one stereo track to record your full, stereo, processed tone and set the track's input to the device's USB 1/2. Set both tracks' outputs, as well as the DAW Master output to the device's USB 1/2 to allow all tracks to play back through the device. Setting the stereo track's output to the device's USB 1/2 allows you to hear your processed tone via the device's hardware monitoring while recording. For this configuration, disable software input monitoring on all DAW tracks. Arm both these DAW audio tracks, hit the Record button and start laying down your guitar performance! Now you have your processed track to hear with the project and a separate DI track with which you can further experiment at any time with DAW plugins and/or re-amping (see the next section).",{"id":3091,"title":3092,"titles":3093,"content":3094,"level":503},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#re-amping-through-hx-stomp-or-hx-stomp-xl","Re-amping Through HX Stomp or HX Stomp XL",[2002,2012,2553],"Now let's take the dry DI guitar track we recorded and route it back through the device for processing. From Play view, turn the Upper Knob to select the Input block and then turn the Lower Knob to choose \"Input USB 5/6.\"\nYou'll see that a small USB icon has replaced the Input block (also see \"Signal Present and Clip Indicators\"): In your DAW software, set the DI track's Output setting to the device's USB 5/6.Create a new stereo track in your DAW project and set both its Input and Output to USB 1/2. Arm the track for recording. In some DAW software, it may be necessary to also activate the software monitoring feature on this \"re-amped\" track to monitor the processed signal when playing back your project. See your software's documentation. Now play your DAW project and you'll hear the DI track \"re-amped\" through the device! Tweak your amp & effects blocks as desired while listening with the playback of your project mix.Once you have your re-amplified guitar tone they way you like it, Solo both the DI and re-amped tracks, rewind to the start of the project and hit the DAW Record button, allowing it to capture the signal into the new re-amped track in real-time.\nAllow the DI track to play to the end, stop recording, and you've created your new re- amped guitar track! Note that you still have your original Guitar DI track, and you can repeat this process to create additional re-amped tracks with different device settings, add plugins, blend with your original guitar track, and more.",{"id":3096,"title":3097,"titles":3098,"content":3099,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#core-audio-driver-settings-macos","Core Audio Driver Settings (macOS)",[2002],"To use Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, or HX Stomp XL as an audio interface for Mac applications, it is not necessary to install any additional driver. The device will automatically utilize the Mac computer's \"Class Compliant\" USB driver when connected to your USB port. The hardware will then appear as a selectable Core Audio device within the Mac Utilities > Audio MIDI Setup panel and/or directly within your audio and multimedia applications. The Apple Class Compliant driver offers strictly 48kHz native sample rate operation. If you prefer to use a different native sample rate (or if your particular DAW application requires it), you can optionally download and install the Line 6 Mac Core Audio driver from line6.com/software. This Line 6 driver offers 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88kHz, or 96kHz sample rate operation.",{"id":3101,"title":3102,"titles":3103,"content":3104,"level":28},"/tips-and-guides/universal/usb-audio#asio-driver-settings-windows","ASIO Driver Settings (Windows)",[2002],"When using Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, or HX Stomp XL as an audio interface for Windows DAW applications, it is highly recommended to configure the software to utilize the “ASIO” driver. The Line 6 ASIO driver offers the superior, low-latency audio performance required for DAW recording. This driver selection is typically found in your DAW software’s Preferences or Options dialog - see your software’s documentation. Download and install the latest Line 6 Helix ASIO driver from line6.com/software. Once the ASIO driver has been selected in your DAW software, you’ll also see a button in the same dialog for “ASIO Settings” (or with a similar title). Press this button to launch a Control Panel, where you make the following driver settings. SettingDescriptionSound Control PanelThis button launches the Windows Sound Control Panel, which is where you can optionally configure Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL to be the audio playback device for multimedia applications (such as Windows Media Player, iTunes, etc.) These settings are not relevant for your DAW software since these applications utilize the standard Windows driver.Default Bit DepthSelect the Bit Depth at which Helix, Rack, LT, HX Stomp, or HX Stomp XL will operate for recording and playback with your DAW software. 24 bit or 32 bit are recommended for quality audio production.ASIO Buffer SizeYour goal is to achieve the lowest latency possible in your DAW software, but with glitch-free audio performance. Smaller buffer size results in lower latency, however, also increases the demands on your computer, which can result in clicks, pops, or other audio artifacts. Start with a lower slider setting here and if you encounter audio performance issues, come back to this panel and move this slider to the right incrementally to remedy the problem. Click the Apply and OK buttons when your Control Panel settings are complete to return to your DAW software. Please also refer to your DAW software’s documentation for more about its own specific audio device, buffer, and project settings.",{"id":3106,"title":467,"body":3107,"description":469,"extension":3134,"meta":3135,"navigation":3140,"path":466,"seo":3141,"stem":3142,"__hash__":3143},"content/release-notes/helix/2-71.md",{"type":3108,"value":3109,"toc":3131},"minimark",[3110,3114,3117,3121],[3111,3112,472],"h1",{"id":3113},"firmware-271",[3115,3116,469],"p",{},[3118,3119,81],"h2",{"id":3120},"bug-fixes",[3122,3123,3124,3128],"ul",{},[3125,3126,3127],"li",{},"On some occasions, multiple Delay block parameters would not be controlled properly when set to a footswitch - FIXED",[3125,3129,3130],{},"Other bug fixes and improvements",{"title":492,"searchDepth":503,"depth":497,"links":3132},[3133],{"id":3120,"depth":28,"text":81},"md",{"release":3136,"category":3137,"prev":3138,"tags":3139},"12/5/18","Release Notes",{"to":1717,"title":3137},"2.71 release notes",true,{"title":467,"description":469},"release-notes/helix/2-71","K8RFMGd8DUlDKq9kDI9VZiJDE0SYHEJt-E3ON78IXkE",1752929611518]